Перевод: со всех языков на английский

с английского на все языки

a great many men

  • 1 many

    [ˈmenɪ] comparative more [mɔː]: superlative most [moust]
    1. adjective
    a great number of:

    You've made a great/good many mistakes.

    كَثير
    2. pronoun
    a great number:

    A few people survived, but many died.

    كَثير، عَدَد كَبير

    Arabic-English dictionary > many

  • 2 hamaika

    [from hamar (ten)-bede-ka ] zenb.
    1. [ zehaztua ]
    a. ( 11) eleven; \hamaika ehun (I) eleven hundred
    b. ( ordua) \hamaika(k) eta laurdenetan at a quarter past eleven | at eleven fifteen; goizeko hamarretik hamaiketaraino from ten to eleven o'clock in the morning
    c. (egunetan) eleventh; datorren hilaren \hamaikan on the eleventh of next month
    2. [ zehaztu gabe ]
    a. a great many, zillion Lagunart. ; \hamaika gizon galdu da itsasoan a great many men have been lost at sea; \hamaikatxo bider! a zillion times!; \hamaika aldiz esan dizut! I've told you a million times!; \hamaika amaren seme sartu da itsasoaren azpian a great many mother's sons have been engulfed by the sea; multinazionalek salgai ezarri dituzte \hamaika produktu ekologista izenpean multinationals have put up for sale many a product under an environmentally-friendly name
    b. mutilzahartuta ezkondu nintzela, hori \hamaikak esan du a lot have said that I married when I was a confirmed old bachelor; \hamaikari burua berotu zaie a great many have been {stirred || riled} up

    Euskara Ingelesa hiztegiaren > hamaika

  • 3 очень много человек

    Универсальный русско-английский словарь > очень много человек

  • 4 elemenia

    iz. ( guztiz kopuru handia) profusion, plethora, multitude, bounty, abundance; gizon \elemenia atera zen a great many men went out; \elemenia bat filme ikusirik having seen a great many films

    Euskara Ingelesa hiztegiaren > elemenia

  • 5 moltus

    multus (old form moltus), a, um; comp. plus; sup. plurimus (v. at the end of this art.), adj. [etym. dub.], much, great, many, of things corporeal and incorporeal.
    I.
    Posit.
    A.
    In gen.: multi mortales, Cato ap. Gell. 10, 3, 17: multi suam rem [p. 1173] bene gessere: multi qui, etc., Enn. ap. Cic. Fam. 7, 6, 1 (Trag. v. 295 sq. Vahl.):

    multi fortissimi viri,

    Cic. Fam. 5, 17, 3:

    rationes,

    id. de Or. 1, 51, 222. tam multis verbis scribere, at such length, id. Fam. 3, 8, 1:

    beneficia. Cato ap. Fest. s. v. ratissima, p. 286 Mull.: multi alii,

    Ter. And. 5, 4, 28.—When used with another adjective it is usually connected with it by a conjunction:

    multae et magnae contentiones,

    many great conlests, Cic. Phil. 2, 3, 7; 3, 10, 26:

    O multas et graves offensiones,

    id. Att. 11, 7, 3:

    multi et graves dolores,

    id. Verr. 2, 5, 45, § 119:

    multi et varii timores,

    Liv. 3, 16, 3:

    multae bonaeque artes animi,

    Sall. J. 28, 5:

    multa et clara facinora,

    Tac. A. 12, 31.—But when the second adjective is used substantively the conjunction is omitted:

    multi improbi,

    Cic. Off. 2, 8, 28; 2, 19, 65:

    multi boni, docti, prudentes,

    id. Fl. 4, 8:

    multi nobiles,

    id. Planc. 20, 50:

    multa acerba habuit ille annus,

    id. Sest. 27, 58; 66, 139:

    multa infanda,

    Liv. 28, 12, 5:

    multa falsa,

    id. 35, 23, 2.—Also, when the second adjective forms with its substantive a single conception:

    multa secunda proelia,

    victories, Liv. 9, 42, 5; 35, 1, 3; 41, 17, 1:

    multa libera capita,

    freemen, id. 42, 41, 11:

    multae liberae civitates,

    republics, Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 30, § 68:

    multos fortes viros,

    id. Cat. 3, 2, 7; id. Mur. 8, 17:

    multi clari viri,

    noblemen, id. Leg. 1, 5, 17:

    multi primarii viri,

    id. Verr. 2, 2, 61, § 149.—Similarly, et is omitted between multi and adjectives which form with their substantives familiar phrases:

    multi clarissimi viri,

    Cic. Phil. 11, 10, 24:

    multi amplissimi viri,

    id. Fin. 2, 17, 55; id. Deiot. 14, 39; id. Fam. 10, 25, 2; id. Att. 10, 8, 7; 16, 16, 11; id. Verr. 1, 7, 19:

    multi honestissimi homines,

    id. Fam. 15, 15, 3:

    multi peritissimi homines,

    id. Caecin. 24, 69:

    multi summi homines,

    id. Arch. 12, 30; id. Har. Resp. 26, 56:

    multi clarissimi et sapientissimi viri,

    id. Planc. 4, 11; id. Cael. 18, 43.—Et is also omitted when the substantive stands between the two adjectives:

    in veteribus patronis multis,

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 1, 2:

    multa praeterea bella gravia,

    id. Agr. 2, 33, 90:

    multis suppliciis justis,

    id. Cat. 1, 8, 20:

    multa majores nostri magna et gravia bella gesserunt,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 2, 6:

    plurima signa pulcherrima,

    id. Verr. 2, 1, 23, § 61.—When both adjectives follow the substantive, et is sometimes inserted:

    virtutes animi multae et magnae,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 22, 64:

    causas ille multas et graves habuit,

    id. Clu. 30, 82;

    and is sometimes omitted, the emphasis then falling on the second adjective: utebatur hominibus improbis, multis,

    id. Cael. 5, 12:

    prodigia multa, foeda,

    Liv. 40, 29, 1.—With a partitive gen.:

    multi hominum,

    Plin. 16, 25, 40, § 96:

    multae silvestrium arborum,

    id. 16, 31, 56, § 128.—In neutr. plur.: multa, orum, many things, much:

    nimium multa,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 14, 3:

    nimis multa,

    id. Fin. 2, 18, 57:

    insulae non ita multae,

    not so many, not so very many, Plin. 5, 7, 7, § 41:

    parum multa scire,

    too few, Auct. Her. 1, 1, 1: bene multi, a good many, Asin. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 33, 4:

    quam minime multa vestigia servitutis,

    as few as possible, Nep. Tim. 3, 3:

    minime multi remiges,

    exceedingly few, Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 34, § 88:

    in multas pecunias alienissimorum hominum invasit,

    id. Phil. 2, 16, 41; id. Verr. 2, 5, 19, § 48:

    multae pecuniae variis ex causis a privatis detinentur,

    Plin. Ep. 10, 17, 3.—Sometimes multi stands for multi alii, many others:

    nam certe Pompeio, et a Curionibus patre et filio, et a multis exprobratum est,

    Suet. Caes. 50.—The sing. also is used poet. for the plur., many a:

    aut trudit acres hinc et hinc multa cane Apros in obstantes plagas,

    with many dogs, Hor. Epod. 2, 31:

    multa prece prosequi,

    id. C. 4, 5, 33:

    multa victima,

    Verg. E. 1, 34: agna. Ov. F. 4, 772:

    avis,

    id. Am. 3, 5, 4:

    tabella,

    Tib. 1, 3, 28; so of persons: multus sua vulnera puppi Affixit moriens, many a one, for multi affixerunt, Luc. 3, 707.—In sing., to denote quantity, much, great, abundant: multum aurum et argentum. Plaut. Rud. 5, 2, 8; 22:

    exstructa mensa multa carne rancida,

    Cic. Pis. 27, 67:

    multo labore quaerere aliquid,

    with much labor, great exertion, Cic. Sull. 26, 73:

    cura,

    Sall. J. 7, 4:

    sol,

    much sun, Plin. 31, 7, 39, § 81: sermo, much conversalion, Brut. ap. Cic. Fam. 11, 20, 1: stilus tuus multi sudoris est. Cic. de Or. 1, 60, 257: multo cibo et potione completi, id. Tusc. 5, 35, 100:

    multo sanguine ea Poenis victoria stetit,

    Liv. 23, 30, 2:

    multum sanguinem haurire,

    Curt. 4, 14, 17; 8, 14, 32:

    multam harenam mare evomit,

    id. 4, 6, 8:

    arbor,

    id. 7, 4, 26:

    silva,

    id. 8, 10, 14:

    multae vestis injectu opprimi,

    Tac. A. 6, 50:

    multa et lauta supellex,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 27, 66:

    aurum,

    Sall. J. 13, 6; Tac. A. 6, 33; Liv. 26, 11, 9; Curt. 3, 3, 12:

    libertas,

    Hor. S. 1, 4, 5:

    multam salutem dicere alicui,

    to greet heartily, Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 194:

    cum auro et argento multo,

    Sall. J. 13, 6.—Of time:

    Itaque multum diei processerat,

    a great part of the day, Sall. J. 51, 2:

    ad multum diem,

    till far in the day, Cic. Att. 13, 9, 1:

    multo adhuc die,

    when much of the day was still remaining, when it was still high day, Tac. H. 2, 44:

    multo denique die,

    when the day was far spent, Caes. B. G. 1, 22:

    multa nocte,

    late at night, Cic. Q. Fr. 2, 9, 2:

    multo mane,

    very early, id. Att. 5, 4, 1:

    multa opinio, for multorum,

    the general opinion, Gell. 3, 16, 1:

    velut multa pace,

    as in a general peace, as if there were peace everywhere, Tac. H. 4, 35:

    multus homo,

    one who gives himself up to the lusts of many, Cat. 112, 1.— multi, orum, m., the many, the common mass, the multitude: probis probatus potius, quam multis forem, Att. ap. Non. 519, 9:

    video ego te, mulier, more multarum utier,

    id. ib. —Esp.: unus e (or de) multis, one of the multitude, a man of no distinction:

    tenuis L. Virginius unusque e multis,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 20, 62:

    unus de multis esse,

    id. Off. 1, 30, 109: M. Calidius non fuit orator unus e multis;

    potius inter multos prope singularis fuit,

    id. Brut. 79, 274:

    numerarer in multis,

    among the herd of orators, id. ib. 97, 333:

    e multis una sit tibi,

    no better than others, Ov. R. Am. 682:

    multum est,

    it is of importance, Verg. G. 2, 272.—In neutr. absol.: ne multa, or ne multis, not to be prolix, in short:

    ne multa: perquiritur a coactoribus,

    Cic. Clu. 64, 181:

    ne multis: Diogenes emitur,

    id. ib. 16, 47:

    quid multis moror?

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 87.—Sometimes multa is used (particularly by the poets) adverbially, much, greatly, very:

    multa reluctari,

    Verg. G. 4, 301:

    gemens,

    id. ib. 3, 226; id. A. 5, 869:

    deos testatus,

    id. ib. 7, 593:

    invehi,

    Nep. Ep. 6, 1 (cf. nonnulla invehi, id. Tim. 5, 3):

    haud multa moratus,

    Verg. A. 3, 610.—Rarely in multum:

    in multum velociores,

    by far, Plin. 10, 36, 52, § 108.—
    B.
    In partic.
    1.
    Too much, overmuch, excessive:

    supellex modica, non multa,

    Nep. Att. 13, 5.—
    2.
    In speech, much-speaking, diffuse, prolix:

    qui in aliquo genere aut inconcinnus aut multus est,

    Cic. de Or. 2, 4, 17:

    ne in re nota et pervulgata multus et insolens sim,

    id. ib. 2, 87, 358:

    nolo in stellarum ratione multus vobis videri,

    id. N. D. 2, 46, 119.—
    3.
    Frequent, frequently present:

    in operibus, in agmine, atque ad vigilias multus adesse,

    Sall. J. 96, 3:

    multus in eo proelio Caesar fuit,

    was in many places, Flor. 4, 2, 50:

    hen hercle hominem multum et odiosum mihi!

    troublesome, tedious, Plaut. Men. 2, 2, 41:

    instare,

    Sall. J. 84, 1.—Hence, adv., in two forms.
    A.
    multum, much, very much, greatly, very, often, frequently, far, etc. (class.):

    salve multum, gnate mi,

    Plaut. Trin. 5, 2, 56:

    multum vale,

    farewell, id. Stich. 3, 2, 40:

    hominem ineptum multum et odiosum mihi,

    id. Men. 2, 2, 42:

    opinor, Cassium uti non ita multum sorore,

    not very much, Cic. Fam. 7, 23, 3:

    multum mecum municipales homines loquuntur,

    often, id. Att. 8, 13, 2:

    non multum ille quidem nec saepe dicebat,

    id. Brut. 34, 128:

    non multum confidere,

    not very much, not particularly, Caes. B. G. 3, 25:

    sunt in venationibus,

    often, frequently, id. ib. 4, 1:

    in eodem genere causarum multum erat T. Juventius,

    Cic. Brut. 48, 178:

    multum fuisse cum aliquo,

    to have had much intercourse with, id. Rep. 1, 10, 16:

    sum multum equidem cum Phaedro in Epicuri hortis,

    id. Fin. 5, 1, 3:

    gratia valere,

    to be in great favor, Nep. Con. 2, 1:

    res multum et saepe quaesita,

    Cic. Leg. 3, 15, 33:

    longe omnes multumque superabit,

    id. Verr. 2, 5, 44, § 115:

    multum et diu cogitans,

    id. Div. 2, 1, 1:

    diu multumque scriptitare,

    id. de Or. 1, 33, 152.—With an adj.:

    multum loquaces,

    very talkative, Plaut. Aul. 2, 1, 5:

    mepti labores,

    very, Plin. Ep. 1, 9.— Poet. also with comp.:

    multum improbiores sunt quam a primo credidi,

    much, far, Plaut. Most. 3, 2, 139:

    multum robustior illo,

    Juv. 19, 197:

    majora,

    Sil. 13, 708.— So with infra, post:

    haud multum infra viam,

    Liv. 5, 37, 7; Plin. 98, 7, § 20:

    haud multum post mortem ejus,

    Tac. A. 5, 3:

    ut multum,

    at most, Mart. 10, 11, 6; Vop. Aur. 46.—
    B.
    multō by much, much, a great deal, far, by far (class.).
    1.
    With comparatives and verbs which imply comparison:

    multo tanto carior,

    Plaut. Bacch. 2, 3, 76:

    pauciores oratores,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 3, 11:

    facilius atque expeditius iter,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 6.—With verbs:

    virtutem omnibus rebus multo anteponentes,

    Cic. Fin. 4, 18, 49:

    multo ceteros anteibant,

    Tac. H. 4, 13:

    multo praestat beneficii, quam maleficii immemorem esse,

    Sall. J. 31, 28.—With malle:

    multo mavolo,

    Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 88; id. Ps. 2, 4, 38:

    meo judicio multo stare malo, quam, etc.,

    Cic. Att. 12, 21, 1.—
    2.
    With sup. (rare but class.), by far, by much:

    quae tibi mulier videtur multo sapientissuma,

    Plaut. Stich. 1, 2, 66; id. Am. 2, 2, 150: multo optimus hostis, by far, Lucil. ap. Non. 4, 413:

    simulacrum multo antiquissimum,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 49, § 109; 2, 4, 23, § 50; id. Cat. 4, 8, 17:

    maxima pars,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 18, 54; cf. Hor. S. 2, 3, 82:

    multo id bellum maximum fuit,

    Liv. 1, 11, 5:

    pars multo maxima,

    id. 30, 18, 14: multo molestissima, Cic. Div. in. Caecil. 11, 36:

    multo gratissima lux,

    Hor. S. 1, 5, 39:

    foedissimum,

    Quint. 9, 4, 72:

    optimum,

    id. ib. 26:

    pulcherrimum,

    id. 1, 2, 24:

    utilissima,

    id. 2, 10, 1:

    maxime,

    Auct. Her. 4, 44, 58:

    multo maxime miserabile,

    Sall. C. 36, 4:

    multo maxime ingenio validus,

    id. J. 6, 1.—
    3.
    With particles denoting a difference, far, greatly, very:

    multo aliter,

    Ter. And. prol. 4:

    multo aliter ac sperabat,

    far otherwise than, Nep. Ham. 2:

    quod non multo secus fieret, si,

    not far otherwise, not very different, Cic. Fam. 4, 9, 1: multo infra Cyrenaicum. Plin. 19, 3, 15, § 40. —
    4.
    In specifications of time, before ante and post, long, much:

    non multo ante urbem captam,

    Cic. Div. 1, 45, 101:

    non multo ante,

    not long before, Nep. Eum. 3, 3:

    multo ante,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 1, 1:

    non multo post, quam, etc.,

    not long after, id. Att. 12, 49, 9:

    haud multo ante solis occasum,

    Liv. 5, 39, 2:

    multo ante noctem,

    id. 27, 42, 13.—
    5.
    Very rarely with the positive for multum:

    maligna multo,

    very, Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 83 Umpf.—
    6.
    Doubled, multo multoque, with comparatives:

    multo multoque longior,

    far, very much, Front. ad M. Caes. 2, 5:

    multo multoque operosius est,

    Val. Max. 4, 1, 2: multo multoque magis, Front. Laud. Negl. § 3.
    II.
    Comp.: plūs, pluris; in the plur., plures, plura (in sing. anciently written plous; three times in the S. C. de Bacch. Here perh. belongs, in the plur., pleores and pleoris, for plures, in the Song of the Arval Brothers.—For the class. neuter of the plur., plura, the form pluria was used in ante-class. Latinity. Gellius cites M. Cato, Q. Claudius, Valerius Antias, L. AElius, P. Nigidius, and M. Varro as authorities for this form, Gell. 5, 21, 6; yet Plautus and Terence have only plura; and the earlier reading pluria, in Lucr. 1, 877; 2, 1135; 4, 1085, is now supplanted by the critically certain plura and plurima.—The gen. plur. plurium, however, has remained the predominant form, e. g. Quint. 7, 1, 1; 8, 4, 27; 9, 4, 66 et saep.) [from the root ple; Gr. pleon, pimplêmi; cf. plenus, plera, compleo, etc.; also locu-ples, plebes, populus, etc.], more.
    A.
    In the sing. (used both substantively and adverbially): LIBRAS FARRIS ENDO DIES DATO. SI VOLET PLVS DATO, Fragm. XII. Tab. in Gell. 20, 1, 45: SI PLVS MINVSVE SECVERVNT, SE FRAVDE ESTO, ib.;

    so (perh. in imitation of this legal phrase): ebeu, cur ego plus minusve feci quam aequom fuit!

    Plaut. Capt. 5, 3, 18; Ter. Phorm. 3, 3, 21:

    ne plus minusve loqueretur,

    Suet. Aug. 84; cf. Plaut. Men. 4, 2, 27; and in the signif. of circiter, about: septingenti sunt paulo plus aut minus anni... postquam, etc., Enn. ap. Varr. R. R. 3, 1, 2 (Ann. v. 493 Vahl.);

    so. non longius abesse plus minus octo milibus,

    Hirt. B. G. 8, 20, 1 Oud.; cf.:

    speranti plures... venerunt plusve minusve duae,

    Mart. 8, 71, 4:

    aut ne quid faciam plus, quod post me minus fecisse satius sit,

    too much... too little, Ter. Hec. 5, 1, 4:

    tantum et plus etiam ipse mihi deberet,

    Cic. Att. 7, 3, 7:

    vos et decem numero, et, quod plus est, Romani estis,

    and what is more, Liv. 9, 24, 8:

    verbane plus an sententia valere debeat,

    Cic. Top. 25, 96: [p. 1174] cf.:

    apud me argumenta plus quam testes valent,

    id. Rep. 1, 38, 59:

    valet enim salus plus quam libido,

    id. ib. 1, 40, 63.—
    (β).
    With a partitive gen.:

    vultis pecuniae plus habere,

    Cic. Inv. 1, 47, 88; cf.:

    nostri casus plus honoris habuerunt quam laboris,

    id. Rep. 1, 4, 7; so,

    plus virium,

    id. Leg. 1, 2, 6:

    plus hostium,

    Liv. 2, 42:

    plus dapis et rixae multo minus invidiaeque,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 17, 51:

    in hac causa eo plus auctoritatis habent, quia, etc.,

    Cic. Rep. 3, 16, 26; cf.:

    plus ingenii,

    id. ib. 1, 14, 22:

    Albano non plus animi erat quam fidei,

    as little courage as fidelity, Liv. 1, 27, 5.—
    (γ).
    With quam (some examples of which have already been given above):

    non plus quam semel,

    Cic. Off. 3, 15, 61:

    confiteor eos... plus quam sicarios esse,

    id. Phil. 2, 13, 31:

    ne plus reddat quam acceperit,

    id. Lael. 16, 58 et saep.:

    non plus quam in tres partis posse distribui putaverunt,

    into not more than, id. Inv. 1, 34, 57:

    plus quam decem dies abesse,

    id. Phil. 2, 13, 31:

    nulla (navis) plus quam triginta remis agatur,

    with more than, Liv. 38, 38, 8.—
    (δ).
    Without quam:

    HOMINES PLOVS V. OINVORSEI VIREI ATQVE MVLIERES, S. C. de Bacch. 19 (Wordsw. Fragm. and Spec. p. 173): plus mille capti,

    Liv. 24, 44:

    plus milies audivi,

    Ter. Eun. 3, 1, 32: plus semel, Varr. ap. Plin. 14, 14, 17, § 96:

    plus quingentos colaphos infregit mihi,

    Ter. Ad. 2, 1, 46:

    ferre plus dimidiati mensis cibaria,

    Cic. Tusc. 2, 16, 37:

    non plus mille quingentos aeris,

    id. Rep. 2, 22, 40:

    paulo plus ducentos passus a castris,

    Liv. 31, 34:

    cum plus annum aeger fuisset,

    id. 40, 2:

    parte plus dimidia rem auctam,

    id. 29, 25.—
    (ε).
    With a compar. or adverbial abl., or with an abl. of measure:

    VIREI PLOVS DVOBVS, S. C. de Bacch. 20 (Wordsw. Fragm. and Spec. p. 173): de paupertate tacentes Plus poscente ferent,

    more than the importunate, Hor. Ep. 1, 17, 44:

    ex his alius alio plus habet virium,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 2, 6: cave putes hoc tempore plus me quemquam cruciari, Balb. ap. Cic. Att. 8, 15, A, 2:

    alterum certe non potest, ut plus una vera sit,

    Cic. N. D. 1, 2, 5; cf.:

    in columba plures videri colores, nec esse plus uno,

    id. Ac. 2, 25, 79: HOC PLVS NE FACITO, more than this, Fragm. XII. Tab. ap. Cic. Leg. 2, 23, 59:

    annos sexaginta natus es Aut plus eo,

    or more than that, Ter. Heaut. 1, 1, 11:

    plus aequo,

    Cic. Lael. 16, 58:

    plus paulo,

    Ter. Heaut. 2, 1, 8:

    paulo plus,

    Liv. 31, 34: multo plus, Anton. ap. Cic. Att. 10, 8, A, 1:

    plus nimio,

    overmuch, Hor. Ep. 1, 10, 30: quam molestum est uno digito plus habere, too much by a finger, i. e. a finger too much, Cic. N. D. 1, 35, 99:

    uno plus Etruscorum cecidisse in acie,

    one man more, Liv. 2, 7, 2.—
    2.
    In the gen. pretii, pluris, of more value, of a higher price, for more, higher, dearer:

    ut plus reddant musti et olei, et pretii pluris,

    of greater value, Varr. R. R. 1, 7, 4:

    ager multo pluris est,

    is worth much more, Cic. Rosc. Com. 12, 33; cf.:

    quo pluris sint nostra oliveta,

    id. Rep. 3, 9, 16:

    pluris emere,

    dearer, id. Fam. 7, 2, 1; so,

    vendere,

    id. Off. 3, 12, 51; id. Verr. 2, 3, 19, § 48; Hor. S. 2, 3, 300:

    aedificare,

    Col. 1, 4, 7:

    pluris est oculatus testis quam auriti decem,

    of more value, Plaut. Truc. 2, 6, 8:

    mea mihi conscientia pluris est, quam omnium sermo,

    Cic. Att. 12, 28, 2:

    facio pluris omnium hominem neminem,

    id. ib. 8, 2, 4:

    facere aliquem pluris,

    make more of one, esteem him more highly, id. Fam. 3, 4, 2:

    pluris habere,

    id. Phil. 6, 4, 10:

    aestimare,

    id. Par. 6, 2, 48:

    ducere,

    id. Att. 7, 3, 5:

    putare,

    id. Off. 3, 4, 18 et saep.—
    3.
    Rarely, instead of the genitive, in the abl. pretii: plure vendunt, Lucil. ap. Charis. 2, p. 189 P.: plure altero tanto, quanto ejus fundus est, velim, Plaut. ib.: plure venit, Cic. ib.—
    4.
    Plus plusque, more and more: quem mehercule plus plusque in dies diligo. Cic. Att. 6, 2, 10.—
    * 5.
    Like magis, with an adj.:

    plus formosus, for formosior,

    Nemes. Ecl. 4, 72.—
    B.
    In the plur.
    1.
    Comparatively, more in number:

    omnes qui aere alieno premantur, quos plures esse intellego quam putaram,

    Cic. Att. 7, 3, 5; id. Rep. 2, 22, 40:

    nemini ego plura acerba esse credo ex amore homini umquam oblata quam mihi,

    Ter. Hec. 3, 1, 1:

    ne plura insignia essent imperii in libero populo quam in regno fuissent,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 31, 55:

    multo plura,

    many more things, Quint. 3, 6, 28.—
    2.
    In gen., of a great number, many: qui plus fore dicant in pluribus consilii quam in uno. Cic. Rep. 1, 35, 55: cf.: quid quaeso interest inter unum et plures, si justitia est in pluribus? id. ib. 1, 39, 61;

    1, 34, 52: non possunt una in civitate multi rem ac fortunas amittere, ut non plures secum in eandem trahant calamitatem,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 7, 19:

    quod pluribus praesentibus eas res jactari nolebat,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 18:

    plura castella Pompeius tentaverat,

    id. B. C. 3, 52:

    summus dolor plures dies manere non potest,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 28, 93:

    pluribus diebus, Quint. prooem. § 7: illic plurium rerum est congeries,

    id. 8, 4, 27:

    quae consuetudo sit, pluribus verbis docere,

    Cic. Clu. 41, 115:

    eum pluribus verbis rogat, ut, etc.,

    id. Verr. 2, 4, 28, § 64;

    without verba: quid ego plura dicam?

    id. de Or. 1, 5, 18:

    pluribus haec exsecutus sum,

    Phaedr. 3, 10, 59;

    also elliptically, quid plura? and, ne plura, like quid multa? and ne multa: hic sacra, hic genus, hic majorum multa vestigia. Quid plura? hanc vides villam, etc.,

    what need of many words? in short, Cic. Leg. 2, 1, 3:

    sed—ne plura—dicendum enim aliquando est—Pomponium Atticum sic amo, ut alterum fratrem,

    id. Fam. 13, 1, 5.—
    b.
    Esp.: plures.
    (α).
    The mass, the multitude, opp. pauciores, = hoi oligoi, Plaut. Trin. 1, 1, 13.—
    (β).
    Euphemistically, acc. to the Gr. hoi pleiones, the dead:

    quin prius Me ad plures penetravi?

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 14.—
    (γ).
    The greater number, the majority:

    plures nesciebant qua ex causa convenissent,

    Vulg. Act. 19, 32.
    III.
    Sup.: plūrĭmus (archaic form, plisima plurima, Paul. ex Fest. p. 204 and 205 Mull.: PLIOIRVME (I), Epit. of Scipio), a, um [from root ple; whence also plus, q. v., ploirumus for ploisumus; and thence the predominant form plurimus], most, very much, or many (as an adj. in good prose mostly in the plur., except the standing formula of greeting: salutem plurimam dicere alicui; v. infra):

    hujus sunt plurima simulacra,

    Caes. B. G. 6, 17:

    nos plurimis ignotissimi gentibus,

    Cic. Rep. 1, 17, 26:

    plurimae et maximae partes,

    id. ib. 1, 4, 8:

    plurimorum seculorum memoria,

    id. ib. 3, 9, 14:

    haec plurimis a me verbis dicta sunt,

    id. ib. 1, 7, 12 et saep.—In sing.:

    me plurima praeda onustum,

    Plaut. Rud. 4, 2, 4:

    sermo,

    Quint. 2, 2, 5:

    risus,

    id. 6, 3, 85:

    res,

    id. 6, 1, 51:

    exercitatio,

    id. 8 prooem. §

    28: mons,

    very large, Verg. A. 1, 419:

    cervix,

    id. G. 3, 52:

    Aetna,

    Ov. Ib. 600.—Of a greeting: impertit salutem plurimam, Lucil. ap. Non. 472. 16; and esp. freq.: salutem plurimam dicit (commonly abbrev. S. P. D.) at the beginning of letters; v. salus.— Poet.:

    medio cum plurimus orbe Sol erat,

    very powerful, oppressive, Ov. M. 14, 53: plurima qua silva est. thickest, id. ib. 14, 361:

    coma plurima,

    very thick, id. ib. 13, 844:

    sed plurima nantis in ore Alcyone conjux,

    mostly, chiefly, id. ib. 11, 562.—And collect.:

    plurimus in Junonis honorem Aptum dicet equis Argos,

    many a one, very many, Hor. C. 1, 7, 8; so,

    oleaster plurimus,

    Verg. G. 2, 183:

    qua plurima mittitur ales,

    Mart. 9, 56, 1:

    plurima lecta rosa est,

    Ov. F. 4, 441.— In neutr. absol. (substant. or adverb.):

    ut haberet quam plurimum,

    as much as possible, Cic. Rab. Post. 14, 39:

    caput autem est, quam plurimum scribere,

    id. de Or. 1, 33, 150:

    ut in quoque oratore plurimum esset,

    id. Rep. 1, 27, 123.— Adv.: plūrĭmum:

    et is valebat in suffragio plurimum, cujus plurimum intererat, esse in optimo statu civitatem,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 22, 40:

    auspiciis plurimum obsecutus est Romulus,

    id. ib. 2, 9, 16:

    si vero populus plurimum potest,

    id. ib. 3, 14, 23; cf.:

    qui apud me dignitate plurimum possunt,

    id. Rosc. Am. 1, 4:

    plurimum aliis praestare,

    id. Inv. 2, 1, 1:

    ut te plurimum diligam,

    id. Fam. 1, 7, 1; id. Tusc. 5, 27, 78:

    hoc ego utor uno omnium plurimum,

    id. Fam. 11, 16, 2:

    quantum (al. quanto) plurimum possunt,

    Quint. 11, 3, 120: plurimum quantum also signifies very much indeed, exceedingly (post-class.):

    plurimum quantum veritati nocuere,

    Min. Fel. Oct. 22:

    gratulor,

    id. ib. 40:

    (elleborum) ex aqua datur plurimum drachma,

    at the most, Plin. 25, 5, 22, § 54; 9, 36, 60, § 125; 30, 6, 16, § 48; so,

    cum plurimum,

    id. 2, 17, 15, § 78 (opp. to cum minimum); 18, 7, 10, § 60: nec tam numerosa differentia; tribus ut plurimum bonitatibus distat, for the most part, commonly, usually, = plerumque, Plin. 15, 3, 4, § 18.—
    (β).
    In neutr. with a partit. gen.: sententiarum et gravitatis plurimum, Cic. Inv. 1, 18, 25:

    artis,

    Quint. 10, 5, 3:

    auctoritatis et ponderis,

    id. 9, 4, 91:

    ut laboris sic utilitatis etiam longe plurimum,

    id. 10, 3, 1:

    virtutum,

    id. 12, 1, 20 plurimum quantum favoris partibus dabat fratermtas ducum, Flor. 4, 2, 74.—
    (γ).
    In the gen. pretii:

    plurimi: immo unice unum plurimi pendit,

    values very highly, esteems very much, Plaut. Bacch. 2, 2, 29:

    quem unum Alexander plurimi fecerat,

    Nep. Eum. 2, 2:

    ut quisque quod plurimi est possidet,

    Cic. Par. 6, 2, 48.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > moltus

  • 6 multi

    multus (old form moltus), a, um; comp. plus; sup. plurimus (v. at the end of this art.), adj. [etym. dub.], much, great, many, of things corporeal and incorporeal.
    I.
    Posit.
    A.
    In gen.: multi mortales, Cato ap. Gell. 10, 3, 17: multi suam rem [p. 1173] bene gessere: multi qui, etc., Enn. ap. Cic. Fam. 7, 6, 1 (Trag. v. 295 sq. Vahl.):

    multi fortissimi viri,

    Cic. Fam. 5, 17, 3:

    rationes,

    id. de Or. 1, 51, 222. tam multis verbis scribere, at such length, id. Fam. 3, 8, 1:

    beneficia. Cato ap. Fest. s. v. ratissima, p. 286 Mull.: multi alii,

    Ter. And. 5, 4, 28.—When used with another adjective it is usually connected with it by a conjunction:

    multae et magnae contentiones,

    many great conlests, Cic. Phil. 2, 3, 7; 3, 10, 26:

    O multas et graves offensiones,

    id. Att. 11, 7, 3:

    multi et graves dolores,

    id. Verr. 2, 5, 45, § 119:

    multi et varii timores,

    Liv. 3, 16, 3:

    multae bonaeque artes animi,

    Sall. J. 28, 5:

    multa et clara facinora,

    Tac. A. 12, 31.—But when the second adjective is used substantively the conjunction is omitted:

    multi improbi,

    Cic. Off. 2, 8, 28; 2, 19, 65:

    multi boni, docti, prudentes,

    id. Fl. 4, 8:

    multi nobiles,

    id. Planc. 20, 50:

    multa acerba habuit ille annus,

    id. Sest. 27, 58; 66, 139:

    multa infanda,

    Liv. 28, 12, 5:

    multa falsa,

    id. 35, 23, 2.—Also, when the second adjective forms with its substantive a single conception:

    multa secunda proelia,

    victories, Liv. 9, 42, 5; 35, 1, 3; 41, 17, 1:

    multa libera capita,

    freemen, id. 42, 41, 11:

    multae liberae civitates,

    republics, Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 30, § 68:

    multos fortes viros,

    id. Cat. 3, 2, 7; id. Mur. 8, 17:

    multi clari viri,

    noblemen, id. Leg. 1, 5, 17:

    multi primarii viri,

    id. Verr. 2, 2, 61, § 149.—Similarly, et is omitted between multi and adjectives which form with their substantives familiar phrases:

    multi clarissimi viri,

    Cic. Phil. 11, 10, 24:

    multi amplissimi viri,

    id. Fin. 2, 17, 55; id. Deiot. 14, 39; id. Fam. 10, 25, 2; id. Att. 10, 8, 7; 16, 16, 11; id. Verr. 1, 7, 19:

    multi honestissimi homines,

    id. Fam. 15, 15, 3:

    multi peritissimi homines,

    id. Caecin. 24, 69:

    multi summi homines,

    id. Arch. 12, 30; id. Har. Resp. 26, 56:

    multi clarissimi et sapientissimi viri,

    id. Planc. 4, 11; id. Cael. 18, 43.—Et is also omitted when the substantive stands between the two adjectives:

    in veteribus patronis multis,

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 1, 2:

    multa praeterea bella gravia,

    id. Agr. 2, 33, 90:

    multis suppliciis justis,

    id. Cat. 1, 8, 20:

    multa majores nostri magna et gravia bella gesserunt,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 2, 6:

    plurima signa pulcherrima,

    id. Verr. 2, 1, 23, § 61.—When both adjectives follow the substantive, et is sometimes inserted:

    virtutes animi multae et magnae,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 22, 64:

    causas ille multas et graves habuit,

    id. Clu. 30, 82;

    and is sometimes omitted, the emphasis then falling on the second adjective: utebatur hominibus improbis, multis,

    id. Cael. 5, 12:

    prodigia multa, foeda,

    Liv. 40, 29, 1.—With a partitive gen.:

    multi hominum,

    Plin. 16, 25, 40, § 96:

    multae silvestrium arborum,

    id. 16, 31, 56, § 128.—In neutr. plur.: multa, orum, many things, much:

    nimium multa,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 14, 3:

    nimis multa,

    id. Fin. 2, 18, 57:

    insulae non ita multae,

    not so many, not so very many, Plin. 5, 7, 7, § 41:

    parum multa scire,

    too few, Auct. Her. 1, 1, 1: bene multi, a good many, Asin. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 33, 4:

    quam minime multa vestigia servitutis,

    as few as possible, Nep. Tim. 3, 3:

    minime multi remiges,

    exceedingly few, Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 34, § 88:

    in multas pecunias alienissimorum hominum invasit,

    id. Phil. 2, 16, 41; id. Verr. 2, 5, 19, § 48:

    multae pecuniae variis ex causis a privatis detinentur,

    Plin. Ep. 10, 17, 3.—Sometimes multi stands for multi alii, many others:

    nam certe Pompeio, et a Curionibus patre et filio, et a multis exprobratum est,

    Suet. Caes. 50.—The sing. also is used poet. for the plur., many a:

    aut trudit acres hinc et hinc multa cane Apros in obstantes plagas,

    with many dogs, Hor. Epod. 2, 31:

    multa prece prosequi,

    id. C. 4, 5, 33:

    multa victima,

    Verg. E. 1, 34: agna. Ov. F. 4, 772:

    avis,

    id. Am. 3, 5, 4:

    tabella,

    Tib. 1, 3, 28; so of persons: multus sua vulnera puppi Affixit moriens, many a one, for multi affixerunt, Luc. 3, 707.—In sing., to denote quantity, much, great, abundant: multum aurum et argentum. Plaut. Rud. 5, 2, 8; 22:

    exstructa mensa multa carne rancida,

    Cic. Pis. 27, 67:

    multo labore quaerere aliquid,

    with much labor, great exertion, Cic. Sull. 26, 73:

    cura,

    Sall. J. 7, 4:

    sol,

    much sun, Plin. 31, 7, 39, § 81: sermo, much conversalion, Brut. ap. Cic. Fam. 11, 20, 1: stilus tuus multi sudoris est. Cic. de Or. 1, 60, 257: multo cibo et potione completi, id. Tusc. 5, 35, 100:

    multo sanguine ea Poenis victoria stetit,

    Liv. 23, 30, 2:

    multum sanguinem haurire,

    Curt. 4, 14, 17; 8, 14, 32:

    multam harenam mare evomit,

    id. 4, 6, 8:

    arbor,

    id. 7, 4, 26:

    silva,

    id. 8, 10, 14:

    multae vestis injectu opprimi,

    Tac. A. 6, 50:

    multa et lauta supellex,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 27, 66:

    aurum,

    Sall. J. 13, 6; Tac. A. 6, 33; Liv. 26, 11, 9; Curt. 3, 3, 12:

    libertas,

    Hor. S. 1, 4, 5:

    multam salutem dicere alicui,

    to greet heartily, Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 194:

    cum auro et argento multo,

    Sall. J. 13, 6.—Of time:

    Itaque multum diei processerat,

    a great part of the day, Sall. J. 51, 2:

    ad multum diem,

    till far in the day, Cic. Att. 13, 9, 1:

    multo adhuc die,

    when much of the day was still remaining, when it was still high day, Tac. H. 2, 44:

    multo denique die,

    when the day was far spent, Caes. B. G. 1, 22:

    multa nocte,

    late at night, Cic. Q. Fr. 2, 9, 2:

    multo mane,

    very early, id. Att. 5, 4, 1:

    multa opinio, for multorum,

    the general opinion, Gell. 3, 16, 1:

    velut multa pace,

    as in a general peace, as if there were peace everywhere, Tac. H. 4, 35:

    multus homo,

    one who gives himself up to the lusts of many, Cat. 112, 1.— multi, orum, m., the many, the common mass, the multitude: probis probatus potius, quam multis forem, Att. ap. Non. 519, 9:

    video ego te, mulier, more multarum utier,

    id. ib. —Esp.: unus e (or de) multis, one of the multitude, a man of no distinction:

    tenuis L. Virginius unusque e multis,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 20, 62:

    unus de multis esse,

    id. Off. 1, 30, 109: M. Calidius non fuit orator unus e multis;

    potius inter multos prope singularis fuit,

    id. Brut. 79, 274:

    numerarer in multis,

    among the herd of orators, id. ib. 97, 333:

    e multis una sit tibi,

    no better than others, Ov. R. Am. 682:

    multum est,

    it is of importance, Verg. G. 2, 272.—In neutr. absol.: ne multa, or ne multis, not to be prolix, in short:

    ne multa: perquiritur a coactoribus,

    Cic. Clu. 64, 181:

    ne multis: Diogenes emitur,

    id. ib. 16, 47:

    quid multis moror?

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 87.—Sometimes multa is used (particularly by the poets) adverbially, much, greatly, very:

    multa reluctari,

    Verg. G. 4, 301:

    gemens,

    id. ib. 3, 226; id. A. 5, 869:

    deos testatus,

    id. ib. 7, 593:

    invehi,

    Nep. Ep. 6, 1 (cf. nonnulla invehi, id. Tim. 5, 3):

    haud multa moratus,

    Verg. A. 3, 610.—Rarely in multum:

    in multum velociores,

    by far, Plin. 10, 36, 52, § 108.—
    B.
    In partic.
    1.
    Too much, overmuch, excessive:

    supellex modica, non multa,

    Nep. Att. 13, 5.—
    2.
    In speech, much-speaking, diffuse, prolix:

    qui in aliquo genere aut inconcinnus aut multus est,

    Cic. de Or. 2, 4, 17:

    ne in re nota et pervulgata multus et insolens sim,

    id. ib. 2, 87, 358:

    nolo in stellarum ratione multus vobis videri,

    id. N. D. 2, 46, 119.—
    3.
    Frequent, frequently present:

    in operibus, in agmine, atque ad vigilias multus adesse,

    Sall. J. 96, 3:

    multus in eo proelio Caesar fuit,

    was in many places, Flor. 4, 2, 50:

    hen hercle hominem multum et odiosum mihi!

    troublesome, tedious, Plaut. Men. 2, 2, 41:

    instare,

    Sall. J. 84, 1.—Hence, adv., in two forms.
    A.
    multum, much, very much, greatly, very, often, frequently, far, etc. (class.):

    salve multum, gnate mi,

    Plaut. Trin. 5, 2, 56:

    multum vale,

    farewell, id. Stich. 3, 2, 40:

    hominem ineptum multum et odiosum mihi,

    id. Men. 2, 2, 42:

    opinor, Cassium uti non ita multum sorore,

    not very much, Cic. Fam. 7, 23, 3:

    multum mecum municipales homines loquuntur,

    often, id. Att. 8, 13, 2:

    non multum ille quidem nec saepe dicebat,

    id. Brut. 34, 128:

    non multum confidere,

    not very much, not particularly, Caes. B. G. 3, 25:

    sunt in venationibus,

    often, frequently, id. ib. 4, 1:

    in eodem genere causarum multum erat T. Juventius,

    Cic. Brut. 48, 178:

    multum fuisse cum aliquo,

    to have had much intercourse with, id. Rep. 1, 10, 16:

    sum multum equidem cum Phaedro in Epicuri hortis,

    id. Fin. 5, 1, 3:

    gratia valere,

    to be in great favor, Nep. Con. 2, 1:

    res multum et saepe quaesita,

    Cic. Leg. 3, 15, 33:

    longe omnes multumque superabit,

    id. Verr. 2, 5, 44, § 115:

    multum et diu cogitans,

    id. Div. 2, 1, 1:

    diu multumque scriptitare,

    id. de Or. 1, 33, 152.—With an adj.:

    multum loquaces,

    very talkative, Plaut. Aul. 2, 1, 5:

    mepti labores,

    very, Plin. Ep. 1, 9.— Poet. also with comp.:

    multum improbiores sunt quam a primo credidi,

    much, far, Plaut. Most. 3, 2, 139:

    multum robustior illo,

    Juv. 19, 197:

    majora,

    Sil. 13, 708.— So with infra, post:

    haud multum infra viam,

    Liv. 5, 37, 7; Plin. 98, 7, § 20:

    haud multum post mortem ejus,

    Tac. A. 5, 3:

    ut multum,

    at most, Mart. 10, 11, 6; Vop. Aur. 46.—
    B.
    multō by much, much, a great deal, far, by far (class.).
    1.
    With comparatives and verbs which imply comparison:

    multo tanto carior,

    Plaut. Bacch. 2, 3, 76:

    pauciores oratores,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 3, 11:

    facilius atque expeditius iter,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 6.—With verbs:

    virtutem omnibus rebus multo anteponentes,

    Cic. Fin. 4, 18, 49:

    multo ceteros anteibant,

    Tac. H. 4, 13:

    multo praestat beneficii, quam maleficii immemorem esse,

    Sall. J. 31, 28.—With malle:

    multo mavolo,

    Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 88; id. Ps. 2, 4, 38:

    meo judicio multo stare malo, quam, etc.,

    Cic. Att. 12, 21, 1.—
    2.
    With sup. (rare but class.), by far, by much:

    quae tibi mulier videtur multo sapientissuma,

    Plaut. Stich. 1, 2, 66; id. Am. 2, 2, 150: multo optimus hostis, by far, Lucil. ap. Non. 4, 413:

    simulacrum multo antiquissimum,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 49, § 109; 2, 4, 23, § 50; id. Cat. 4, 8, 17:

    maxima pars,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 18, 54; cf. Hor. S. 2, 3, 82:

    multo id bellum maximum fuit,

    Liv. 1, 11, 5:

    pars multo maxima,

    id. 30, 18, 14: multo molestissima, Cic. Div. in. Caecil. 11, 36:

    multo gratissima lux,

    Hor. S. 1, 5, 39:

    foedissimum,

    Quint. 9, 4, 72:

    optimum,

    id. ib. 26:

    pulcherrimum,

    id. 1, 2, 24:

    utilissima,

    id. 2, 10, 1:

    maxime,

    Auct. Her. 4, 44, 58:

    multo maxime miserabile,

    Sall. C. 36, 4:

    multo maxime ingenio validus,

    id. J. 6, 1.—
    3.
    With particles denoting a difference, far, greatly, very:

    multo aliter,

    Ter. And. prol. 4:

    multo aliter ac sperabat,

    far otherwise than, Nep. Ham. 2:

    quod non multo secus fieret, si,

    not far otherwise, not very different, Cic. Fam. 4, 9, 1: multo infra Cyrenaicum. Plin. 19, 3, 15, § 40. —
    4.
    In specifications of time, before ante and post, long, much:

    non multo ante urbem captam,

    Cic. Div. 1, 45, 101:

    non multo ante,

    not long before, Nep. Eum. 3, 3:

    multo ante,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 1, 1:

    non multo post, quam, etc.,

    not long after, id. Att. 12, 49, 9:

    haud multo ante solis occasum,

    Liv. 5, 39, 2:

    multo ante noctem,

    id. 27, 42, 13.—
    5.
    Very rarely with the positive for multum:

    maligna multo,

    very, Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 83 Umpf.—
    6.
    Doubled, multo multoque, with comparatives:

    multo multoque longior,

    far, very much, Front. ad M. Caes. 2, 5:

    multo multoque operosius est,

    Val. Max. 4, 1, 2: multo multoque magis, Front. Laud. Negl. § 3.
    II.
    Comp.: plūs, pluris; in the plur., plures, plura (in sing. anciently written plous; three times in the S. C. de Bacch. Here perh. belongs, in the plur., pleores and pleoris, for plures, in the Song of the Arval Brothers.—For the class. neuter of the plur., plura, the form pluria was used in ante-class. Latinity. Gellius cites M. Cato, Q. Claudius, Valerius Antias, L. AElius, P. Nigidius, and M. Varro as authorities for this form, Gell. 5, 21, 6; yet Plautus and Terence have only plura; and the earlier reading pluria, in Lucr. 1, 877; 2, 1135; 4, 1085, is now supplanted by the critically certain plura and plurima.—The gen. plur. plurium, however, has remained the predominant form, e. g. Quint. 7, 1, 1; 8, 4, 27; 9, 4, 66 et saep.) [from the root ple; Gr. pleon, pimplêmi; cf. plenus, plera, compleo, etc.; also locu-ples, plebes, populus, etc.], more.
    A.
    In the sing. (used both substantively and adverbially): LIBRAS FARRIS ENDO DIES DATO. SI VOLET PLVS DATO, Fragm. XII. Tab. in Gell. 20, 1, 45: SI PLVS MINVSVE SECVERVNT, SE FRAVDE ESTO, ib.;

    so (perh. in imitation of this legal phrase): ebeu, cur ego plus minusve feci quam aequom fuit!

    Plaut. Capt. 5, 3, 18; Ter. Phorm. 3, 3, 21:

    ne plus minusve loqueretur,

    Suet. Aug. 84; cf. Plaut. Men. 4, 2, 27; and in the signif. of circiter, about: septingenti sunt paulo plus aut minus anni... postquam, etc., Enn. ap. Varr. R. R. 3, 1, 2 (Ann. v. 493 Vahl.);

    so. non longius abesse plus minus octo milibus,

    Hirt. B. G. 8, 20, 1 Oud.; cf.:

    speranti plures... venerunt plusve minusve duae,

    Mart. 8, 71, 4:

    aut ne quid faciam plus, quod post me minus fecisse satius sit,

    too much... too little, Ter. Hec. 5, 1, 4:

    tantum et plus etiam ipse mihi deberet,

    Cic. Att. 7, 3, 7:

    vos et decem numero, et, quod plus est, Romani estis,

    and what is more, Liv. 9, 24, 8:

    verbane plus an sententia valere debeat,

    Cic. Top. 25, 96: [p. 1174] cf.:

    apud me argumenta plus quam testes valent,

    id. Rep. 1, 38, 59:

    valet enim salus plus quam libido,

    id. ib. 1, 40, 63.—
    (β).
    With a partitive gen.:

    vultis pecuniae plus habere,

    Cic. Inv. 1, 47, 88; cf.:

    nostri casus plus honoris habuerunt quam laboris,

    id. Rep. 1, 4, 7; so,

    plus virium,

    id. Leg. 1, 2, 6:

    plus hostium,

    Liv. 2, 42:

    plus dapis et rixae multo minus invidiaeque,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 17, 51:

    in hac causa eo plus auctoritatis habent, quia, etc.,

    Cic. Rep. 3, 16, 26; cf.:

    plus ingenii,

    id. ib. 1, 14, 22:

    Albano non plus animi erat quam fidei,

    as little courage as fidelity, Liv. 1, 27, 5.—
    (γ).
    With quam (some examples of which have already been given above):

    non plus quam semel,

    Cic. Off. 3, 15, 61:

    confiteor eos... plus quam sicarios esse,

    id. Phil. 2, 13, 31:

    ne plus reddat quam acceperit,

    id. Lael. 16, 58 et saep.:

    non plus quam in tres partis posse distribui putaverunt,

    into not more than, id. Inv. 1, 34, 57:

    plus quam decem dies abesse,

    id. Phil. 2, 13, 31:

    nulla (navis) plus quam triginta remis agatur,

    with more than, Liv. 38, 38, 8.—
    (δ).
    Without quam:

    HOMINES PLOVS V. OINVORSEI VIREI ATQVE MVLIERES, S. C. de Bacch. 19 (Wordsw. Fragm. and Spec. p. 173): plus mille capti,

    Liv. 24, 44:

    plus milies audivi,

    Ter. Eun. 3, 1, 32: plus semel, Varr. ap. Plin. 14, 14, 17, § 96:

    plus quingentos colaphos infregit mihi,

    Ter. Ad. 2, 1, 46:

    ferre plus dimidiati mensis cibaria,

    Cic. Tusc. 2, 16, 37:

    non plus mille quingentos aeris,

    id. Rep. 2, 22, 40:

    paulo plus ducentos passus a castris,

    Liv. 31, 34:

    cum plus annum aeger fuisset,

    id. 40, 2:

    parte plus dimidia rem auctam,

    id. 29, 25.—
    (ε).
    With a compar. or adverbial abl., or with an abl. of measure:

    VIREI PLOVS DVOBVS, S. C. de Bacch. 20 (Wordsw. Fragm. and Spec. p. 173): de paupertate tacentes Plus poscente ferent,

    more than the importunate, Hor. Ep. 1, 17, 44:

    ex his alius alio plus habet virium,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 2, 6: cave putes hoc tempore plus me quemquam cruciari, Balb. ap. Cic. Att. 8, 15, A, 2:

    alterum certe non potest, ut plus una vera sit,

    Cic. N. D. 1, 2, 5; cf.:

    in columba plures videri colores, nec esse plus uno,

    id. Ac. 2, 25, 79: HOC PLVS NE FACITO, more than this, Fragm. XII. Tab. ap. Cic. Leg. 2, 23, 59:

    annos sexaginta natus es Aut plus eo,

    or more than that, Ter. Heaut. 1, 1, 11:

    plus aequo,

    Cic. Lael. 16, 58:

    plus paulo,

    Ter. Heaut. 2, 1, 8:

    paulo plus,

    Liv. 31, 34: multo plus, Anton. ap. Cic. Att. 10, 8, A, 1:

    plus nimio,

    overmuch, Hor. Ep. 1, 10, 30: quam molestum est uno digito plus habere, too much by a finger, i. e. a finger too much, Cic. N. D. 1, 35, 99:

    uno plus Etruscorum cecidisse in acie,

    one man more, Liv. 2, 7, 2.—
    2.
    In the gen. pretii, pluris, of more value, of a higher price, for more, higher, dearer:

    ut plus reddant musti et olei, et pretii pluris,

    of greater value, Varr. R. R. 1, 7, 4:

    ager multo pluris est,

    is worth much more, Cic. Rosc. Com. 12, 33; cf.:

    quo pluris sint nostra oliveta,

    id. Rep. 3, 9, 16:

    pluris emere,

    dearer, id. Fam. 7, 2, 1; so,

    vendere,

    id. Off. 3, 12, 51; id. Verr. 2, 3, 19, § 48; Hor. S. 2, 3, 300:

    aedificare,

    Col. 1, 4, 7:

    pluris est oculatus testis quam auriti decem,

    of more value, Plaut. Truc. 2, 6, 8:

    mea mihi conscientia pluris est, quam omnium sermo,

    Cic. Att. 12, 28, 2:

    facio pluris omnium hominem neminem,

    id. ib. 8, 2, 4:

    facere aliquem pluris,

    make more of one, esteem him more highly, id. Fam. 3, 4, 2:

    pluris habere,

    id. Phil. 6, 4, 10:

    aestimare,

    id. Par. 6, 2, 48:

    ducere,

    id. Att. 7, 3, 5:

    putare,

    id. Off. 3, 4, 18 et saep.—
    3.
    Rarely, instead of the genitive, in the abl. pretii: plure vendunt, Lucil. ap. Charis. 2, p. 189 P.: plure altero tanto, quanto ejus fundus est, velim, Plaut. ib.: plure venit, Cic. ib.—
    4.
    Plus plusque, more and more: quem mehercule plus plusque in dies diligo. Cic. Att. 6, 2, 10.—
    * 5.
    Like magis, with an adj.:

    plus formosus, for formosior,

    Nemes. Ecl. 4, 72.—
    B.
    In the plur.
    1.
    Comparatively, more in number:

    omnes qui aere alieno premantur, quos plures esse intellego quam putaram,

    Cic. Att. 7, 3, 5; id. Rep. 2, 22, 40:

    nemini ego plura acerba esse credo ex amore homini umquam oblata quam mihi,

    Ter. Hec. 3, 1, 1:

    ne plura insignia essent imperii in libero populo quam in regno fuissent,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 31, 55:

    multo plura,

    many more things, Quint. 3, 6, 28.—
    2.
    In gen., of a great number, many: qui plus fore dicant in pluribus consilii quam in uno. Cic. Rep. 1, 35, 55: cf.: quid quaeso interest inter unum et plures, si justitia est in pluribus? id. ib. 1, 39, 61;

    1, 34, 52: non possunt una in civitate multi rem ac fortunas amittere, ut non plures secum in eandem trahant calamitatem,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 7, 19:

    quod pluribus praesentibus eas res jactari nolebat,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 18:

    plura castella Pompeius tentaverat,

    id. B. C. 3, 52:

    summus dolor plures dies manere non potest,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 28, 93:

    pluribus diebus, Quint. prooem. § 7: illic plurium rerum est congeries,

    id. 8, 4, 27:

    quae consuetudo sit, pluribus verbis docere,

    Cic. Clu. 41, 115:

    eum pluribus verbis rogat, ut, etc.,

    id. Verr. 2, 4, 28, § 64;

    without verba: quid ego plura dicam?

    id. de Or. 1, 5, 18:

    pluribus haec exsecutus sum,

    Phaedr. 3, 10, 59;

    also elliptically, quid plura? and, ne plura, like quid multa? and ne multa: hic sacra, hic genus, hic majorum multa vestigia. Quid plura? hanc vides villam, etc.,

    what need of many words? in short, Cic. Leg. 2, 1, 3:

    sed—ne plura—dicendum enim aliquando est—Pomponium Atticum sic amo, ut alterum fratrem,

    id. Fam. 13, 1, 5.—
    b.
    Esp.: plures.
    (α).
    The mass, the multitude, opp. pauciores, = hoi oligoi, Plaut. Trin. 1, 1, 13.—
    (β).
    Euphemistically, acc. to the Gr. hoi pleiones, the dead:

    quin prius Me ad plures penetravi?

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 14.—
    (γ).
    The greater number, the majority:

    plures nesciebant qua ex causa convenissent,

    Vulg. Act. 19, 32.
    III.
    Sup.: plūrĭmus (archaic form, plisima plurima, Paul. ex Fest. p. 204 and 205 Mull.: PLIOIRVME (I), Epit. of Scipio), a, um [from root ple; whence also plus, q. v., ploirumus for ploisumus; and thence the predominant form plurimus], most, very much, or many (as an adj. in good prose mostly in the plur., except the standing formula of greeting: salutem plurimam dicere alicui; v. infra):

    hujus sunt plurima simulacra,

    Caes. B. G. 6, 17:

    nos plurimis ignotissimi gentibus,

    Cic. Rep. 1, 17, 26:

    plurimae et maximae partes,

    id. ib. 1, 4, 8:

    plurimorum seculorum memoria,

    id. ib. 3, 9, 14:

    haec plurimis a me verbis dicta sunt,

    id. ib. 1, 7, 12 et saep.—In sing.:

    me plurima praeda onustum,

    Plaut. Rud. 4, 2, 4:

    sermo,

    Quint. 2, 2, 5:

    risus,

    id. 6, 3, 85:

    res,

    id. 6, 1, 51:

    exercitatio,

    id. 8 prooem. §

    28: mons,

    very large, Verg. A. 1, 419:

    cervix,

    id. G. 3, 52:

    Aetna,

    Ov. Ib. 600.—Of a greeting: impertit salutem plurimam, Lucil. ap. Non. 472. 16; and esp. freq.: salutem plurimam dicit (commonly abbrev. S. P. D.) at the beginning of letters; v. salus.— Poet.:

    medio cum plurimus orbe Sol erat,

    very powerful, oppressive, Ov. M. 14, 53: plurima qua silva est. thickest, id. ib. 14, 361:

    coma plurima,

    very thick, id. ib. 13, 844:

    sed plurima nantis in ore Alcyone conjux,

    mostly, chiefly, id. ib. 11, 562.—And collect.:

    plurimus in Junonis honorem Aptum dicet equis Argos,

    many a one, very many, Hor. C. 1, 7, 8; so,

    oleaster plurimus,

    Verg. G. 2, 183:

    qua plurima mittitur ales,

    Mart. 9, 56, 1:

    plurima lecta rosa est,

    Ov. F. 4, 441.— In neutr. absol. (substant. or adverb.):

    ut haberet quam plurimum,

    as much as possible, Cic. Rab. Post. 14, 39:

    caput autem est, quam plurimum scribere,

    id. de Or. 1, 33, 150:

    ut in quoque oratore plurimum esset,

    id. Rep. 1, 27, 123.— Adv.: plūrĭmum:

    et is valebat in suffragio plurimum, cujus plurimum intererat, esse in optimo statu civitatem,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 22, 40:

    auspiciis plurimum obsecutus est Romulus,

    id. ib. 2, 9, 16:

    si vero populus plurimum potest,

    id. ib. 3, 14, 23; cf.:

    qui apud me dignitate plurimum possunt,

    id. Rosc. Am. 1, 4:

    plurimum aliis praestare,

    id. Inv. 2, 1, 1:

    ut te plurimum diligam,

    id. Fam. 1, 7, 1; id. Tusc. 5, 27, 78:

    hoc ego utor uno omnium plurimum,

    id. Fam. 11, 16, 2:

    quantum (al. quanto) plurimum possunt,

    Quint. 11, 3, 120: plurimum quantum also signifies very much indeed, exceedingly (post-class.):

    plurimum quantum veritati nocuere,

    Min. Fel. Oct. 22:

    gratulor,

    id. ib. 40:

    (elleborum) ex aqua datur plurimum drachma,

    at the most, Plin. 25, 5, 22, § 54; 9, 36, 60, § 125; 30, 6, 16, § 48; so,

    cum plurimum,

    id. 2, 17, 15, § 78 (opp. to cum minimum); 18, 7, 10, § 60: nec tam numerosa differentia; tribus ut plurimum bonitatibus distat, for the most part, commonly, usually, = plerumque, Plin. 15, 3, 4, § 18.—
    (β).
    In neutr. with a partit. gen.: sententiarum et gravitatis plurimum, Cic. Inv. 1, 18, 25:

    artis,

    Quint. 10, 5, 3:

    auctoritatis et ponderis,

    id. 9, 4, 91:

    ut laboris sic utilitatis etiam longe plurimum,

    id. 10, 3, 1:

    virtutum,

    id. 12, 1, 20 plurimum quantum favoris partibus dabat fratermtas ducum, Flor. 4, 2, 74.—
    (γ).
    In the gen. pretii:

    plurimi: immo unice unum plurimi pendit,

    values very highly, esteems very much, Plaut. Bacch. 2, 2, 29:

    quem unum Alexander plurimi fecerat,

    Nep. Eum. 2, 2:

    ut quisque quod plurimi est possidet,

    Cic. Par. 6, 2, 48.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > multi

  • 7 multus

    multus (old form moltus), a, um; comp. plus; sup. plurimus (v. at the end of this art.), adj. [etym. dub.], much, great, many, of things corporeal and incorporeal.
    I.
    Posit.
    A.
    In gen.: multi mortales, Cato ap. Gell. 10, 3, 17: multi suam rem [p. 1173] bene gessere: multi qui, etc., Enn. ap. Cic. Fam. 7, 6, 1 (Trag. v. 295 sq. Vahl.):

    multi fortissimi viri,

    Cic. Fam. 5, 17, 3:

    rationes,

    id. de Or. 1, 51, 222. tam multis verbis scribere, at such length, id. Fam. 3, 8, 1:

    beneficia. Cato ap. Fest. s. v. ratissima, p. 286 Mull.: multi alii,

    Ter. And. 5, 4, 28.—When used with another adjective it is usually connected with it by a conjunction:

    multae et magnae contentiones,

    many great conlests, Cic. Phil. 2, 3, 7; 3, 10, 26:

    O multas et graves offensiones,

    id. Att. 11, 7, 3:

    multi et graves dolores,

    id. Verr. 2, 5, 45, § 119:

    multi et varii timores,

    Liv. 3, 16, 3:

    multae bonaeque artes animi,

    Sall. J. 28, 5:

    multa et clara facinora,

    Tac. A. 12, 31.—But when the second adjective is used substantively the conjunction is omitted:

    multi improbi,

    Cic. Off. 2, 8, 28; 2, 19, 65:

    multi boni, docti, prudentes,

    id. Fl. 4, 8:

    multi nobiles,

    id. Planc. 20, 50:

    multa acerba habuit ille annus,

    id. Sest. 27, 58; 66, 139:

    multa infanda,

    Liv. 28, 12, 5:

    multa falsa,

    id. 35, 23, 2.—Also, when the second adjective forms with its substantive a single conception:

    multa secunda proelia,

    victories, Liv. 9, 42, 5; 35, 1, 3; 41, 17, 1:

    multa libera capita,

    freemen, id. 42, 41, 11:

    multae liberae civitates,

    republics, Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 30, § 68:

    multos fortes viros,

    id. Cat. 3, 2, 7; id. Mur. 8, 17:

    multi clari viri,

    noblemen, id. Leg. 1, 5, 17:

    multi primarii viri,

    id. Verr. 2, 2, 61, § 149.—Similarly, et is omitted between multi and adjectives which form with their substantives familiar phrases:

    multi clarissimi viri,

    Cic. Phil. 11, 10, 24:

    multi amplissimi viri,

    id. Fin. 2, 17, 55; id. Deiot. 14, 39; id. Fam. 10, 25, 2; id. Att. 10, 8, 7; 16, 16, 11; id. Verr. 1, 7, 19:

    multi honestissimi homines,

    id. Fam. 15, 15, 3:

    multi peritissimi homines,

    id. Caecin. 24, 69:

    multi summi homines,

    id. Arch. 12, 30; id. Har. Resp. 26, 56:

    multi clarissimi et sapientissimi viri,

    id. Planc. 4, 11; id. Cael. 18, 43.—Et is also omitted when the substantive stands between the two adjectives:

    in veteribus patronis multis,

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 1, 2:

    multa praeterea bella gravia,

    id. Agr. 2, 33, 90:

    multis suppliciis justis,

    id. Cat. 1, 8, 20:

    multa majores nostri magna et gravia bella gesserunt,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 2, 6:

    plurima signa pulcherrima,

    id. Verr. 2, 1, 23, § 61.—When both adjectives follow the substantive, et is sometimes inserted:

    virtutes animi multae et magnae,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 22, 64:

    causas ille multas et graves habuit,

    id. Clu. 30, 82;

    and is sometimes omitted, the emphasis then falling on the second adjective: utebatur hominibus improbis, multis,

    id. Cael. 5, 12:

    prodigia multa, foeda,

    Liv. 40, 29, 1.—With a partitive gen.:

    multi hominum,

    Plin. 16, 25, 40, § 96:

    multae silvestrium arborum,

    id. 16, 31, 56, § 128.—In neutr. plur.: multa, orum, many things, much:

    nimium multa,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 14, 3:

    nimis multa,

    id. Fin. 2, 18, 57:

    insulae non ita multae,

    not so many, not so very many, Plin. 5, 7, 7, § 41:

    parum multa scire,

    too few, Auct. Her. 1, 1, 1: bene multi, a good many, Asin. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 33, 4:

    quam minime multa vestigia servitutis,

    as few as possible, Nep. Tim. 3, 3:

    minime multi remiges,

    exceedingly few, Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 34, § 88:

    in multas pecunias alienissimorum hominum invasit,

    id. Phil. 2, 16, 41; id. Verr. 2, 5, 19, § 48:

    multae pecuniae variis ex causis a privatis detinentur,

    Plin. Ep. 10, 17, 3.—Sometimes multi stands for multi alii, many others:

    nam certe Pompeio, et a Curionibus patre et filio, et a multis exprobratum est,

    Suet. Caes. 50.—The sing. also is used poet. for the plur., many a:

    aut trudit acres hinc et hinc multa cane Apros in obstantes plagas,

    with many dogs, Hor. Epod. 2, 31:

    multa prece prosequi,

    id. C. 4, 5, 33:

    multa victima,

    Verg. E. 1, 34: agna. Ov. F. 4, 772:

    avis,

    id. Am. 3, 5, 4:

    tabella,

    Tib. 1, 3, 28; so of persons: multus sua vulnera puppi Affixit moriens, many a one, for multi affixerunt, Luc. 3, 707.—In sing., to denote quantity, much, great, abundant: multum aurum et argentum. Plaut. Rud. 5, 2, 8; 22:

    exstructa mensa multa carne rancida,

    Cic. Pis. 27, 67:

    multo labore quaerere aliquid,

    with much labor, great exertion, Cic. Sull. 26, 73:

    cura,

    Sall. J. 7, 4:

    sol,

    much sun, Plin. 31, 7, 39, § 81: sermo, much conversalion, Brut. ap. Cic. Fam. 11, 20, 1: stilus tuus multi sudoris est. Cic. de Or. 1, 60, 257: multo cibo et potione completi, id. Tusc. 5, 35, 100:

    multo sanguine ea Poenis victoria stetit,

    Liv. 23, 30, 2:

    multum sanguinem haurire,

    Curt. 4, 14, 17; 8, 14, 32:

    multam harenam mare evomit,

    id. 4, 6, 8:

    arbor,

    id. 7, 4, 26:

    silva,

    id. 8, 10, 14:

    multae vestis injectu opprimi,

    Tac. A. 6, 50:

    multa et lauta supellex,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 27, 66:

    aurum,

    Sall. J. 13, 6; Tac. A. 6, 33; Liv. 26, 11, 9; Curt. 3, 3, 12:

    libertas,

    Hor. S. 1, 4, 5:

    multam salutem dicere alicui,

    to greet heartily, Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 194:

    cum auro et argento multo,

    Sall. J. 13, 6.—Of time:

    Itaque multum diei processerat,

    a great part of the day, Sall. J. 51, 2:

    ad multum diem,

    till far in the day, Cic. Att. 13, 9, 1:

    multo adhuc die,

    when much of the day was still remaining, when it was still high day, Tac. H. 2, 44:

    multo denique die,

    when the day was far spent, Caes. B. G. 1, 22:

    multa nocte,

    late at night, Cic. Q. Fr. 2, 9, 2:

    multo mane,

    very early, id. Att. 5, 4, 1:

    multa opinio, for multorum,

    the general opinion, Gell. 3, 16, 1:

    velut multa pace,

    as in a general peace, as if there were peace everywhere, Tac. H. 4, 35:

    multus homo,

    one who gives himself up to the lusts of many, Cat. 112, 1.— multi, orum, m., the many, the common mass, the multitude: probis probatus potius, quam multis forem, Att. ap. Non. 519, 9:

    video ego te, mulier, more multarum utier,

    id. ib. —Esp.: unus e (or de) multis, one of the multitude, a man of no distinction:

    tenuis L. Virginius unusque e multis,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 20, 62:

    unus de multis esse,

    id. Off. 1, 30, 109: M. Calidius non fuit orator unus e multis;

    potius inter multos prope singularis fuit,

    id. Brut. 79, 274:

    numerarer in multis,

    among the herd of orators, id. ib. 97, 333:

    e multis una sit tibi,

    no better than others, Ov. R. Am. 682:

    multum est,

    it is of importance, Verg. G. 2, 272.—In neutr. absol.: ne multa, or ne multis, not to be prolix, in short:

    ne multa: perquiritur a coactoribus,

    Cic. Clu. 64, 181:

    ne multis: Diogenes emitur,

    id. ib. 16, 47:

    quid multis moror?

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 87.—Sometimes multa is used (particularly by the poets) adverbially, much, greatly, very:

    multa reluctari,

    Verg. G. 4, 301:

    gemens,

    id. ib. 3, 226; id. A. 5, 869:

    deos testatus,

    id. ib. 7, 593:

    invehi,

    Nep. Ep. 6, 1 (cf. nonnulla invehi, id. Tim. 5, 3):

    haud multa moratus,

    Verg. A. 3, 610.—Rarely in multum:

    in multum velociores,

    by far, Plin. 10, 36, 52, § 108.—
    B.
    In partic.
    1.
    Too much, overmuch, excessive:

    supellex modica, non multa,

    Nep. Att. 13, 5.—
    2.
    In speech, much-speaking, diffuse, prolix:

    qui in aliquo genere aut inconcinnus aut multus est,

    Cic. de Or. 2, 4, 17:

    ne in re nota et pervulgata multus et insolens sim,

    id. ib. 2, 87, 358:

    nolo in stellarum ratione multus vobis videri,

    id. N. D. 2, 46, 119.—
    3.
    Frequent, frequently present:

    in operibus, in agmine, atque ad vigilias multus adesse,

    Sall. J. 96, 3:

    multus in eo proelio Caesar fuit,

    was in many places, Flor. 4, 2, 50:

    hen hercle hominem multum et odiosum mihi!

    troublesome, tedious, Plaut. Men. 2, 2, 41:

    instare,

    Sall. J. 84, 1.—Hence, adv., in two forms.
    A.
    multum, much, very much, greatly, very, often, frequently, far, etc. (class.):

    salve multum, gnate mi,

    Plaut. Trin. 5, 2, 56:

    multum vale,

    farewell, id. Stich. 3, 2, 40:

    hominem ineptum multum et odiosum mihi,

    id. Men. 2, 2, 42:

    opinor, Cassium uti non ita multum sorore,

    not very much, Cic. Fam. 7, 23, 3:

    multum mecum municipales homines loquuntur,

    often, id. Att. 8, 13, 2:

    non multum ille quidem nec saepe dicebat,

    id. Brut. 34, 128:

    non multum confidere,

    not very much, not particularly, Caes. B. G. 3, 25:

    sunt in venationibus,

    often, frequently, id. ib. 4, 1:

    in eodem genere causarum multum erat T. Juventius,

    Cic. Brut. 48, 178:

    multum fuisse cum aliquo,

    to have had much intercourse with, id. Rep. 1, 10, 16:

    sum multum equidem cum Phaedro in Epicuri hortis,

    id. Fin. 5, 1, 3:

    gratia valere,

    to be in great favor, Nep. Con. 2, 1:

    res multum et saepe quaesita,

    Cic. Leg. 3, 15, 33:

    longe omnes multumque superabit,

    id. Verr. 2, 5, 44, § 115:

    multum et diu cogitans,

    id. Div. 2, 1, 1:

    diu multumque scriptitare,

    id. de Or. 1, 33, 152.—With an adj.:

    multum loquaces,

    very talkative, Plaut. Aul. 2, 1, 5:

    mepti labores,

    very, Plin. Ep. 1, 9.— Poet. also with comp.:

    multum improbiores sunt quam a primo credidi,

    much, far, Plaut. Most. 3, 2, 139:

    multum robustior illo,

    Juv. 19, 197:

    majora,

    Sil. 13, 708.— So with infra, post:

    haud multum infra viam,

    Liv. 5, 37, 7; Plin. 98, 7, § 20:

    haud multum post mortem ejus,

    Tac. A. 5, 3:

    ut multum,

    at most, Mart. 10, 11, 6; Vop. Aur. 46.—
    B.
    multō by much, much, a great deal, far, by far (class.).
    1.
    With comparatives and verbs which imply comparison:

    multo tanto carior,

    Plaut. Bacch. 2, 3, 76:

    pauciores oratores,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 3, 11:

    facilius atque expeditius iter,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 6.—With verbs:

    virtutem omnibus rebus multo anteponentes,

    Cic. Fin. 4, 18, 49:

    multo ceteros anteibant,

    Tac. H. 4, 13:

    multo praestat beneficii, quam maleficii immemorem esse,

    Sall. J. 31, 28.—With malle:

    multo mavolo,

    Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 88; id. Ps. 2, 4, 38:

    meo judicio multo stare malo, quam, etc.,

    Cic. Att. 12, 21, 1.—
    2.
    With sup. (rare but class.), by far, by much:

    quae tibi mulier videtur multo sapientissuma,

    Plaut. Stich. 1, 2, 66; id. Am. 2, 2, 150: multo optimus hostis, by far, Lucil. ap. Non. 4, 413:

    simulacrum multo antiquissimum,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 49, § 109; 2, 4, 23, § 50; id. Cat. 4, 8, 17:

    maxima pars,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 18, 54; cf. Hor. S. 2, 3, 82:

    multo id bellum maximum fuit,

    Liv. 1, 11, 5:

    pars multo maxima,

    id. 30, 18, 14: multo molestissima, Cic. Div. in. Caecil. 11, 36:

    multo gratissima lux,

    Hor. S. 1, 5, 39:

    foedissimum,

    Quint. 9, 4, 72:

    optimum,

    id. ib. 26:

    pulcherrimum,

    id. 1, 2, 24:

    utilissima,

    id. 2, 10, 1:

    maxime,

    Auct. Her. 4, 44, 58:

    multo maxime miserabile,

    Sall. C. 36, 4:

    multo maxime ingenio validus,

    id. J. 6, 1.—
    3.
    With particles denoting a difference, far, greatly, very:

    multo aliter,

    Ter. And. prol. 4:

    multo aliter ac sperabat,

    far otherwise than, Nep. Ham. 2:

    quod non multo secus fieret, si,

    not far otherwise, not very different, Cic. Fam. 4, 9, 1: multo infra Cyrenaicum. Plin. 19, 3, 15, § 40. —
    4.
    In specifications of time, before ante and post, long, much:

    non multo ante urbem captam,

    Cic. Div. 1, 45, 101:

    non multo ante,

    not long before, Nep. Eum. 3, 3:

    multo ante,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 1, 1:

    non multo post, quam, etc.,

    not long after, id. Att. 12, 49, 9:

    haud multo ante solis occasum,

    Liv. 5, 39, 2:

    multo ante noctem,

    id. 27, 42, 13.—
    5.
    Very rarely with the positive for multum:

    maligna multo,

    very, Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 83 Umpf.—
    6.
    Doubled, multo multoque, with comparatives:

    multo multoque longior,

    far, very much, Front. ad M. Caes. 2, 5:

    multo multoque operosius est,

    Val. Max. 4, 1, 2: multo multoque magis, Front. Laud. Negl. § 3.
    II.
    Comp.: plūs, pluris; in the plur., plures, plura (in sing. anciently written plous; three times in the S. C. de Bacch. Here perh. belongs, in the plur., pleores and pleoris, for plures, in the Song of the Arval Brothers.—For the class. neuter of the plur., plura, the form pluria was used in ante-class. Latinity. Gellius cites M. Cato, Q. Claudius, Valerius Antias, L. AElius, P. Nigidius, and M. Varro as authorities for this form, Gell. 5, 21, 6; yet Plautus and Terence have only plura; and the earlier reading pluria, in Lucr. 1, 877; 2, 1135; 4, 1085, is now supplanted by the critically certain plura and plurima.—The gen. plur. plurium, however, has remained the predominant form, e. g. Quint. 7, 1, 1; 8, 4, 27; 9, 4, 66 et saep.) [from the root ple; Gr. pleon, pimplêmi; cf. plenus, plera, compleo, etc.; also locu-ples, plebes, populus, etc.], more.
    A.
    In the sing. (used both substantively and adverbially): LIBRAS FARRIS ENDO DIES DATO. SI VOLET PLVS DATO, Fragm. XII. Tab. in Gell. 20, 1, 45: SI PLVS MINVSVE SECVERVNT, SE FRAVDE ESTO, ib.;

    so (perh. in imitation of this legal phrase): ebeu, cur ego plus minusve feci quam aequom fuit!

    Plaut. Capt. 5, 3, 18; Ter. Phorm. 3, 3, 21:

    ne plus minusve loqueretur,

    Suet. Aug. 84; cf. Plaut. Men. 4, 2, 27; and in the signif. of circiter, about: septingenti sunt paulo plus aut minus anni... postquam, etc., Enn. ap. Varr. R. R. 3, 1, 2 (Ann. v. 493 Vahl.);

    so. non longius abesse plus minus octo milibus,

    Hirt. B. G. 8, 20, 1 Oud.; cf.:

    speranti plures... venerunt plusve minusve duae,

    Mart. 8, 71, 4:

    aut ne quid faciam plus, quod post me minus fecisse satius sit,

    too much... too little, Ter. Hec. 5, 1, 4:

    tantum et plus etiam ipse mihi deberet,

    Cic. Att. 7, 3, 7:

    vos et decem numero, et, quod plus est, Romani estis,

    and what is more, Liv. 9, 24, 8:

    verbane plus an sententia valere debeat,

    Cic. Top. 25, 96: [p. 1174] cf.:

    apud me argumenta plus quam testes valent,

    id. Rep. 1, 38, 59:

    valet enim salus plus quam libido,

    id. ib. 1, 40, 63.—
    (β).
    With a partitive gen.:

    vultis pecuniae plus habere,

    Cic. Inv. 1, 47, 88; cf.:

    nostri casus plus honoris habuerunt quam laboris,

    id. Rep. 1, 4, 7; so,

    plus virium,

    id. Leg. 1, 2, 6:

    plus hostium,

    Liv. 2, 42:

    plus dapis et rixae multo minus invidiaeque,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 17, 51:

    in hac causa eo plus auctoritatis habent, quia, etc.,

    Cic. Rep. 3, 16, 26; cf.:

    plus ingenii,

    id. ib. 1, 14, 22:

    Albano non plus animi erat quam fidei,

    as little courage as fidelity, Liv. 1, 27, 5.—
    (γ).
    With quam (some examples of which have already been given above):

    non plus quam semel,

    Cic. Off. 3, 15, 61:

    confiteor eos... plus quam sicarios esse,

    id. Phil. 2, 13, 31:

    ne plus reddat quam acceperit,

    id. Lael. 16, 58 et saep.:

    non plus quam in tres partis posse distribui putaverunt,

    into not more than, id. Inv. 1, 34, 57:

    plus quam decem dies abesse,

    id. Phil. 2, 13, 31:

    nulla (navis) plus quam triginta remis agatur,

    with more than, Liv. 38, 38, 8.—
    (δ).
    Without quam:

    HOMINES PLOVS V. OINVORSEI VIREI ATQVE MVLIERES, S. C. de Bacch. 19 (Wordsw. Fragm. and Spec. p. 173): plus mille capti,

    Liv. 24, 44:

    plus milies audivi,

    Ter. Eun. 3, 1, 32: plus semel, Varr. ap. Plin. 14, 14, 17, § 96:

    plus quingentos colaphos infregit mihi,

    Ter. Ad. 2, 1, 46:

    ferre plus dimidiati mensis cibaria,

    Cic. Tusc. 2, 16, 37:

    non plus mille quingentos aeris,

    id. Rep. 2, 22, 40:

    paulo plus ducentos passus a castris,

    Liv. 31, 34:

    cum plus annum aeger fuisset,

    id. 40, 2:

    parte plus dimidia rem auctam,

    id. 29, 25.—
    (ε).
    With a compar. or adverbial abl., or with an abl. of measure:

    VIREI PLOVS DVOBVS, S. C. de Bacch. 20 (Wordsw. Fragm. and Spec. p. 173): de paupertate tacentes Plus poscente ferent,

    more than the importunate, Hor. Ep. 1, 17, 44:

    ex his alius alio plus habet virium,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 2, 6: cave putes hoc tempore plus me quemquam cruciari, Balb. ap. Cic. Att. 8, 15, A, 2:

    alterum certe non potest, ut plus una vera sit,

    Cic. N. D. 1, 2, 5; cf.:

    in columba plures videri colores, nec esse plus uno,

    id. Ac. 2, 25, 79: HOC PLVS NE FACITO, more than this, Fragm. XII. Tab. ap. Cic. Leg. 2, 23, 59:

    annos sexaginta natus es Aut plus eo,

    or more than that, Ter. Heaut. 1, 1, 11:

    plus aequo,

    Cic. Lael. 16, 58:

    plus paulo,

    Ter. Heaut. 2, 1, 8:

    paulo plus,

    Liv. 31, 34: multo plus, Anton. ap. Cic. Att. 10, 8, A, 1:

    plus nimio,

    overmuch, Hor. Ep. 1, 10, 30: quam molestum est uno digito plus habere, too much by a finger, i. e. a finger too much, Cic. N. D. 1, 35, 99:

    uno plus Etruscorum cecidisse in acie,

    one man more, Liv. 2, 7, 2.—
    2.
    In the gen. pretii, pluris, of more value, of a higher price, for more, higher, dearer:

    ut plus reddant musti et olei, et pretii pluris,

    of greater value, Varr. R. R. 1, 7, 4:

    ager multo pluris est,

    is worth much more, Cic. Rosc. Com. 12, 33; cf.:

    quo pluris sint nostra oliveta,

    id. Rep. 3, 9, 16:

    pluris emere,

    dearer, id. Fam. 7, 2, 1; so,

    vendere,

    id. Off. 3, 12, 51; id. Verr. 2, 3, 19, § 48; Hor. S. 2, 3, 300:

    aedificare,

    Col. 1, 4, 7:

    pluris est oculatus testis quam auriti decem,

    of more value, Plaut. Truc. 2, 6, 8:

    mea mihi conscientia pluris est, quam omnium sermo,

    Cic. Att. 12, 28, 2:

    facio pluris omnium hominem neminem,

    id. ib. 8, 2, 4:

    facere aliquem pluris,

    make more of one, esteem him more highly, id. Fam. 3, 4, 2:

    pluris habere,

    id. Phil. 6, 4, 10:

    aestimare,

    id. Par. 6, 2, 48:

    ducere,

    id. Att. 7, 3, 5:

    putare,

    id. Off. 3, 4, 18 et saep.—
    3.
    Rarely, instead of the genitive, in the abl. pretii: plure vendunt, Lucil. ap. Charis. 2, p. 189 P.: plure altero tanto, quanto ejus fundus est, velim, Plaut. ib.: plure venit, Cic. ib.—
    4.
    Plus plusque, more and more: quem mehercule plus plusque in dies diligo. Cic. Att. 6, 2, 10.—
    * 5.
    Like magis, with an adj.:

    plus formosus, for formosior,

    Nemes. Ecl. 4, 72.—
    B.
    In the plur.
    1.
    Comparatively, more in number:

    omnes qui aere alieno premantur, quos plures esse intellego quam putaram,

    Cic. Att. 7, 3, 5; id. Rep. 2, 22, 40:

    nemini ego plura acerba esse credo ex amore homini umquam oblata quam mihi,

    Ter. Hec. 3, 1, 1:

    ne plura insignia essent imperii in libero populo quam in regno fuissent,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 31, 55:

    multo plura,

    many more things, Quint. 3, 6, 28.—
    2.
    In gen., of a great number, many: qui plus fore dicant in pluribus consilii quam in uno. Cic. Rep. 1, 35, 55: cf.: quid quaeso interest inter unum et plures, si justitia est in pluribus? id. ib. 1, 39, 61;

    1, 34, 52: non possunt una in civitate multi rem ac fortunas amittere, ut non plures secum in eandem trahant calamitatem,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 7, 19:

    quod pluribus praesentibus eas res jactari nolebat,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 18:

    plura castella Pompeius tentaverat,

    id. B. C. 3, 52:

    summus dolor plures dies manere non potest,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 28, 93:

    pluribus diebus, Quint. prooem. § 7: illic plurium rerum est congeries,

    id. 8, 4, 27:

    quae consuetudo sit, pluribus verbis docere,

    Cic. Clu. 41, 115:

    eum pluribus verbis rogat, ut, etc.,

    id. Verr. 2, 4, 28, § 64;

    without verba: quid ego plura dicam?

    id. de Or. 1, 5, 18:

    pluribus haec exsecutus sum,

    Phaedr. 3, 10, 59;

    also elliptically, quid plura? and, ne plura, like quid multa? and ne multa: hic sacra, hic genus, hic majorum multa vestigia. Quid plura? hanc vides villam, etc.,

    what need of many words? in short, Cic. Leg. 2, 1, 3:

    sed—ne plura—dicendum enim aliquando est—Pomponium Atticum sic amo, ut alterum fratrem,

    id. Fam. 13, 1, 5.—
    b.
    Esp.: plures.
    (α).
    The mass, the multitude, opp. pauciores, = hoi oligoi, Plaut. Trin. 1, 1, 13.—
    (β).
    Euphemistically, acc. to the Gr. hoi pleiones, the dead:

    quin prius Me ad plures penetravi?

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 14.—
    (γ).
    The greater number, the majority:

    plures nesciebant qua ex causa convenissent,

    Vulg. Act. 19, 32.
    III.
    Sup.: plūrĭmus (archaic form, plisima plurima, Paul. ex Fest. p. 204 and 205 Mull.: PLIOIRVME (I), Epit. of Scipio), a, um [from root ple; whence also plus, q. v., ploirumus for ploisumus; and thence the predominant form plurimus], most, very much, or many (as an adj. in good prose mostly in the plur., except the standing formula of greeting: salutem plurimam dicere alicui; v. infra):

    hujus sunt plurima simulacra,

    Caes. B. G. 6, 17:

    nos plurimis ignotissimi gentibus,

    Cic. Rep. 1, 17, 26:

    plurimae et maximae partes,

    id. ib. 1, 4, 8:

    plurimorum seculorum memoria,

    id. ib. 3, 9, 14:

    haec plurimis a me verbis dicta sunt,

    id. ib. 1, 7, 12 et saep.—In sing.:

    me plurima praeda onustum,

    Plaut. Rud. 4, 2, 4:

    sermo,

    Quint. 2, 2, 5:

    risus,

    id. 6, 3, 85:

    res,

    id. 6, 1, 51:

    exercitatio,

    id. 8 prooem. §

    28: mons,

    very large, Verg. A. 1, 419:

    cervix,

    id. G. 3, 52:

    Aetna,

    Ov. Ib. 600.—Of a greeting: impertit salutem plurimam, Lucil. ap. Non. 472. 16; and esp. freq.: salutem plurimam dicit (commonly abbrev. S. P. D.) at the beginning of letters; v. salus.— Poet.:

    medio cum plurimus orbe Sol erat,

    very powerful, oppressive, Ov. M. 14, 53: plurima qua silva est. thickest, id. ib. 14, 361:

    coma plurima,

    very thick, id. ib. 13, 844:

    sed plurima nantis in ore Alcyone conjux,

    mostly, chiefly, id. ib. 11, 562.—And collect.:

    plurimus in Junonis honorem Aptum dicet equis Argos,

    many a one, very many, Hor. C. 1, 7, 8; so,

    oleaster plurimus,

    Verg. G. 2, 183:

    qua plurima mittitur ales,

    Mart. 9, 56, 1:

    plurima lecta rosa est,

    Ov. F. 4, 441.— In neutr. absol. (substant. or adverb.):

    ut haberet quam plurimum,

    as much as possible, Cic. Rab. Post. 14, 39:

    caput autem est, quam plurimum scribere,

    id. de Or. 1, 33, 150:

    ut in quoque oratore plurimum esset,

    id. Rep. 1, 27, 123.— Adv.: plūrĭmum:

    et is valebat in suffragio plurimum, cujus plurimum intererat, esse in optimo statu civitatem,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 22, 40:

    auspiciis plurimum obsecutus est Romulus,

    id. ib. 2, 9, 16:

    si vero populus plurimum potest,

    id. ib. 3, 14, 23; cf.:

    qui apud me dignitate plurimum possunt,

    id. Rosc. Am. 1, 4:

    plurimum aliis praestare,

    id. Inv. 2, 1, 1:

    ut te plurimum diligam,

    id. Fam. 1, 7, 1; id. Tusc. 5, 27, 78:

    hoc ego utor uno omnium plurimum,

    id. Fam. 11, 16, 2:

    quantum (al. quanto) plurimum possunt,

    Quint. 11, 3, 120: plurimum quantum also signifies very much indeed, exceedingly (post-class.):

    plurimum quantum veritati nocuere,

    Min. Fel. Oct. 22:

    gratulor,

    id. ib. 40:

    (elleborum) ex aqua datur plurimum drachma,

    at the most, Plin. 25, 5, 22, § 54; 9, 36, 60, § 125; 30, 6, 16, § 48; so,

    cum plurimum,

    id. 2, 17, 15, § 78 (opp. to cum minimum); 18, 7, 10, § 60: nec tam numerosa differentia; tribus ut plurimum bonitatibus distat, for the most part, commonly, usually, = plerumque, Plin. 15, 3, 4, § 18.—
    (β).
    In neutr. with a partit. gen.: sententiarum et gravitatis plurimum, Cic. Inv. 1, 18, 25:

    artis,

    Quint. 10, 5, 3:

    auctoritatis et ponderis,

    id. 9, 4, 91:

    ut laboris sic utilitatis etiam longe plurimum,

    id. 10, 3, 1:

    virtutum,

    id. 12, 1, 20 plurimum quantum favoris partibus dabat fratermtas ducum, Flor. 4, 2, 74.—
    (γ).
    In the gen. pretii:

    plurimi: immo unice unum plurimi pendit,

    values very highly, esteems very much, Plaut. Bacch. 2, 2, 29:

    quem unum Alexander plurimi fecerat,

    Nep. Eum. 2, 2:

    ut quisque quod plurimi est possidet,

    Cic. Par. 6, 2, 48.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > multus

  • 8 plurimum

    multus (old form moltus), a, um; comp. plus; sup. plurimus (v. at the end of this art.), adj. [etym. dub.], much, great, many, of things corporeal and incorporeal.
    I.
    Posit.
    A.
    In gen.: multi mortales, Cato ap. Gell. 10, 3, 17: multi suam rem [p. 1173] bene gessere: multi qui, etc., Enn. ap. Cic. Fam. 7, 6, 1 (Trag. v. 295 sq. Vahl.):

    multi fortissimi viri,

    Cic. Fam. 5, 17, 3:

    rationes,

    id. de Or. 1, 51, 222. tam multis verbis scribere, at such length, id. Fam. 3, 8, 1:

    beneficia. Cato ap. Fest. s. v. ratissima, p. 286 Mull.: multi alii,

    Ter. And. 5, 4, 28.—When used with another adjective it is usually connected with it by a conjunction:

    multae et magnae contentiones,

    many great conlests, Cic. Phil. 2, 3, 7; 3, 10, 26:

    O multas et graves offensiones,

    id. Att. 11, 7, 3:

    multi et graves dolores,

    id. Verr. 2, 5, 45, § 119:

    multi et varii timores,

    Liv. 3, 16, 3:

    multae bonaeque artes animi,

    Sall. J. 28, 5:

    multa et clara facinora,

    Tac. A. 12, 31.—But when the second adjective is used substantively the conjunction is omitted:

    multi improbi,

    Cic. Off. 2, 8, 28; 2, 19, 65:

    multi boni, docti, prudentes,

    id. Fl. 4, 8:

    multi nobiles,

    id. Planc. 20, 50:

    multa acerba habuit ille annus,

    id. Sest. 27, 58; 66, 139:

    multa infanda,

    Liv. 28, 12, 5:

    multa falsa,

    id. 35, 23, 2.—Also, when the second adjective forms with its substantive a single conception:

    multa secunda proelia,

    victories, Liv. 9, 42, 5; 35, 1, 3; 41, 17, 1:

    multa libera capita,

    freemen, id. 42, 41, 11:

    multae liberae civitates,

    republics, Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 30, § 68:

    multos fortes viros,

    id. Cat. 3, 2, 7; id. Mur. 8, 17:

    multi clari viri,

    noblemen, id. Leg. 1, 5, 17:

    multi primarii viri,

    id. Verr. 2, 2, 61, § 149.—Similarly, et is omitted between multi and adjectives which form with their substantives familiar phrases:

    multi clarissimi viri,

    Cic. Phil. 11, 10, 24:

    multi amplissimi viri,

    id. Fin. 2, 17, 55; id. Deiot. 14, 39; id. Fam. 10, 25, 2; id. Att. 10, 8, 7; 16, 16, 11; id. Verr. 1, 7, 19:

    multi honestissimi homines,

    id. Fam. 15, 15, 3:

    multi peritissimi homines,

    id. Caecin. 24, 69:

    multi summi homines,

    id. Arch. 12, 30; id. Har. Resp. 26, 56:

    multi clarissimi et sapientissimi viri,

    id. Planc. 4, 11; id. Cael. 18, 43.—Et is also omitted when the substantive stands between the two adjectives:

    in veteribus patronis multis,

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 1, 2:

    multa praeterea bella gravia,

    id. Agr. 2, 33, 90:

    multis suppliciis justis,

    id. Cat. 1, 8, 20:

    multa majores nostri magna et gravia bella gesserunt,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 2, 6:

    plurima signa pulcherrima,

    id. Verr. 2, 1, 23, § 61.—When both adjectives follow the substantive, et is sometimes inserted:

    virtutes animi multae et magnae,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 22, 64:

    causas ille multas et graves habuit,

    id. Clu. 30, 82;

    and is sometimes omitted, the emphasis then falling on the second adjective: utebatur hominibus improbis, multis,

    id. Cael. 5, 12:

    prodigia multa, foeda,

    Liv. 40, 29, 1.—With a partitive gen.:

    multi hominum,

    Plin. 16, 25, 40, § 96:

    multae silvestrium arborum,

    id. 16, 31, 56, § 128.—In neutr. plur.: multa, orum, many things, much:

    nimium multa,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 14, 3:

    nimis multa,

    id. Fin. 2, 18, 57:

    insulae non ita multae,

    not so many, not so very many, Plin. 5, 7, 7, § 41:

    parum multa scire,

    too few, Auct. Her. 1, 1, 1: bene multi, a good many, Asin. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 33, 4:

    quam minime multa vestigia servitutis,

    as few as possible, Nep. Tim. 3, 3:

    minime multi remiges,

    exceedingly few, Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 34, § 88:

    in multas pecunias alienissimorum hominum invasit,

    id. Phil. 2, 16, 41; id. Verr. 2, 5, 19, § 48:

    multae pecuniae variis ex causis a privatis detinentur,

    Plin. Ep. 10, 17, 3.—Sometimes multi stands for multi alii, many others:

    nam certe Pompeio, et a Curionibus patre et filio, et a multis exprobratum est,

    Suet. Caes. 50.—The sing. also is used poet. for the plur., many a:

    aut trudit acres hinc et hinc multa cane Apros in obstantes plagas,

    with many dogs, Hor. Epod. 2, 31:

    multa prece prosequi,

    id. C. 4, 5, 33:

    multa victima,

    Verg. E. 1, 34: agna. Ov. F. 4, 772:

    avis,

    id. Am. 3, 5, 4:

    tabella,

    Tib. 1, 3, 28; so of persons: multus sua vulnera puppi Affixit moriens, many a one, for multi affixerunt, Luc. 3, 707.—In sing., to denote quantity, much, great, abundant: multum aurum et argentum. Plaut. Rud. 5, 2, 8; 22:

    exstructa mensa multa carne rancida,

    Cic. Pis. 27, 67:

    multo labore quaerere aliquid,

    with much labor, great exertion, Cic. Sull. 26, 73:

    cura,

    Sall. J. 7, 4:

    sol,

    much sun, Plin. 31, 7, 39, § 81: sermo, much conversalion, Brut. ap. Cic. Fam. 11, 20, 1: stilus tuus multi sudoris est. Cic. de Or. 1, 60, 257: multo cibo et potione completi, id. Tusc. 5, 35, 100:

    multo sanguine ea Poenis victoria stetit,

    Liv. 23, 30, 2:

    multum sanguinem haurire,

    Curt. 4, 14, 17; 8, 14, 32:

    multam harenam mare evomit,

    id. 4, 6, 8:

    arbor,

    id. 7, 4, 26:

    silva,

    id. 8, 10, 14:

    multae vestis injectu opprimi,

    Tac. A. 6, 50:

    multa et lauta supellex,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 27, 66:

    aurum,

    Sall. J. 13, 6; Tac. A. 6, 33; Liv. 26, 11, 9; Curt. 3, 3, 12:

    libertas,

    Hor. S. 1, 4, 5:

    multam salutem dicere alicui,

    to greet heartily, Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 194:

    cum auro et argento multo,

    Sall. J. 13, 6.—Of time:

    Itaque multum diei processerat,

    a great part of the day, Sall. J. 51, 2:

    ad multum diem,

    till far in the day, Cic. Att. 13, 9, 1:

    multo adhuc die,

    when much of the day was still remaining, when it was still high day, Tac. H. 2, 44:

    multo denique die,

    when the day was far spent, Caes. B. G. 1, 22:

    multa nocte,

    late at night, Cic. Q. Fr. 2, 9, 2:

    multo mane,

    very early, id. Att. 5, 4, 1:

    multa opinio, for multorum,

    the general opinion, Gell. 3, 16, 1:

    velut multa pace,

    as in a general peace, as if there were peace everywhere, Tac. H. 4, 35:

    multus homo,

    one who gives himself up to the lusts of many, Cat. 112, 1.— multi, orum, m., the many, the common mass, the multitude: probis probatus potius, quam multis forem, Att. ap. Non. 519, 9:

    video ego te, mulier, more multarum utier,

    id. ib. —Esp.: unus e (or de) multis, one of the multitude, a man of no distinction:

    tenuis L. Virginius unusque e multis,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 20, 62:

    unus de multis esse,

    id. Off. 1, 30, 109: M. Calidius non fuit orator unus e multis;

    potius inter multos prope singularis fuit,

    id. Brut. 79, 274:

    numerarer in multis,

    among the herd of orators, id. ib. 97, 333:

    e multis una sit tibi,

    no better than others, Ov. R. Am. 682:

    multum est,

    it is of importance, Verg. G. 2, 272.—In neutr. absol.: ne multa, or ne multis, not to be prolix, in short:

    ne multa: perquiritur a coactoribus,

    Cic. Clu. 64, 181:

    ne multis: Diogenes emitur,

    id. ib. 16, 47:

    quid multis moror?

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 87.—Sometimes multa is used (particularly by the poets) adverbially, much, greatly, very:

    multa reluctari,

    Verg. G. 4, 301:

    gemens,

    id. ib. 3, 226; id. A. 5, 869:

    deos testatus,

    id. ib. 7, 593:

    invehi,

    Nep. Ep. 6, 1 (cf. nonnulla invehi, id. Tim. 5, 3):

    haud multa moratus,

    Verg. A. 3, 610.—Rarely in multum:

    in multum velociores,

    by far, Plin. 10, 36, 52, § 108.—
    B.
    In partic.
    1.
    Too much, overmuch, excessive:

    supellex modica, non multa,

    Nep. Att. 13, 5.—
    2.
    In speech, much-speaking, diffuse, prolix:

    qui in aliquo genere aut inconcinnus aut multus est,

    Cic. de Or. 2, 4, 17:

    ne in re nota et pervulgata multus et insolens sim,

    id. ib. 2, 87, 358:

    nolo in stellarum ratione multus vobis videri,

    id. N. D. 2, 46, 119.—
    3.
    Frequent, frequently present:

    in operibus, in agmine, atque ad vigilias multus adesse,

    Sall. J. 96, 3:

    multus in eo proelio Caesar fuit,

    was in many places, Flor. 4, 2, 50:

    hen hercle hominem multum et odiosum mihi!

    troublesome, tedious, Plaut. Men. 2, 2, 41:

    instare,

    Sall. J. 84, 1.—Hence, adv., in two forms.
    A.
    multum, much, very much, greatly, very, often, frequently, far, etc. (class.):

    salve multum, gnate mi,

    Plaut. Trin. 5, 2, 56:

    multum vale,

    farewell, id. Stich. 3, 2, 40:

    hominem ineptum multum et odiosum mihi,

    id. Men. 2, 2, 42:

    opinor, Cassium uti non ita multum sorore,

    not very much, Cic. Fam. 7, 23, 3:

    multum mecum municipales homines loquuntur,

    often, id. Att. 8, 13, 2:

    non multum ille quidem nec saepe dicebat,

    id. Brut. 34, 128:

    non multum confidere,

    not very much, not particularly, Caes. B. G. 3, 25:

    sunt in venationibus,

    often, frequently, id. ib. 4, 1:

    in eodem genere causarum multum erat T. Juventius,

    Cic. Brut. 48, 178:

    multum fuisse cum aliquo,

    to have had much intercourse with, id. Rep. 1, 10, 16:

    sum multum equidem cum Phaedro in Epicuri hortis,

    id. Fin. 5, 1, 3:

    gratia valere,

    to be in great favor, Nep. Con. 2, 1:

    res multum et saepe quaesita,

    Cic. Leg. 3, 15, 33:

    longe omnes multumque superabit,

    id. Verr. 2, 5, 44, § 115:

    multum et diu cogitans,

    id. Div. 2, 1, 1:

    diu multumque scriptitare,

    id. de Or. 1, 33, 152.—With an adj.:

    multum loquaces,

    very talkative, Plaut. Aul. 2, 1, 5:

    mepti labores,

    very, Plin. Ep. 1, 9.— Poet. also with comp.:

    multum improbiores sunt quam a primo credidi,

    much, far, Plaut. Most. 3, 2, 139:

    multum robustior illo,

    Juv. 19, 197:

    majora,

    Sil. 13, 708.— So with infra, post:

    haud multum infra viam,

    Liv. 5, 37, 7; Plin. 98, 7, § 20:

    haud multum post mortem ejus,

    Tac. A. 5, 3:

    ut multum,

    at most, Mart. 10, 11, 6; Vop. Aur. 46.—
    B.
    multō by much, much, a great deal, far, by far (class.).
    1.
    With comparatives and verbs which imply comparison:

    multo tanto carior,

    Plaut. Bacch. 2, 3, 76:

    pauciores oratores,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 3, 11:

    facilius atque expeditius iter,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 6.—With verbs:

    virtutem omnibus rebus multo anteponentes,

    Cic. Fin. 4, 18, 49:

    multo ceteros anteibant,

    Tac. H. 4, 13:

    multo praestat beneficii, quam maleficii immemorem esse,

    Sall. J. 31, 28.—With malle:

    multo mavolo,

    Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 88; id. Ps. 2, 4, 38:

    meo judicio multo stare malo, quam, etc.,

    Cic. Att. 12, 21, 1.—
    2.
    With sup. (rare but class.), by far, by much:

    quae tibi mulier videtur multo sapientissuma,

    Plaut. Stich. 1, 2, 66; id. Am. 2, 2, 150: multo optimus hostis, by far, Lucil. ap. Non. 4, 413:

    simulacrum multo antiquissimum,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 49, § 109; 2, 4, 23, § 50; id. Cat. 4, 8, 17:

    maxima pars,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 18, 54; cf. Hor. S. 2, 3, 82:

    multo id bellum maximum fuit,

    Liv. 1, 11, 5:

    pars multo maxima,

    id. 30, 18, 14: multo molestissima, Cic. Div. in. Caecil. 11, 36:

    multo gratissima lux,

    Hor. S. 1, 5, 39:

    foedissimum,

    Quint. 9, 4, 72:

    optimum,

    id. ib. 26:

    pulcherrimum,

    id. 1, 2, 24:

    utilissima,

    id. 2, 10, 1:

    maxime,

    Auct. Her. 4, 44, 58:

    multo maxime miserabile,

    Sall. C. 36, 4:

    multo maxime ingenio validus,

    id. J. 6, 1.—
    3.
    With particles denoting a difference, far, greatly, very:

    multo aliter,

    Ter. And. prol. 4:

    multo aliter ac sperabat,

    far otherwise than, Nep. Ham. 2:

    quod non multo secus fieret, si,

    not far otherwise, not very different, Cic. Fam. 4, 9, 1: multo infra Cyrenaicum. Plin. 19, 3, 15, § 40. —
    4.
    In specifications of time, before ante and post, long, much:

    non multo ante urbem captam,

    Cic. Div. 1, 45, 101:

    non multo ante,

    not long before, Nep. Eum. 3, 3:

    multo ante,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 1, 1:

    non multo post, quam, etc.,

    not long after, id. Att. 12, 49, 9:

    haud multo ante solis occasum,

    Liv. 5, 39, 2:

    multo ante noctem,

    id. 27, 42, 13.—
    5.
    Very rarely with the positive for multum:

    maligna multo,

    very, Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 83 Umpf.—
    6.
    Doubled, multo multoque, with comparatives:

    multo multoque longior,

    far, very much, Front. ad M. Caes. 2, 5:

    multo multoque operosius est,

    Val. Max. 4, 1, 2: multo multoque magis, Front. Laud. Negl. § 3.
    II.
    Comp.: plūs, pluris; in the plur., plures, plura (in sing. anciently written plous; three times in the S. C. de Bacch. Here perh. belongs, in the plur., pleores and pleoris, for plures, in the Song of the Arval Brothers.—For the class. neuter of the plur., plura, the form pluria was used in ante-class. Latinity. Gellius cites M. Cato, Q. Claudius, Valerius Antias, L. AElius, P. Nigidius, and M. Varro as authorities for this form, Gell. 5, 21, 6; yet Plautus and Terence have only plura; and the earlier reading pluria, in Lucr. 1, 877; 2, 1135; 4, 1085, is now supplanted by the critically certain plura and plurima.—The gen. plur. plurium, however, has remained the predominant form, e. g. Quint. 7, 1, 1; 8, 4, 27; 9, 4, 66 et saep.) [from the root ple; Gr. pleon, pimplêmi; cf. plenus, plera, compleo, etc.; also locu-ples, plebes, populus, etc.], more.
    A.
    In the sing. (used both substantively and adverbially): LIBRAS FARRIS ENDO DIES DATO. SI VOLET PLVS DATO, Fragm. XII. Tab. in Gell. 20, 1, 45: SI PLVS MINVSVE SECVERVNT, SE FRAVDE ESTO, ib.;

    so (perh. in imitation of this legal phrase): ebeu, cur ego plus minusve feci quam aequom fuit!

    Plaut. Capt. 5, 3, 18; Ter. Phorm. 3, 3, 21:

    ne plus minusve loqueretur,

    Suet. Aug. 84; cf. Plaut. Men. 4, 2, 27; and in the signif. of circiter, about: septingenti sunt paulo plus aut minus anni... postquam, etc., Enn. ap. Varr. R. R. 3, 1, 2 (Ann. v. 493 Vahl.);

    so. non longius abesse plus minus octo milibus,

    Hirt. B. G. 8, 20, 1 Oud.; cf.:

    speranti plures... venerunt plusve minusve duae,

    Mart. 8, 71, 4:

    aut ne quid faciam plus, quod post me minus fecisse satius sit,

    too much... too little, Ter. Hec. 5, 1, 4:

    tantum et plus etiam ipse mihi deberet,

    Cic. Att. 7, 3, 7:

    vos et decem numero, et, quod plus est, Romani estis,

    and what is more, Liv. 9, 24, 8:

    verbane plus an sententia valere debeat,

    Cic. Top. 25, 96: [p. 1174] cf.:

    apud me argumenta plus quam testes valent,

    id. Rep. 1, 38, 59:

    valet enim salus plus quam libido,

    id. ib. 1, 40, 63.—
    (β).
    With a partitive gen.:

    vultis pecuniae plus habere,

    Cic. Inv. 1, 47, 88; cf.:

    nostri casus plus honoris habuerunt quam laboris,

    id. Rep. 1, 4, 7; so,

    plus virium,

    id. Leg. 1, 2, 6:

    plus hostium,

    Liv. 2, 42:

    plus dapis et rixae multo minus invidiaeque,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 17, 51:

    in hac causa eo plus auctoritatis habent, quia, etc.,

    Cic. Rep. 3, 16, 26; cf.:

    plus ingenii,

    id. ib. 1, 14, 22:

    Albano non plus animi erat quam fidei,

    as little courage as fidelity, Liv. 1, 27, 5.—
    (γ).
    With quam (some examples of which have already been given above):

    non plus quam semel,

    Cic. Off. 3, 15, 61:

    confiteor eos... plus quam sicarios esse,

    id. Phil. 2, 13, 31:

    ne plus reddat quam acceperit,

    id. Lael. 16, 58 et saep.:

    non plus quam in tres partis posse distribui putaverunt,

    into not more than, id. Inv. 1, 34, 57:

    plus quam decem dies abesse,

    id. Phil. 2, 13, 31:

    nulla (navis) plus quam triginta remis agatur,

    with more than, Liv. 38, 38, 8.—
    (δ).
    Without quam:

    HOMINES PLOVS V. OINVORSEI VIREI ATQVE MVLIERES, S. C. de Bacch. 19 (Wordsw. Fragm. and Spec. p. 173): plus mille capti,

    Liv. 24, 44:

    plus milies audivi,

    Ter. Eun. 3, 1, 32: plus semel, Varr. ap. Plin. 14, 14, 17, § 96:

    plus quingentos colaphos infregit mihi,

    Ter. Ad. 2, 1, 46:

    ferre plus dimidiati mensis cibaria,

    Cic. Tusc. 2, 16, 37:

    non plus mille quingentos aeris,

    id. Rep. 2, 22, 40:

    paulo plus ducentos passus a castris,

    Liv. 31, 34:

    cum plus annum aeger fuisset,

    id. 40, 2:

    parte plus dimidia rem auctam,

    id. 29, 25.—
    (ε).
    With a compar. or adverbial abl., or with an abl. of measure:

    VIREI PLOVS DVOBVS, S. C. de Bacch. 20 (Wordsw. Fragm. and Spec. p. 173): de paupertate tacentes Plus poscente ferent,

    more than the importunate, Hor. Ep. 1, 17, 44:

    ex his alius alio plus habet virium,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 2, 6: cave putes hoc tempore plus me quemquam cruciari, Balb. ap. Cic. Att. 8, 15, A, 2:

    alterum certe non potest, ut plus una vera sit,

    Cic. N. D. 1, 2, 5; cf.:

    in columba plures videri colores, nec esse plus uno,

    id. Ac. 2, 25, 79: HOC PLVS NE FACITO, more than this, Fragm. XII. Tab. ap. Cic. Leg. 2, 23, 59:

    annos sexaginta natus es Aut plus eo,

    or more than that, Ter. Heaut. 1, 1, 11:

    plus aequo,

    Cic. Lael. 16, 58:

    plus paulo,

    Ter. Heaut. 2, 1, 8:

    paulo plus,

    Liv. 31, 34: multo plus, Anton. ap. Cic. Att. 10, 8, A, 1:

    plus nimio,

    overmuch, Hor. Ep. 1, 10, 30: quam molestum est uno digito plus habere, too much by a finger, i. e. a finger too much, Cic. N. D. 1, 35, 99:

    uno plus Etruscorum cecidisse in acie,

    one man more, Liv. 2, 7, 2.—
    2.
    In the gen. pretii, pluris, of more value, of a higher price, for more, higher, dearer:

    ut plus reddant musti et olei, et pretii pluris,

    of greater value, Varr. R. R. 1, 7, 4:

    ager multo pluris est,

    is worth much more, Cic. Rosc. Com. 12, 33; cf.:

    quo pluris sint nostra oliveta,

    id. Rep. 3, 9, 16:

    pluris emere,

    dearer, id. Fam. 7, 2, 1; so,

    vendere,

    id. Off. 3, 12, 51; id. Verr. 2, 3, 19, § 48; Hor. S. 2, 3, 300:

    aedificare,

    Col. 1, 4, 7:

    pluris est oculatus testis quam auriti decem,

    of more value, Plaut. Truc. 2, 6, 8:

    mea mihi conscientia pluris est, quam omnium sermo,

    Cic. Att. 12, 28, 2:

    facio pluris omnium hominem neminem,

    id. ib. 8, 2, 4:

    facere aliquem pluris,

    make more of one, esteem him more highly, id. Fam. 3, 4, 2:

    pluris habere,

    id. Phil. 6, 4, 10:

    aestimare,

    id. Par. 6, 2, 48:

    ducere,

    id. Att. 7, 3, 5:

    putare,

    id. Off. 3, 4, 18 et saep.—
    3.
    Rarely, instead of the genitive, in the abl. pretii: plure vendunt, Lucil. ap. Charis. 2, p. 189 P.: plure altero tanto, quanto ejus fundus est, velim, Plaut. ib.: plure venit, Cic. ib.—
    4.
    Plus plusque, more and more: quem mehercule plus plusque in dies diligo. Cic. Att. 6, 2, 10.—
    * 5.
    Like magis, with an adj.:

    plus formosus, for formosior,

    Nemes. Ecl. 4, 72.—
    B.
    In the plur.
    1.
    Comparatively, more in number:

    omnes qui aere alieno premantur, quos plures esse intellego quam putaram,

    Cic. Att. 7, 3, 5; id. Rep. 2, 22, 40:

    nemini ego plura acerba esse credo ex amore homini umquam oblata quam mihi,

    Ter. Hec. 3, 1, 1:

    ne plura insignia essent imperii in libero populo quam in regno fuissent,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 31, 55:

    multo plura,

    many more things, Quint. 3, 6, 28.—
    2.
    In gen., of a great number, many: qui plus fore dicant in pluribus consilii quam in uno. Cic. Rep. 1, 35, 55: cf.: quid quaeso interest inter unum et plures, si justitia est in pluribus? id. ib. 1, 39, 61;

    1, 34, 52: non possunt una in civitate multi rem ac fortunas amittere, ut non plures secum in eandem trahant calamitatem,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 7, 19:

    quod pluribus praesentibus eas res jactari nolebat,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 18:

    plura castella Pompeius tentaverat,

    id. B. C. 3, 52:

    summus dolor plures dies manere non potest,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 28, 93:

    pluribus diebus, Quint. prooem. § 7: illic plurium rerum est congeries,

    id. 8, 4, 27:

    quae consuetudo sit, pluribus verbis docere,

    Cic. Clu. 41, 115:

    eum pluribus verbis rogat, ut, etc.,

    id. Verr. 2, 4, 28, § 64;

    without verba: quid ego plura dicam?

    id. de Or. 1, 5, 18:

    pluribus haec exsecutus sum,

    Phaedr. 3, 10, 59;

    also elliptically, quid plura? and, ne plura, like quid multa? and ne multa: hic sacra, hic genus, hic majorum multa vestigia. Quid plura? hanc vides villam, etc.,

    what need of many words? in short, Cic. Leg. 2, 1, 3:

    sed—ne plura—dicendum enim aliquando est—Pomponium Atticum sic amo, ut alterum fratrem,

    id. Fam. 13, 1, 5.—
    b.
    Esp.: plures.
    (α).
    The mass, the multitude, opp. pauciores, = hoi oligoi, Plaut. Trin. 1, 1, 13.—
    (β).
    Euphemistically, acc. to the Gr. hoi pleiones, the dead:

    quin prius Me ad plures penetravi?

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 14.—
    (γ).
    The greater number, the majority:

    plures nesciebant qua ex causa convenissent,

    Vulg. Act. 19, 32.
    III.
    Sup.: plūrĭmus (archaic form, plisima plurima, Paul. ex Fest. p. 204 and 205 Mull.: PLIOIRVME (I), Epit. of Scipio), a, um [from root ple; whence also plus, q. v., ploirumus for ploisumus; and thence the predominant form plurimus], most, very much, or many (as an adj. in good prose mostly in the plur., except the standing formula of greeting: salutem plurimam dicere alicui; v. infra):

    hujus sunt plurima simulacra,

    Caes. B. G. 6, 17:

    nos plurimis ignotissimi gentibus,

    Cic. Rep. 1, 17, 26:

    plurimae et maximae partes,

    id. ib. 1, 4, 8:

    plurimorum seculorum memoria,

    id. ib. 3, 9, 14:

    haec plurimis a me verbis dicta sunt,

    id. ib. 1, 7, 12 et saep.—In sing.:

    me plurima praeda onustum,

    Plaut. Rud. 4, 2, 4:

    sermo,

    Quint. 2, 2, 5:

    risus,

    id. 6, 3, 85:

    res,

    id. 6, 1, 51:

    exercitatio,

    id. 8 prooem. §

    28: mons,

    very large, Verg. A. 1, 419:

    cervix,

    id. G. 3, 52:

    Aetna,

    Ov. Ib. 600.—Of a greeting: impertit salutem plurimam, Lucil. ap. Non. 472. 16; and esp. freq.: salutem plurimam dicit (commonly abbrev. S. P. D.) at the beginning of letters; v. salus.— Poet.:

    medio cum plurimus orbe Sol erat,

    very powerful, oppressive, Ov. M. 14, 53: plurima qua silva est. thickest, id. ib. 14, 361:

    coma plurima,

    very thick, id. ib. 13, 844:

    sed plurima nantis in ore Alcyone conjux,

    mostly, chiefly, id. ib. 11, 562.—And collect.:

    plurimus in Junonis honorem Aptum dicet equis Argos,

    many a one, very many, Hor. C. 1, 7, 8; so,

    oleaster plurimus,

    Verg. G. 2, 183:

    qua plurima mittitur ales,

    Mart. 9, 56, 1:

    plurima lecta rosa est,

    Ov. F. 4, 441.— In neutr. absol. (substant. or adverb.):

    ut haberet quam plurimum,

    as much as possible, Cic. Rab. Post. 14, 39:

    caput autem est, quam plurimum scribere,

    id. de Or. 1, 33, 150:

    ut in quoque oratore plurimum esset,

    id. Rep. 1, 27, 123.— Adv.: plūrĭmum:

    et is valebat in suffragio plurimum, cujus plurimum intererat, esse in optimo statu civitatem,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 22, 40:

    auspiciis plurimum obsecutus est Romulus,

    id. ib. 2, 9, 16:

    si vero populus plurimum potest,

    id. ib. 3, 14, 23; cf.:

    qui apud me dignitate plurimum possunt,

    id. Rosc. Am. 1, 4:

    plurimum aliis praestare,

    id. Inv. 2, 1, 1:

    ut te plurimum diligam,

    id. Fam. 1, 7, 1; id. Tusc. 5, 27, 78:

    hoc ego utor uno omnium plurimum,

    id. Fam. 11, 16, 2:

    quantum (al. quanto) plurimum possunt,

    Quint. 11, 3, 120: plurimum quantum also signifies very much indeed, exceedingly (post-class.):

    plurimum quantum veritati nocuere,

    Min. Fel. Oct. 22:

    gratulor,

    id. ib. 40:

    (elleborum) ex aqua datur plurimum drachma,

    at the most, Plin. 25, 5, 22, § 54; 9, 36, 60, § 125; 30, 6, 16, § 48; so,

    cum plurimum,

    id. 2, 17, 15, § 78 (opp. to cum minimum); 18, 7, 10, § 60: nec tam numerosa differentia; tribus ut plurimum bonitatibus distat, for the most part, commonly, usually, = plerumque, Plin. 15, 3, 4, § 18.—
    (β).
    In neutr. with a partit. gen.: sententiarum et gravitatis plurimum, Cic. Inv. 1, 18, 25:

    artis,

    Quint. 10, 5, 3:

    auctoritatis et ponderis,

    id. 9, 4, 91:

    ut laboris sic utilitatis etiam longe plurimum,

    id. 10, 3, 1:

    virtutum,

    id. 12, 1, 20 plurimum quantum favoris partibus dabat fratermtas ducum, Flor. 4, 2, 74.—
    (γ).
    In the gen. pretii:

    plurimi: immo unice unum plurimi pendit,

    values very highly, esteems very much, Plaut. Bacch. 2, 2, 29:

    quem unum Alexander plurimi fecerat,

    Nep. Eum. 2, 2:

    ut quisque quod plurimi est possidet,

    Cic. Par. 6, 2, 48.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > plurimum

  • 9 FYRIR

    * * *
    prep.
    I. with dat.
    1) before, in front of (ok vóru fyrir honum borin merkin);
    fyrir dyrum, before the door;
    2) before one, in one’s presence;
    hón nefndist fyrir þeim Gunnhildr, she told them that her name was G.;
    3) for;
    hann lét ryðja fyrir þeim búðina, he had the booth cleared for them, for their reception;
    4) before one, in one’s way;
    fjörðr varð fyrir þeim, they came to a fjord;
    sitja fyrir e-m, to lie in wait for one;
    5) naut. term. before, off;
    liggja fyrir bryggjum, to lie off the piers;
    fyrir Humru-mynni, off the Humber;
    6) before, at the head of, over;
    vera fyrir liði, to be over the troops;
    vera fyrir máli, to lead the case;
    sitja fyrir svörum, to undertake the defence;
    7) of time, ago;
    fyrir þrem nóttum, three nights ago;
    fyrir stundu, a while ago;
    fyrir löngu, long ago;
    vera fyrir e-u, to forebode (of a dream);
    8) before, above, superior to;
    Hálfdan svarti var fyrir þeim brœðrum, H. was the foremost of the brothers;
    9) denoting disadvantige, harm, suffering;
    þú lætr Egil vefja öll mál fyrir þér, thou lettest E. thwart all thy affairs;
    tók at eyðast fyrir herm lausa-fé, her money began to fail;
    10) denoting obstacle, hindrance;
    mikit gøri þer mér fyrir þessu máli, you make this case hard for me;
    varð honum lítit fyrir því, it was a small matter for him;
    Ásgrími þótti þungt fyrir, A. thought that things looked bad;
    11) because of, for;
    hon undi sér hvergri fyrir verkjum, she had no rest for pains;
    fyrir hræðslu, for fear;
    illa fœrt fyrir ísum, scarcely, passable for ice;
    gáðu þeir eigi fyrir veiðum at fá heyjanna, because of fishing, they neglected to make hay;
    fyrir því at, because, since, as;
    12) against;
    gæt þín vel fyrir konungi ok hans mönnum, guard thee well against the king and his men;
    beiða griða Baldri fyrir alls konar háska, against all kinds of harm;
    13) fyrir sér, of oneself;
    mikill fyrir sér, strong, powerful;
    minnstr fyrir sér, smallest, weakest;
    14) denoting manner or quality, with;
    hvítr fyrir hærum, while with hoary hair;
    II. with acc.
    1) before, in front of;
    halda fyrir augu sér, to hold (one’s hands) before one’s eyes;
    2) before, into the presence of;
    stefna e-m fyrir dómstól, before a court;
    3) over;
    hlaupa fyrir björg, to leap over a precipice;
    kasta fyrir borð, to throw overboard;
    4) in one’s way, crossing one’s way;
    ríða á leið fyrir þá, to ride in their way, so as to meet them;
    5) round, off;
    sigla fyrir nes, to weather a point;
    6) along, all along;
    fyrir endilangan Noreg, all along Norway, from one end to the other;
    draga ör fyrir odd, to draw the arrow past the point;
    7) of time, fyrir dag, before day;
    fyrir e-s minni, before one’s memory;
    8) for, on behalf of;
    vil ek bjóða at fara fyrir þik, I will offer to go for thee, in thy stead;
    lögvörn fyrir mál, a lawful defence for a case;
    9) for, for the benefit of;
    þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, they cut the lyme-grass for them (the horses);
    10) for, instead of, in place of, as;
    11) for, because of (vilja Gunnar dauðan fyrir höggit);
    fyrir þín orð, for thy words (intercession);
    fyrir sína vinsæld, by reason of his popularity;
    12) denoting value, price;
    fyrir þrjár merkr, for three marks;
    fyrir hvern mun, by all means, at any cost;
    13) in spite of, against (giptast fyrir ráð e-s);
    14) joined with adverbs ending in -an, governing acc. (fyrir austan, vestan, sunnan, norðan, útan innan, framan, handan, ofan, neðan);
    fyrir austan, sunnan fjall, east, south of the fell;
    fyrir neðan brú, below the bridge;
    fyrir handan á, beyond the river;
    fyrir innan garð, inside the fence;
    III. as adverb or ellipt.
    1) ahead, before, opp. to eptir;
    þá var eigi hins verra eptir ván, er slíkt fór fyrir, when this came first, preceded;
    2) first;
    mun ek þar eptir gera sem þér gerit fyrir, I shall do to you according as you do first;
    3) at hand, present, to the fore;
    föng þau, er fyrir vóru, stores that were at hand;
    þar var fyrir fjöldi boðsmanna, a host of guests was already present (before the bride and bridegroom came);
    4) e-m verðr e-t fyrir, one takes a certain step, acts so and so;
    Kolbeini varð ekki fyrir, K. was at a loss what to do;
    e-t mælist vel (illa) fyrir, a thing is well (ill) spoken or reported of (kvæðit mæltist vel fyrir).
    * * *
    prep., in the Editions spelt differently; in MSS. this word is usually abbreviated either  (i. e. firir), or Ꝼ̆, fur͛, fvr͛ (i. e. fyrir); in some MSS. it is idiomatically spelt with i, fir͛, e. g. Arna-Magn. 382 (Bs. i. 263 sqq.); and even in the old Miracle-book Arna-Magn. 645 (Bs. i. 333 sqq.), just as ifir is written for yfir ( over); in a few MSS. it is written as a monosyllable fyr, e. g. D. I. i. 475, Mork. passim; in Kb. (Sæm.-Edda) occurs fyr telia, Vsp. I; fyr norðan, 36; fyr dyrum, Gm. 22; fyr vestan ver, Hkv. 2. 8; in other places as a dissyll. fyrir, e. g. Hm. 56, Gm. 54, Skm. 34, Ls. 15, Am. 64, Hkv. 2. 2, 19 (quoted from Bugge’s edition, see his preface, p. xvi); fyr and fyrir stand to one another in the same relation as ept to eptir, und to undir, of ( super) to yfir: this monosyllabic form is obsolete, save in the compds, where ‘for-’ is more common than ‘fyrir-;’ in some cases both forms are used, e. g. for-dæming and fyrir-dæming; in others only one, but without any fixed rule: again, the forms fyri, fyre, or fire, which are often used in Edd., are just as wrong, as if one were to say epti, undi, yfi; yet this spelling is found now and then in MSS., as, fyre, Ó. H. (facsimile); fire, Grág. Sb. ii. 288 (also facsimile): the particles í and á are sometimes added, í fur, Fms. iv. 137; í fyrir, passim; á fur, Haustl. 1. [Ulf. faur and faura; A. S. fore and for; Engl. for and fore-; Germ. für and vor; Dan. for; Swed. för; Gr. προ-; Lat. pro, prae.]
    WITH DAT., chiefly without the notion of movement.
    A. LOCAL:
    I. before, in front of; fyrir dyrum, before the doors, at the doors, Nj. 14, Vsp. 53, Hm. 69, Edda 130; niðr f. smiðju-dyrum, Eg. 142:—ahead, úti fyrir búðinni, Nj. 181; kómusk sauðirnir upp á fjallit f. þeim, ahead of them, 27; vóru fyrir honum borin merkin, the banner was borne before him, 274; göra orð fyrir sér, to send word before one, Fms. vii. 207, Hkr. iii. 335 (Ó. H. 201, l. c., frá sér):—also denoting direction, niðri í eldinum f. sér, beneath in the fire before them, Nj. 204; þeir sá f. sér bæ mikinn, they saw before them a great building, i. e. they came to a great house, Eg. 546; öðrum f. sér ( in front) en öðrum á bak sér, Grág. i. 5.
    2. before one, before one’s face, in one’s presence; úhelgaða ek Otkel f. búum, before the neighbours, Nj. 87; lýsi ek f. búum fimm, 218; lýsa e-u ( to proclaim) f. e-m, Ld. 8; hann hermdi boð öll f. Gizuri, Nj. 78; hón nefndisk f. þeim Gunnhildr, told them that her name was G., Fms. i. 8; kæra e-t f. e-m, Ó. H. 60; slíkar fortölur hafði hann f. þeim, Nj. 200; the saying, því læra börnin málið að það er f. þeim haft, bairns learn to speak because it is done before them, i. e. because they hear it; hafa gott (íllt) f. e-m, to give a good (bad) example, e. g. in the presence of children; lifa vel f. Guði, to live well before God, 623. 29; stór ábyrgðar-hluti f. Guði, Nj. 199; sem þeir sjá réttast f. Guði, Grág. i. (pref.); fyrir öllum þeim, Hom. 89; á laun f. öðrum mönnum, hidden from other men, unknown to them, Grág. i. 337, Jb. 378; nú skaltú vera vin minn mikill f. húsfreyju minni, i. e. when you talk to my wife, Nj. 265; fyrir Drottni, before the Lord, Merl. 2. 78.
    3. denoting reception of guests, visitors; hann lét ryðja f. þeim búðina, he had the room cleared for them, for their reception, Nj. 228; Valhöll ryðja fyr vegnu fólki, i. e. to clear Valhalla for slain folk, Em. I; ryðja vígvöll f. vegundum, Nj. 212; ljúka upp f. e-m, to open the door for one, Fms. xi. 323, Stj. 5; rýma pallinn f. þeim, Eg. 304; hann lét göra eld f. þeim, he had a fire made for them, 204; þeir görðu eld. f. sér, Fms. xi. 63; … veizlur þar sem fyrir honum var búit, banquets that were ready for him, Eg. 45.
    II. before one, in one’s way; þar er díki varð f. þeim, Eg. 530; á (fjörðr) varð f. þeim, a river, fjord, was before them, i. e. they came to it, 133, 161; at verða eigi f. liði yðru, 51; maðr sá varð f. Vindum, that man was overtaken by the V., Hkr. iii. 363; þeirra manna er f. honum urðu, Eg. 92.
    2. sitja f. e-m, to lie in wait for one, Ld. 218, Nj. 107; lá f. henni í skóginum, Edda (pref.); sitja f. rekum, to sit watching for wrecks, Eg. 136 (fyrir-sát).
    3. ellipt., menn urðu at gæta sín er f. urðu, Nj. 100; Egill var þar f. í runninum, E. was before (them), lay in ambush, Eg. 378; hafði sá bana er f. varð, who was before (the arrow), i. e. he was hit, Nj. 8.
    4. verða f. e-u, to be hit, taken, suffer from a thing; ef hann verðr f. drepi, if he be struck, Grág. ii. 19; verða f. áverka, to be wounded, suffer injury, Ld. 140; verða f. reiði konungs, to fall into disgrace with the king, Eg. 226; verða f. ósköpum, to become the victim of a spell, spell-bound, Fas. i. 130; sitja f. hvers manns ámæli, to be the object of all men’s blame, Nj. 71; vera eigi f. sönnu hafðr, to be unjustly charged with a thing, to be innocent.
    III. a naut. term, before, off; liggja f. bryggjum, to lie off the pier, Ld. 166; skip fljóta f. strengjum, Sks. 116; þeir lágu f. bænum, they lay off the town, Bs. i. 18; liggja úti f. Jótlands-síðu, off Jutland, Eg. 261; hann druknaði f. Jaðri, off the J., Fms. i. II; þeir kómu at honum f. Sjólandi, off Zealand, x. 394; hafa úti leiðangr f. landi, Hkr. i. 301; f. Humru-minni, off the Humber, Orkn. 338, cp. Km. 3, 8, 9, 13, 19, 21; fyrir Nesjum, off the Ness, Vellekla; fyrir Tungum, Sighvat; fyrir Spáni, off Spain, Orkn. 356.
    IV. before, at the head of, denoting leadership; smalamaðr f. búi föður síns, Ver. 26 (of king David); vera f. liði, to be over the troops, Eg. 292, Nj. 7; vera f. máli, to lead the case, Band. 8; vera forstjóri f. búi, to be steward over the household, Eg. 52; ráða f. landi, ríki, etc., to rule, govern, Ó H. 33, Nj. 5; hverr f. eldinum réði, who was the ringleader of the fire, Eg. 239; ráða f. e-u, to rule, manage a thing, passim: the phrase, sitja f. svörum, to respond on one’s behalf, Ölk. 36, Band. 12; hafa svör f. e-m, to be the chief spokesman, Fms. x. 101, Dipl. v. 26.
    V. special usages; friða f. e-m, to make peace for one, Fms. vii. 16, Bs. i. 65; bæta f. e-m, to make things good for one, Hom. 109; túlka, vera túlkr, flytja (etc.) f. e-m, to plead for one, Fms. iii. 33, Nj. 128,—also spilla f. e-m, to disparage one, Eg. 255; haga, ætla f. e-u, to manage, arrange for one, Ld. 208, Sturl. i. 14, Boll. 356; rífka ráð f. e-m, to better one’s condition, Nj. 21; ráða heiman-fylgju ok tilgjöf f. frændkonu sinni, Js. 58; standa f. manni, to stand before, shield a man, stand between him and his enemy, Eg. 357, Grág. ii. 13; vera skjöldr f. e-m, 655 xxxii. 4; hafa kostnað f. e-u, to have the expences for a thing, Ld. 14; vinna f. e-m, to support one by one’s work, Sks. 251; starfa f. fé sínu, to manage one’s money, Ld. 166; hyggja f. e-u, to take heed for a thing, Nj. 109; hyggja f. sér, Fs. 5; hafa forsjá f. e-m, to provide for one, Ld. 186; sjá f. e-u, to see after, Eg. 118, Landn, 152; sjá þú nokkut ráð f. mér, Nj. 20: ironic. to put at rest, Háv. 40: ellipt., sjá vel f., to provide well for, Nj. 102.
    B. TEMP. ago; fyrir þrem nóttum, three nights ago; fyrir stundu, a while ago, Nj. 80; fyrir litlu, a little while ago, Fms. i. 76, Ld. 134; fyrir skömmu, a sbort while ago; fyrir löngu, a long while ago, Nj. 260, Fms. i. 50; fyrir öndverðu, from the beginning, Grág. i. 80, ii. 323, 394, Finnb. 342; fyrir þeim, before they were born, Fms. i. 57.
    2. the phrase, vera f. e-u, to forebode; vera f. stórfundum, Nj. 107, 277; þat hygg ek vera munu f. siða-skipti, Fms. xi. 12; þessi draumr mun vera f. kvámu nökkurs manns, vii. 163; dreyma draum f. e-u, 8; fyrir tiðendum, ii. 65:—spá f. e-m, to ‘spae’ before, prophecy to one, Nj. 171.
    C. METAPH.:
    I. before, above; þóttu þeir þar f. öllum ungum mönnum, Dropl. 7; þykkisk hann mjök f. öðrum mönnum, Ld. 38; ver f. hirðmönnum, be first among my herdsmen, Eg. 65; Hálfdan svarti var f. þeim bræðrum, H. was the foremost of the brothers, Fms. i. 4; þorgrímr var f. sonum Önundar, Grett. 87; var Haraldr mest f. þeim at virðingu, Fms. i. 47.
    II. denoting help, assistance; haun skal rétta vættið f. þeim, Grág. i. 45 (vide above A. IV and V).
    2. the following seem to be Latinisms, láta lífit f. heilagri Kristni, to give up one’s life for holy Christianity, = Lat. pro, Fms. vii. 172; ganga undir píslir fyrir Guðs nafni, Blas. 38; gjalda önd mína f. önd þinni, Johann. 17; gefa gjöf f. sál sinni ( pro animâ suâ), H. E. i. 466; fyrir mér ok minni sál, Dipl. iv. 8; færa Guði fórnir f. e-m, 656 A; heita f. e-m, biðja f. e-m, to make a vow, pray for one (orare pro), Fms. iii. 48, Bs. i. 70; biðja f. mönnum, to intercede for, 19, Fms. xi. 287: even with a double construction, biðja f. stað sinn (acc., which is vernacular) ok heilagri kirkju (dat., which is a Latinism), x. 127.
    III. denoting disadvantage, harm, suffering; þú lætr Egil vefja öll mál fyrir þér, thou lettest Egil thwart all thy affairs, Eg. 249; únýtir hann þá málit fyrir sér, then he ruins his own case, Grág. i. 36, Dropl. 14, 16; Manverjar rufu safnaðinn f. Þorkatli, the Manxmen broke up the assembly, i. e. forsook Thorkel, Fms. ix. 422; kom upp grátr f. henni, she burst into tears, 477; taka fé f. öðrum, to take another’s money, N. G. L. i. 20; knörr þann er konungr lét taka fyrir Þórólfi, Landn. 56; ef hross verðr tekit f. honum, if a horse of his be taken, Grág. i. 436; hann tók upp fé fyrir öllum, he seized property for them all, Ó. H. 60; e-t ferr ílla f. e-m, a thing turns out ill for one; svá fór f. Ólófu, so it came to pass for O., Vígl. 18; loka dyrr f. e-m, to lock the door in one’s face, Edda 21: þeir hafa eigi þessa menn f. yðr drepit, heldr f. yðrar sakir þessi víg vegit, i. e. they have not harmed you, but rather done you a service in slaying those men, Fbr. 33; tók at eyðask f. henni lausa-fé, her money began to fail, Nj. 29; rak á f. þeim storma ok stríðviðri, they were overtaken by gales and bad weather, Vígl. 27; Víglundr rak út knöttinn f. Jökli, V. drove the ball for J., i. e. so that he had to run after it, 24; sá er skar tygil f. Þóri, he who cut Thor’s line, Bragi; sverð brast f. mér, my sword broke, Korm. 98 (in a verse); brjóta e-t f. e-m, to break a thing for one, Bs. i. 15 (in a verse); Valgarðr braut krossa fyrir Merði ok öll heilög tákn, Nj. 167; árin brotnaði f. honum, his oar broke; allar kýrnar drápust fyrir honum, all his cows died.
    2. denoting difficulty, hindrance; sitja f. sæmd e-s, to sit between oneself and one’s honour, i. e. to hinder one’s doing well, Sturl. 87; mikit göri þér mér f. þessu máli, you make this case sore for me, Eb. 124; þér er mikit f. máli, thy case stands ill, Fms. v. 325; ekki er Guði f. því, it is easy for God to do, 656 B. 9; varð honum lítið f. því, it was a small matter for him, he did it easily, Grett. III; mér er minna f. því, it is easier for me, Am. 60; þykkja mikit f. e-u, to be much grieved for a thing, do it unwillingly, Nj. 77; Icel. also say, þykja fyrir (ellipt.), to feel hurt, be displeased:—ellipt., er þeim lítið fyrir at villa járnburð þenna, it is a small matter for them to spoil this ordeal, Ó. H. 140; sem sér muni lítið f. at veiða Gunnar, Nj. 113; fast mun f. vera, it will be fast-fixed before (one), hard to move, Ld. 154; Ásgrími þótti þungt f., A. thought that things looked sad (heavy), Nj. 185; hann var lengi f., he was long about it, Fms. x. 205; hann var lengi f. ok kvað eigi nei við, he was cross and said not downright no, Þorf. Karl. 388.
    IV. in a causal sense, for, because of, Lat. per, pro; sofa ek né mákat fugls jarmi fyrir, I cannot sleep for the shrill cry of birds, Edda 16 (in a verse); hon undi sér hvergi f. verkjum, she had no rest for pains, Bjarn. 69; fyrir gráti, tárum, = Lat. prae lacrymis; fyrir harmi, for sorrow; f. hlátri, for laughter, as in Engl.; þeir æddust f. einni konu, they went mad for the sake of one woman, Sól. 11; ílla fært f. ísum, scarce passable for ice, Fms. xi. 360; hætt var at sitja útar f. Miðgarðs-ormi, Edda 35; hann var lítt gengr f. sárinu, he could hardly walk for the wound, Fbr. 178; fyrir hræðslu, for fear, Hbl. 26; heptisk vegrinn f. þeim meinvættum sem …, Fs. 4; gáðu þeir eigi f. veiðum at fá heyjanna, because of fishing they took no care to make hay, Landn. 30; fyrir riki konungs, for the king’s power, Eg. 67, 117; fyrir ofríki manna, Grág. i. 68; fyrir hví, for why? Eluc. 4; fyrir hví þeir væri þar, Eg. 375; fyrir því, at …, for that, because, Edda 35, Fms. i. 22, vii. 330, Ld. 104; en fyrir því nú at, now since, Skálda 171; nú fyrir því at, id., 169: the phrase, fyrir sökum, for the sake of, because of, passim; vide sök.
    V. by, by the force of; öxlin gékk ór liði fyrir högginu, the shoulder was disjointed by the force of the stroke, Háv. 52.
    2. denoting contest; falla f. e-m, to fall before one, i. e. fighting against one, Fms. i. 7, iv. 9, x. 196; verða halloki f. e-m, to be overcome in fighting one, Ld. 146; látask f. e-m, to perish by one, Eb. 34; hafa bana f. e-m, to be slain by one, Nj. 43; þeir kváðu fá fúnað hafa f. honum, 263; mæddisk hann f. þeim, he lost his breath in fighting them, Eg. 192; láta ríki f. e-m, to lose the kingdom before another, i. e. so that the latter gains it, 264; láta lausar eignir mínar f. þér, 505; láta hlut sinn f. e-m, Fs. 47; standask f. e-m, to stand one’s ground before one, Edda (pref.); hugðisk hann falla mundu f. sjóninni einni saman, that he would sink before his glance, 28, Hým. 12; halda hlut f. e-m, Ld. 54; halda frið ok frelsi f. várum óvinum, Fms. viii. 219; fara mun ek sem ek hefi áðr ætlað f. þínum draum ( thy dream notwithstanding), Ld. 216; þér farit hvárt er þér vilit f. mér, you go wherever you like for me, so far as I am concerted, Fær. 37; halda vöku f. sér, to keep oneself awake, Fms. i. 216.
    β. with verbs, flýja, hlaupa, renna, stökkva f. e-m, to fly, leap, run before one, i. e. to be pursued, Bs. i. 774, Grág. ii. 359; at hann rynni f. þrælum hans, Ld. 64; fyrir þessum úfriði stökk Þangbrandr til Noregs, 180; skyldi hann ganga ór á f. Hofsmönnum, Landn. 178; ganga f. e-u, to give way before, yield to a thing, Fms. i. 305, x. 292; vægja f. e-m, to yield to one, give way, Eg. 21, 187, Nj. 57, Ld. 234.
    VI. against; verja land f. e-m, Eg. 32; verja landit f. Dönum ok öðrum víkingum, Fms. i. 23; til landvarnar f. víkingum, Eg. 260; landvarnar-maðr f. Norðmönnum, Fms. vi. 295; gæta brúarinnar f. bergrisum, Edda 17; gæt þín vel f. konungi ok hans mönnum, guard thee well against the king and his men, Eg. 113; góð aðstoð f. tröllum ok dvergum, Bárð. 163; beiða Baldri griða f. allskonar háska, Edda 36; auðskæðr f. höggum, Eg. 770.
    VII. in the sense of being driven before; fyrir straumi, veðri, vindi, before the stream, wind, weather (forstreymis, forvindis), Grág. ii. 384, Fms. vii. 262; halda f. veðri, to stand before the wind, Róm. 211.
    2. rýrt mun verða f. honum smá-mennit, he will have an easy game with the small people, Nj. 94: ellipt., hafði sá bana er f. varð, 8; sprakk f., 16, 91.
    VIII. fyrir sér, of oneself, esp. of physical power; mikill f. sér, strong, powerful; lítill f. sér, weak, feeble, Nj. 20, Ísl. ii. 368, Eg. 192; þér munuð kalla mik lítinn mann f. mér, Edda 33; minnstr f. sér, smallest, weakest, Eg. 123; gildr maðr f. sér, Ísl. ii. 322, Fms. ii. 145; herðimaðr mikiil f. sér, a hardy man, Nj. 270; hvat ert þú f. þér, what kind of fellow art thou? Clem. 33; vera einn f. sér, to be a strange fellow, Grett. 79 new Ed.; Icel. also say, göra mikið (lítið) f. sér, to make oneself big ( little).
    β. sjóða e-t f. sér, to hesitate, saunter, Nj. 154; mæla f. munni, to talk between one’s teeth, to mutter, Orkn. 248, Nj. 249.
    IX. denoting manner or quality; hvítr f. hærum, white with hoary hairs, Fms. vi. 95, Fas. ii. 540; gráir fyrir járnum, grey with steel, of a host in armour, Mag. 5; hjölt hvít f. silfri, a hilt white with silver = richly silvered, Eb. 226.
    X. as adverb or ellipt.,
    1. ahead, in front, = á undan, Lat. prae, opp. to eptir; þá var eigi hins verra eptir ván, er slíkt fór fyrir, as this came first, preceded, Nj. 34; at einhverr mundi fara heim fyrir, that some one would go home first (to spy), Eg. 580; Egill fór f., E. went in before, id.; at vér ríðim þegar f. í nótt, 283.
    β. first; hann stefndi f. málinu, en hann mælti eptir, one pronounced the words first, but the other repeated after him, Nj. 35; mun ek þar eptir göra sem þér gerit f., I shall do to you according as you do first, 90:—temp., sjau nóttum f., seven nights before, Grág. ii. 217.
    2. to the fore, at hand, present; þar var fyrir fjöldi boðsmanna, a host of guests was already to the fore, i. e. before the bride and bridegroom came, Nj. 11; úvíst er at vita hvar úvinir sitja á fleti fyrir, Hm. 1; skal þá lögmaðr þar f. vera, he shall be there present, Js. 3; heima í túni fyrir, Fær. 50; þar vóru fyrir Hildiríðar-synir, Eg. 98; var honum allt kunnigt fyrir, he knew all about the localities, 583; þeim ómögum, sem f. eru, who are there already, i. e. in his charge, Grág. i. 286: of things, föng þau er f. vóru, stores that were to the fore, at hand, Eg. 134.
    3. fore, opp. to ‘back,’ of clothes; slæður settar f. allt gullknöppum, Eg. 516; bak ok fyrir, back and front, = bak ok brjóst, Mar.
    XI. in the phrase, e-m verðr e-t fyrir, a thing is before one, i. e. one takes that and that step, acts so and so in an emergency; nú verðr öðrum þeirra þat f., at hann kveðr, now if the other part alleges, that …, Grág. i. 362; Kolbeini varð ekki f., K. had no resource, i. e. lost his head, Sturl. iii. 285:—the phrase, e-t mælisk vel (ílla) fyrir, a thing is well ( ill) reported of; víg Gunnars spurðisk ok mæltisk ílla fyrir um allar sveitir, Nj. 117, Sturl. ii. 151; mun þat vel f. mælask, people will like it well, Nj. 29, Þórð. 55 new Ed.; ílla mun þat f. mælask at ganga á sættir við frændr sína, Ld. 238; ok er lokit var, mæltisk kvæðit vel f., the people praised the poem, Fms. vii. 113.
    XII. in special senses, either as prep. or adv. (vide A. V. above); segja leið f. skipi, to pilot a ship, Eg. 359; segja f. skipi, to say a prayer for a new ship or for any ship going to sea, Bs. i. 774, Fms. x. 480; mæla f. e-u, to dictate, Grág. ii. 266; mæla f. minni, to bring out a toast, vide minni; mæla f. sætt, i. 90; skipa, koma e-u f., to arrange, put right; ætla f. e-u, to make allowance for; trúa e-m f. e-u, to entrust one with; það fer mikið f. e-u (impers.), it is of great compass, bulky; hafa f. e-u, to have trouble with a thing; leita f. sér, to enquire; biðjask f., to say one’s prayers, vide biðja; mæla fyrir, segja f., etc., to order, Nj. 103, Js. 3: of a spell or solemn speaking, hann mælti svá f., at …, Landn. 34; spyrjask f., to enquire, Hkr. ii. 333; búask f., to prepare, make arrangement, Landn. 35, Sks. 551; skipask f., to draw up, Nj. 197; leggjask f., to lie down in despair, Bs. i. 194; spá fyrir, to ‘spae’ before, foretell; þeir menn er spá f. úorðna hluti, Fms. i. 96; segja f., to foretell, 76, Bb. 332; Njáll hefir ok sagt f. um æfi hans, Nj. 102; vita e-t f., to ‘wit’ beforehand, know the future, 98; sjá e-t f., to foresee, 162; ef þat er ætlat f., fore-ordained, id.
    WITH ACC., mostly with the notion of movement.
    A. LOCAL:
    I. before, in front of; fyrir dyrrin, Nj. 198; láta síga brýnn f. brár, Hkv. Hjörv. 19; halda f. augu sér, to hold (one’s hands) before one’s eyes, Nj. 132; leggja sverði fyrir brjóst e-m, to thrust a sword into his breast, 162, Fs. 39.
    2. before one, before a court; stefna e-m f. dómstól, Fms. xi. 444; ganga, koma f. e-n, to go, come before one, Fms. i. 15, Eg. 426, Nj. 6, 129, passim; fyrir augu e-s, before one’s eyes, Stj. 611.
    3. before, so as to shield; hann kom skildinum f. sik, he put the shield before him, Nj. 97, 115; halda skildi f. e-n, a duelling term, since the seconder had to hold one’s shield, Ísl. ii. 257.
    4. joined to adverbs such as fram, aptr, út, inn, ofan, niðr, austr, vestr, suðr, norðr, all denoting direction; fram f., forward; aptr f., backward, etc.; hann reiddi öxina fram f. sik, a stroke forward with the axe, Fms. vii. 91; hann hljóp eigi skemra aptr en fram fyrir sik, Nj. 29; þótti honum hann skjóta brandinum austr til fjallanna f. sik, 195; komask út f. dyrr, to go outside the door, Eg. 206:—draga ofan f. brekku, to drag over the hill, Ld. 220; hrinda f. mel ofan, to thrust one over the gravel bank, Eg. 748; hlaupa f. björg, to leap over a precipice, Eb. 62, Landn. 36; elta e-n f. björg, Grág. ii. 34; hlaupa (kasta) f. borð, to leap ( throw) overboard, Fms. i. 178, Hkr. iii. 391, Ld. 226; síga ( to be hauled) niðr f. borgar-vegg, 656 C. 13, Fms. ix. 3; hlaupa niðr f. stafn, Eg. 142; niðr f. skaflinn, Dropl. 25; fyrir brekku, Orkn. 450, Glúm. 395 (in a verse).
    II. in one’s way, crossing one’s way; þeir stefndu f. þá, Fms. ix. 475; ríða á leið f. þá, to ride in their way, so as to meet them, Boll. 348; hlaupa ofan f. þá, Nj. 153; vóru allt komin f. hann bréf, letters were come before him, in his way, Fms. vii. 207; þeir felldu brota f. hann, viz. they felled trees before him, so as to stop him, viii. 60, ix. 357; leggja bann f. skip, to lay an embargo on a ship, Ld. 166.
    III. round, off a point; fyrir nesit, Nj. 44; út f. Holm, out past the Holm, Fms. vii. 356: esp. as a naut. term, off a point on the shore, sigla f. England, Norðyrnbraland, Þrasnes, Spán, to sail by the coast of, stand off England, Northumberland, … Spain, Orkn. 338, 340, 342, 354; fyrir Yrjar, Fms. vii. (in a verse); fyrir Siggju, Aumar, Lista, Edda 91 (in a verse); er hann kom f. Elfina, when be came off the Gotha, Eg. 80; leggja land f. skut, to lay the land clear of the stern, i. e. to pass it, Edda l. c.; göra frið f. land sitt, to pacify the land from one end to another, Ld. 28; fyrir uppsprettu árinnar, to come to ( round) the sources of the river, Fms. iii. 183; fyrir garðs-enda, Grág. ii. 263; girða f. nes, to make a wall across the ness, block it up, cp. Lat. praesepire, praemunire, etc., Grág. ii. 263; so also binda f. op, poka, Lat. praeligare, praestringere; hlaða f. gat, holu, to stop a hole, opening; greri f. stúfinn, the stump (of the arm or leg) was healed, closed, Nj. 275; skjóta slagbrandi f. dyrr, to shoot a bolt before the door, to bar it, Dropl. 29; láta loku (lás) f. hurð, to lock a door, Gísl. 28; setja innsigli f. bréf, to set a seal to a letter, Dipl. i. 3: ellipt., setr hón þar lás fyrir, Ld. 42, Bs. i. 512.
    2. along, all along; f. endilanga Danmörk, f. endilangan Noreg, all along Denmark, Norway, from one end to the other, Fms. iv. 319, xi. 91, Grett. 97:—öx álnar f. munn, an axe with an ell-long edge, Ld. 276; draga ör f. ödd, to draw the arrow past the point, an archer’s term, Fms. ii. 321.
    IV. with verbs, fyrir ván komit, one is come past hope, all hope is gone, Sturl. i. 44, Hrafn. 13, Fms. ii. 131; taka f. munn e-m, to stop one’s mouth; taka f. háls, kverkar, e-m, to seize one by the throat, etc.; taka mál f. munn e-m, ‘verba alicujus praeripere,’ to take the word out of one’s mouth, xi. 12; taka f. hendr e-m, to seize one’s hands, stop one in doing a thing, Eb. 124; mod., taka fram f. hendrnar á e-m.
    B. TEMP.: fyrir dag, before day, Eg. 80; f. miðjan dag, Ld. 14; f. sól, before sunrise, 268; f. sólar-lag, before sunset; f. miðjan aptan, Nj. 192; f. náttmál, 197; f. óttu, Sighvat; f. þinglausnir, Ölk. 37; f. Jól, Nj. 269; f. fardaga, Grág. ii. 341; viku f. sumar, 244; f. mitt sumar, Nj. 138; litlu f. vetr, Eg. 159; f. vetrnætr, Grág. ii. 217; f. e-s minni, before one’s memory, Íb. 16.
    C. METAPH.:
    I. above, before; hann hafdi mest fyrir aðra konunga hraustleikinn, Fms. x. 372.
    II. for, on behalf of; vil ek bjóða at fara f. þik, I will go for thee, in thy stead, Nj. 77; ganga í skuld f. e-n, Grág. i. 283; Egill drakk … ok svá f. Ölvi, Eg. 210; kaupa e-t f. e-n, Nj. 157; gjalda gjöld f. e-n, Grág. i. 173; verja, sækja, sakir f. e-n, Eg. 504; hvárr f. sik, each for oneself, Dipl. v. 26; sættisk á öll mál f. Björn, Nj. 266; tók sættir f. Björn, Eg. 168; svara f. e-t, Fms. xi. 444; hafa til varnir f. sik, láta lýrit, lög-vörn koma f.; færa vörn f. sik, etc.; verja, sækja sakir f. sik, and many similar law phrases, Grág. passim; biðja konu f. e-n, to woo a lady for another, Fms. x. 44; fyrir mik, on my behalf, for my part, Gs. 16; lögvörn f. mál, a lawful defence for a case, Nj. 111; hafa til varnar f. sök, to defend a case, Grág. i. 61; halda skiladómi f. e-t, Dipl. iv. 8; festa lög f. e-t, vide festa.
    III. in a distributive sense; penning f. mann, a penny per man, K. Þ. K. 88; fyrir nef hvert, per nose = per head, Lv. 89, Fms. i. 153, Ó. H. 141; hve f. marga menn, for how many men, Grág. i. 296; fyrir hverja stiku, for each yard, 497.
    IV. for, for the benefit of; brjóta brauð f. hungraða, Hom. 75; þeir skáru f. þá melinn, they cut the straw for them (the horses), Nj. 265; leggja kostnað f. e-n, to defray one’s costs, Grág. i. 341.
    V. for, instead of; hann setti sik f. Guð, Edda (pref.); hafa e-n f. Guð (Lat. pro Deo), Stj. 73, Barl. 131; geta, fá, kveðja mann f. sik, to get a man as one’s delegate or substitute, Grág. i. 48 passim; þeir höfðu vargstakka f. brynjur, Fs. 17; manna-höfuð vóru f. kljána, Nj. 275; gagl f. gás ok grís f. gamalt svín, Ó. H. 86; rif stór f. hlunna, Háv. 48; buðkr er f. húslker er hafðr, Vm. 171; auga f. auga, tönn f. tönn, Exod. xxi. 24; skell f. skillinga, Þkv. 32.
    VI. because of, for; vilja Gunnar dauðan fyrir höggit, Nj. 92, Fms. v. 162; eigi f. sakleysi, not without ground, i. 302; fyrir hvat (why, for what) stefndi Gunnarr þeim til úhelgi? Nj. 101; ok urðu f. þat sekir, Landn. 323; hafa ámæli f. e-t, Nj. 65, passim.
    2. in a good sense, for one’s sake, for one; fyrir þín orð, for thy words, intercession, Ísl. ii. 217; vil ek göra f. þín orð, Ld. 158, Nj. 88; fyrir sína vinsæld, by his popularity, Fms. i. 259: the phrase, fyrir e-s sök, for one’s sake, vide sök: in swearing, a Latinism, fyrir trú mína, by my faith! (so in Old Engl. ‘fore God), Karl. 241; fyrir þitt líf, Stj. 514; ek særi þik f. alla krapta Krists ok manndóm þinn, Nj. 176. VII. for, at, denoting value, price; fyrir þrjár merkr, for three marks, Eg. 714; er sik leysti út f. þrjú hundruð marka, Fms. ix. 421; ganga f. hundrað, to pass or go for a hundred, D. I. i. 316:—also of the thing bought, þú skalt reiða f. hana þrjár merkr, thou shall pay for her three marks, Ld. 30; fyrir þik skulu koma mannhefndir, Nj. 57; bætr f. víg, Ísl. ii. 274; bætr f. mann, Eg. 259, passim; fyrir áverka Þorgeirs kom legorðs-sökin, Nj. 101:—so in the phrase, fyrir hvern mun, by all means, at any cost; fyrir öngan mun, by no means, Fms. i. 9, 157, Gþl. 531:—hafði hverr þeirra mann f. sik, eða tvá …, each slew a man or more for himself, i. e. they sold their lives dearly, Ó. H. 217.
    2. ellipt., í staðinn f., instead of, Grág. i. 61; hér vil ek bjóða f. góð boð, Nj. 77; taka umbun f., Fms. vii. 161; svara slíku f. sem …, Boll. 350; þér skulut öngu f. týna nema lífinu, you shall lose nothing less than your head, Nj. 7.
    VIII. by means of, by, through; fyrir þat sama orð, Stj.; fyrir sína náttúru, Fms. v. 162; fyrir messu-serkinn, iii. 168; fyrir þinn krapt ok frelsis-hönd, Pass. 19. 12; svikin f. orminn, by the serpent, Al. 63,—this use of fyrir seems to be a Latinism, but is very freq. in eccl. writings, esp. after the Reformation, N. T., Pass., Vídal.; fyrir munn Davíðs, through the mouth of David, etc.:—in good old historical writings such instances are few; þeir hlutuðu f. kast ( by dice), Sturl. ii. 159.
    IX. in spite of, against; fyrir vilja sinn, N. G. L. i. 151; fyrir vitorð eðr vilja e-s, against one’s will or knowledge, Grág. ii. 348; kvángask (giptask) f. ráð e-s, i. 177, 178, Þiðr. 190; nú fara menn f. bann ( in spite of an embargo) landa á milli, Gþl. 517; hann gaf henni líf f. framkvæmd farar, i. e. although she had not fulfilled her journey ( her vow), Fms. v. 223; fyrir várt lof, vi. 220; fyrir allt þat, in spite of all that, Grett. 80 new Ed.; fyrir ráð fram, heedlessly; fyrir lög fram, vide fram.
    X. denoting capacity, in the same sense as ‘at,’ C. II, p. 27, col. 1; scarcely found in old writers (who use ‘at’), but freq. in mod. usage, thus, eigi e-n f. vin, to have one for a friend, in old writers ‘at vin;’ hafa e-n f. fífl, fól, to make sport of one.
    2. in old writers some phrases come near to this, e. g. vita f. vist, to know for certain, Dipl. i. 3; vita f. full sannindi, id., ii. 16; hafa f. satt, to take for sooth, believe, Nj. 135; koma f. eitt, to come ( turn) all to one, Lv. 11, Nj. 91, Fms. i. 208; koma f. ekki, to come to naught, be of no avail, Ísl. ii. 215; fyrir hitt mun ganga, it will turn the other way, Nj. 93; fyrir hann er einskis örvænt orðs né verks, from him everything may be expected, Ísl. ii. 326; hafa e-s víti f. varnað, to have another’s faults for warning, Sól. 19.
    XI. joined with adverbs ending in -an, fyrir austan, vestan, sunnan, norðan, útan, innan, framan, handan, ofan, neðan, either with a following acc. denoting. direction, thus, fyrir austan, sunnan … fjall, east, south of the fell, i. e. on the eastern, southern side; fyrir neðan brú, below the bridge; fyrir útan fjall = Lat. ultra; fyrir innan fjall = Lat. infra; fyrir handan á, beyond the river; fyrir innan garð, inside the yard; fyrir ofan garð, above, beyond the yard, etc.; vide these adverbs:—used adverb., fyrir sunnan, in the south; fyrir vestan, in the west; fyrir norðan, in the north; fyrir austan, in the east,—current phrases in Icel. to mark the quarters of the country, cp. the ditty in Esp. Árb. year 1530; but not freq. in old writers, who simply say, norðr, suðr …, cp. Kristni S. ch. 1: absol. and adverb., fyrir ofan, uppermost; fyrir handan, on the other side:—fyrir útan e-t, except, save, Anal. 98, Vkv. 8; fyrir fram, vide fram.
    ☞ For- and fyrir- as prefixes, vide pp. 163–167 and below:
    I. fore-, for-, meaning before, above, in the widest sense, local, temp., and metaph. furthering or the like, for-dyri, for-nes, for-ellri, for-beini, etc.
    β. before, down, for-brekkis, -bergis, -streymis, -vindis, -viðris, etc.
    2. in an intens. sense = before others, very, but not freq.; for-dyld, -góðr, -hagr, -hraustr, -kostuligr, -kuðr, -lítill, -ljótr, -prís, -ríkr, -snjallr.
    II. (cp. fyrir, acc., C. IX), in a neg. or priv. sense; a few words occur even in the earliest poems, laws, and writers, e. g. for-að, -átta, -dæða, -nám, -næmi, -sending, -sköp, -verk, -veðja, -viða, -vitni, -ynja, -yrtir; those words at least seem to be original and vernacular: at a later time more words of the same kind crept in:
    1. as early as writers of the 13th and 14th centuries, e. g. for-boð, -bænir, -djarfa, -dæma (fyrir-dæma), -taka (fyrir-taka), -þóttr; fyrir-bjóða, -fara, -göra, -koma, -kunna, -líta, -muna, -mæla, -vega, -verða.
    2. introduced in some words at the time of the Reformation through Luther’s Bible and German hymns, and still later in many more through Danish, e. g. for-brjóta, -drífa, -láta, -líkast, -merkja, -nema, -sorga, -sóma, -standa, -svara, -þénusta, and several others; many of these, however, are not truly naturalised, being chiefly used in eccl. writings:—it is curious that if the pronoun be placed after the verb (which is the vernacular use in Icel.) the sense is in many cases reversed; thus, fyrir-koma, to destroy, but koma e-u fyrir can only mean to arrange; so also fyrir-mæla, to curse, and mæla fyrir, to speak for; for-bænir, but biðja fyrir e-m, etc.; in the latter case the sense is good and positive, in the former bad and negative; this seems to prove clearly that these compds are due to foreign influence.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > FYRIR

  • 10 महा _mahā

    1
    महा A cow.
    2
    महा The substitute of महत् at the beginning of Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhi compounds, and also at the beginning of some other irregular words. (Note: The number of compounds of which महा is the first mem- ber is very large, and may be multiplied ad infinitum. The more important of them, or such as have peculiar significations, are given below.)
    -Comp. -अक्षः an epithet of Śiva. ˚पटलिक a chief keeper of archives.
    -अङ्ग a. huge, bulky.
    -(ङ्गः) 1 a camel.
    -2 a kind of rat.
    -3 N. of Śiva.
    -अञ्जनः N. of a mountain.
    -अत्ययः a great danger or calamity.
    -अध्वनिक a. 'having gone a long way', dead.
    -अध्वरः a great sacrifice.
    -अनसम् 1 a heavy carriage.
    -2 cooking utensils. (
    -सी) a kitchen-maid. (
    -सः, -सम्) a kitchen; सूपानस्य करिष्यामि कुशलो$स्मि महानसे Mb.4.2.2.
    -अनिलः a whirl- wind; महानिलेनेव निदाघजं रजः Ki.14.59.
    -अनुभाव a.
    1 of great prowess, dignified, noble, glorious, magnanimous, exalted, illustrious; ग्रहीतुमार्यान् परिचर्यया मुहुर्महानु- भावा हि नितान्तमर्थिनः Śi.1.17; Ś.3.
    -2 virtuous, righteous, just.
    (-वः) 1 a worthy or respectable person.
    -2 (pl.) people of a religious sect in Mahārāṣtra founded by Chakradhara in the 13th century.
    -अन्तकः 1 death.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -अन्धकारः 1 thick darkness.
    -2 gross (spiritual) ignorance.
    -अन्ध्राः (pl.) N. of a people and their country.
    -अन्वय, -अभिजन a. nobly-born, of noble birth. (
    -यः, -नः) noble birth, high descent.
    -अभिषवः the great extraction of Soma.
    -अमात्यः the chief or prime minister (of a king).
    -अम्बुकः an epithet of Śiva.
    -अम्बुजम् a billion.
    -अम्ल a. very sour. (
    -म्लम्) the fruit of the tamarind tree. अरण्यम् a great (dreary) forest, large forest.
    -अर्घ a. very costly, costing a high price; महार्घस्तीर्थानामिव हि महतां को$प्यतिशयः U.6.11. (
    -र्घः) a kind of quail.
    -अर्घ्य a.
    1 valuable, precious.
    -2 invaluable; ines- timable; see महार्ह below.
    -अर्चिस् a. flaming high.
    -अर्णवः 1 the great ocean.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -अर्थ a.
    1 rich.
    -2 great, noble, dignified.
    -3 important, weighty.
    -4 significant.
    -अर्बुदम् one thousand millions.
    -अर्ह a.
    1 very valuable, very costly; महार्हशय्यापरिवर्तनच्युतैः स्वकेशपुष्पैरपि या स्म दूयते Ku.5.12.
    -2 invaluable, inestimable; महार्हशयनोपेत किं शेषे निहतो भुवि Rām.6.19. 2. (
    -र्हम्) white sandal-wood.
    -अवरोहः the fig-tree.
    -अशनिध्वजः a great banner in the form of the thunderbolt; जहार चान्येन मयूरपत्रिणा शरेण शक्रस्य महाशनि- ध्वजम् R.3.56.
    - अशन a. voracious, gluttonous; Mb. 4.
    -अश्मन् m. a precious stone, ruby.
    -अष्टमी the eighth day in the bright half of Āśvina sacred to Durgā; आश्विने शुक्लपक्षस्य भवेद् या तिथिरष्टमी । महाष्टमीति सा प्रोक्ता......
    -असिः a large sword.
    -असुरी N. of Durgā.
    -अह्नः the afternoon.
    -आकार a. extensive, large, great.
    -आचार्यः 1 a great teacher.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -आढ्य a. wealthy, very rich. (
    -ढ्यः) the Kadamba tree.
    -आत्मन् a.
    1 high-souled, high-minded, magnanimous, noble; अयं दुरात्मा अथवा महात्मा कौटिल्यः Mu.7; द्विषन्ति मन्दाश्चरितं महात्मनाम् Ku.5.75; U.1.49; प्रकृतिसिद्धमिदं हि महात्मनाम् Bh.1.63.
    -2 illustrious, distinguished, exalted, eminent; किमाचाराः किमाहाराः क्व च वासो महात्मनाम् Mb.3. 1.4.
    -3 mighty (महाबल); अथायमस्यां कृतवान् महात्मा लङ्केश्वरः कष्टमनार्यकर्म Rām.5.9.74. (-m.)
    1 the Supreme Spirit; युगपत्तु प्रलीयन्ते यदा तस्मिन् महात्मनि Ms.1.54.
    -2 the great principle, i. e. intellect of the Sāṅkhyas. (महात्मवत् means the same as महात्मन्).
    -आनकः a kind of large drum.
    -आनन्दः, -नन्दः 1 great joy or bliss.
    -2 espe- cially, the great bliss of final beatitude.
    (-न्दा) 1 spirituous liquor.
    -2 a festival on the ninth day in the bright half of Māgha.
    -आपगा a great river.
    -आयुधः an epithet of Śiva.
    -आरम्भ a. undertaking great works, enterprizing. (
    -म्भः) any great enterprize.
    -आलयः 1 a temple in general.
    -2 a sanctuary, an asylum.
    -3 a great dwelling.
    -4 a place of pilgrimage.
    -5 the world of Brahman.
    -6 the Supreme Spirit.
    -7 a tree &c. sacred to a deity.
    -8 N. of a particular dark fortnight.
    -9 पितृश्राद्ध in the month of Bhādra- pada. (
    -या) N. of a particular deity.
    - आशय a. high- souled, nobleminded, magnanimous, noble; दैवात् प्रबुद्धः शुश्राव वराहो हि महाशयः Ks; राजा हिरण्यगर्भो महाशयः H.4; see महात्मन्.
    (-यः) 1 a noble-minded or magnanimous person; महाशयचक्रवर्ती Bv.1.7.
    -2 the ocean.
    -आस्पद a.
    1 occupying a great position.
    -2 mighty, powerful.
    -आहवः a great or tumultuous fight.
    -इच्छ a.
    1 magnanimous, noble-minded, high-souled, noble; मही महेच्छः परिकीर्य सूनौ R.18.33.
    -2 having lofty aims or aspirations, ambitious; विद्यावतां महेच्छानां...... नाश्रयः पार्थिवं विना Pt.1.37.
    -इन्द्रः 1 'the great Indra', N. of Indra; इयं महेन्द्रप्रभृतीनधिश्रियः Ku.5.53; R.13.2; Ms.7.7.
    -2 a chief or leader in general.
    -3 N. of a mountain range; पतिर्महेन्द्रस्य महोदधेश्च R.6.54;4.39,43. ˚चापः rain-bow. ˚नगरी N. of Amarāvatī, the capital of Indra. ˚मन्त्रिन् m. an epithet of Bṛihaspati. ˚वाहः the elephant Airāvata; महेन्द्रवाहप्रतिमो महात्मा Mb.9.17.52.
    -इभ्य a. very rich.
    -इषुः a great archer; अधिरोहति गाण्डीवं महेषौ Ki.13.16.
    -इष्वासः a great archer, a great warrior; अत्र शूरा महेष्वासा भामार्जुनसमा युधि Bg.1.4.
    -ईशः, -ईशानः N. of Śiva; महेशस्त्वां धत्ते शिरसि रसराजस्य जयिनीम् Udb. ˚बन्धुः the Bilva tree.
    -ईशानी N. of Pārvatī.
    -ईश्वरः 1 a great lord, sovereign; महेश्वरस्त्र्यम्बक एव नापरः R.; गोप्तारं न निधीनां कथयन्ति महेश्वरं विबुधाः Pt.2.74.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -3 of Viṣṇu.
    -4 a god (opp. प्रकृति).
    -5 the Supreme Being (परमात्मा); मायां तु प्रकृतिं विद्यान्मायिनं तु महेश्वरम् Śvet. Up.4.1. ˚सखः N. of Kubera; यया कैलासभवने महेश्वरसखं बली Mb.9.11.55.
    (-री) 1 N. of Durgā.
    -2 a kind of bell-metal.
    -उक्षः (for उक्षन्) a large bull; a full grown or strong bull; महोक्षतां वत्सतरः स्पृशन्निव R.3.32;4.22;6.72; Śi.5.63.
    -उत्पलम् a large blue lotus. (
    -लः) the Sārasa bird.
    -उत्सवः 1 a great festival or occasion of joy; नयनविषयं जन्मन्येकः स एव महोत्सवः Māl.1.36.
    -2 the god of love.
    -उत्साह a. possessed of great energy, energetic, persevering; अहं च कर्णं जानामि...... सत्यसंधं महोत्साहं...... Mb.3.91.2.
    (-हः) 1 perseverance.
    -2 great pride; ये जात्यादिमहो- त्साहान्नरेन्द्रान्नोपयान्ति च । तेषामामरणं भिक्षा प्रायश्चितं विनिर्मितम् ॥ Pt.1.38.
    -उदधिः 1 the great ocean; महोदधेः पूर इवेन्दु- दर्शनात् R.3.17.
    -2 an epithet of Indra. ˚जः a conch- shell, shell.
    - उदय a. very prosperous or lucky, very glorious or splendid, of great prosperity.
    (-यः) 1 (a) great elevation or rise, greatness, prosperity; नन्दस्त्वतीन्द्रियं दृष्ट्वा लोकपालमहोदयम् Bhāg.1.28.1; अपवर्ग- महोदयार्थयोर्भुवमंशाविव धर्मयोर्गतौ R.8.16. (b) great fortune or good luck. (c) greatness, pre-eminence.
    -2 final beatitude.
    -3 a lord, master.
    -4 N. of the district called Kānyakubja or Kanouja; see App.
    -5 N. of the capital of Kanouja.
    -6 sour milk mixed with honey.
    -7 = महात्मन् q. v.; संसक्तौ किमसुलभं महोदयानाम Ki.7.27. ˚पर्वन् a time of union of the middle of श्रवण नक्षत्र and the end of व्यतिपात (generally in the month of माघ or पौष at the beginning of अमावास्या).
    - उदर a. big-bellied, corpulent.
    -(रम्) 1 a big belly.
    -2 dropsy.
    -उदार a.
    1 very generous or magnanimous.
    -2 mighty, powerful.
    -उद्यम a. = महोत्साह q. v; महोद्यमाः कर्म समा- रभन्ते.
    -उद्योग a. very industrious or diligent, hard- working.
    -उद्रेकः a particular measure (= 4 प्रस्थs).
    -उन्नत a. exceedingly lofty. (
    -तः) the palmyra tree.
    -उन्नतिः f. great rise or elevation (fig. also), high rank.
    -उपकारः a great obligation.
    -उपाध्यायः a great preceptor, a learned teacher.
    -उरगः a great serpent; वपुर्महोरगस्येव करालफणमण्डलम् R.12.98.
    -उरस्क a. broad-chested. (
    -स्कः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -उर्मिन् m. the ocean; ततः सागरमासाद्य कुक्षौ तस्य महोर्मिणः Mb.3.2.17.
    -उल्का 1 a great meteor.
    -2 a great fire-brand.
    -ऋत्विज् m. 'great priest', N. of the four chief sacri- ficial priests.
    -ऋद्धि a. very prosperous, opulent. (-f.) great prosperity or affluence.
    -ऋषभः a great bull.
    -ऋषिः 1 a great sage or saint; यस्मादृषिः परत्वेन महांस्त- स्मान्महर्षयः; (the term is applied in Ms.1.34 to the ten Prajāpatis or patriarchs of mankind, but it is also used in the general sense of 'a great sage').
    -2 N. of Sacute;iva.
    -3 of Buddha.
    -ओघ a. having a strong current.
    -घः a very large number; शतं खर्व- सहस्राणां समुद्रमभिधीयते । शतं समुद्रसाहस्रं महौघमिति विश्रुतम् ॥ Rām.6.28.37.
    -ओष्ठ (महोष्ठ) a. having large lips. (
    -ष्ठः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -ओजस् a. very mighty or powerful, possessed of great splendour or glory; महौजसा मानधना धनार्चिताः Ki.1.19. (-m.) a great hero or warrior, a champion. (-n.) great vigour.
    -ओजसम् the discus of Viṣṇu (सुदर्शन). (
    -सी) N. of plant (Mar. कांगणी).
    -ओदनी Asparagus Racemosus (Mar. शतावरी).
    -ओषधिः f.
    1 a very efficacious medicinal plant, a sovereign drug.
    -2 the Dūrvā grass.
    -3 N. of various plants ब्राह्मी, श्वेतकण्टकारी, कटुका, अतिविष &c. ˚गणः a collection of great or medicinal herbs:-- पृश्निपर्णी श्यामलता भृङ्गराजः शतावरी । गुड्चा सहदेवी च महौषधिगणः स्मृतः ॥ cf. also सहदेवी तथा व्याघ्री बला चातिबला त्वचा । शङ्खपुष्पी तथा सिंही अष्टमी च सुवर्चला ॥ महौषध्यष्टकं प्रोक्तं....
    -औषधम् 1 a sovereign remedy, panacea.
    -2 ginger.
    -3 garlic.
    -4 a kind of poison (वत्सनाभ).
    -कच्छः 1 the sea.
    -2 N. of Varuṇa.
    -3 a mountain.
    -कन्दः garlic.
    -कपर्दः a kind of shell.
    -कपित्थः 1 the Bilva tree.
    -2 red garlic.
    -कम्बु a. stark naked. (
    -म्बुः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -कर a.
    1 large-handed.
    -2 having a large revenue.
    -कर्णः an epithet of Śiva.
    -कर्मन् a. doing great works. (-m.) an epithet of Śiva.
    -कला the night of the new moon.
    -कल्पः a great cycle of time (1 years of Brahman); Bhāg.7.15.69.
    -कविः 1 a great poet, a classical poet, such as कालिदास, भवभूति, बाण, भारवि &c.
    -2 an epithet of Śukra.
    -कषायः N. of a plant (Mar. कायफळ).
    -कान्तः an epithet of Śiva. (
    -ता) the earth.
    -काय a. big-bodied, big, gigantic, bulky.
    (-यः) 1 an elephant.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -3 of Viṣṇu.
    -4 of a being attending on Śiva (= नन्दि).
    -कारुणिक a. exceedingly compassionate.
    -कार्तिकी the night of full-moon in the month of Kārtika.
    -कालः 1 a form of Śiva in his character as the destroyer of the world; महाकालं यजेद्देव्या दक्षिणे धूम्रवर्णकम् Kālītantram.
    -2 N. of a cele- brated shrine or temple of Śiva (Mahākāla) (one of the 12 celebrated Jyotirliṅgas) established at Ujjayinī (immortalized by Kālidāsa in his Meghadūta, which gives a very beautiful description of the god, his temple, worship &c., together with a graphic picture of the city; cf. Me.3-38; also R.6.34); महाकालनिवासिनं कालीविलासिनमनश्वरं महेश्वरं समाराध्य Dk.1.1.
    -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -4 N. of a kind of gourd.
    -5 N. of Śiva's servant (नन्दि). ˚पुरम् the city of Ujjayinī. ˚फलम् a red fruit with black seeds; पक्वं महाकालफलं किलासीत् N.22.29.
    -काली an epithet of Durgā in her terrific form.
    -काव्यम् a great or classical poem; (for a full description of its nature, contents &c., according to Rhetoricians see S. D.559). (The number of Mahākāvyas is usually said to be five:-- रघुवंश, कुमारसंभव, किरातार्जुनीय, शिशुपालवध and नैषधचरित or six, if मेघदूत-- a very small poem or खण़्डकाव्य-- be added to the list. But this enumeration is apparently only traditional, as there are several other poems, such as the भट्टिकाव्य, विक्रमाङ्कदेवचरित, हरविजय &c. which have an equal claim to be considered as Mahākāvyas).
    -कीर्तनम् a house.
    -कुमारः the eldest son of a reigning prince, heir-apparent.
    -कुल, -कुलीन a. of noble birth or descent, sprung from a noble family, nobly born. (
    -लम्) a noble birth or family, high descent.
    -कुहः a species of parasitical worm.
    -कृच्छ्रम् a great penance.
    -केतुः N. of Śiva.
    -केशः, -कोशः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 a large sheath.
    -क्रतुः a great sacrifice; e. g. a horse-sacrifice; तदङ्गमग्ऱ्यं मघवन् महाक्रतोरमुं तुरङ्गं प्रतिमोक्तुमर्हसि R.3.46.
    -क्रमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -क्रोधः an epithet of Śiva.
    -क्षत्रपः a great satrap.
    -क्षीरः sugar-cane.
    -क्षीरा f. a She-buffalo; Nighaṇṭaratnākara.
    -खर्वः, -र्वम् a high number (ten billions ?).
    -गजः a great elephant; see दिक्करिन्.
    -गणपतिः a form of the god Gaṇeśa.
    -गदः fever.
    -गन्ध a. exceedingly fragrant. (
    -न्धः) a kind of cane. (
    -न्धम्) a kind of sandal- wood. (
    -न्धा) N. of Chāmuṇḍā.
    -गर्तः, -गर्भः -गीतः N. of Śiva.
    -गर्दभगन्धिका N. of a plant, भारङ्गी.
    -गल a. longnecked.
    -गवः Bos gavaeus.
    -गुण a. very efficacious, sovereign (as a medicine); त्वया ममैष संबन्धः कपिमुख्य महागुणः Rām.5.1.12. (
    -णः) a chief quality, cardinal virtue.
    -गुरुः a highly respectable or venerable person; (these are three, the father, mother and preceptor; पिता माता तथाचार्यो महागुरुरिति स्मृतः).
    -गुल्मा the Soma plant.
    -गृष्टिः f. a cow with a large hump.
    -ग्रहः 1 an epithet of Rāhu.
    -2 the sun; महाग्रहग्राहविनष्टपङ्कः Rām.5.5.6.
    -ग्रामः N. of the ancient capital of Ceylon, the modern Māgama.
    -ग्रीवः 1 a camel.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -ग्रीविन् m. a camel.
    -घूर्णा spirituous liquor.
    -घृतम् ghee kept for a long time (for medicinal purposes).
    -घोष a. noisy, loud-sounding. (
    -षम्) a market, fair. (
    -षः) a loud noise, clamour.
    -चक्रम् the mystic circle in the शाक्त ceremonial.
    -चक्रवर्तिन् m. a universal monarch.
    -चण्डा N. of Chāmuṇḍā.
    -चपला a kind of metre.
    -चमूः f. a large army.
    -छायः the fig-tree.
    -जङ्घः a camel.
    -जटः an epithet of Śiva.
    -जटा 1 a great braid of hair.
    -2 the matted hair of Śiva.
    -जत्रु a. having a great collar-bone. (
    -त्रुः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -जनः 1 a multitude of men, a great many beings, the general populace or public; महाजनो येन गतः स पन्थाः Mb.3.313. 117; आगम्य तु ततो राजा विसृज्य च महाजनम् 6.98.25.
    -2 the populace, mob; विलोक्य वृद्धोक्षमधिष्ठितं त्वया महाजनः स्मेरमुखो भविष्यति Ku.5.7.
    -3 a great man, a distinguished or eminent man; महाजनस्य संसर्गः कस्य नोन्नतिकारकः । पद्मपत्रस्थितं तोयं धत्ते मुक्ताफलश्रियम् Pt.3.6.
    -4 the chief of a caste or trade.
    -5 a merchant, tradesman.
    -जवः an antelope.
    -जातीय a.
    1 rather large.
    -2 of an excellent kind.
    -जालिः, -ली N. of a plant (Mar. सोनामुखी)
    -जिह्वः an epithet of Śiva.
    -ज्ञानिन् m.
    1 a very learned man.
    -2 a great sage.
    -3 N. of Śiva.
    -ज्यैष्ठी the day of fullmoon in the month of Jyeṣṭha; ताभिर्दृश्यत एष यान् पथि महाज्यैष्ठीमहे मन्महे N.15.89; पूर्णिमा रविवारेण महाज्यैष्ठी प्रकीर्तिता Agni P.121.63.
    -ज्योतिस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -ज्वरः great affliction.
    -ज्वाल a. very brilliant or shining.
    (-लः) 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 a sacrificial fire.
    -डीनम् a kind of flight; 'यानं महाडीनमाहुः पवित्रामूर्जितां गतिम्' Mb.8.41.27 (com.).
    -तपस् m.
    1 a great ascetic.
    -2 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -तलम् N. of one of the seven lower regions; see पाताल.
    -तारा N. of a Buddhist goddess.
    -तिक्तः the Nimba tree.
    -तिथिः the 6th day of a lunation.
    -तीक्ष्ण a. exceedingly sharp or pungent. (
    -क्ष्णा) the marking- nut plant.
    -तेजस् a.
    1 possessed of great lustre or splendour.
    -2 very vigorous or powerful, heroic. (-m.)
    1 a hero, warrior.
    -2 fire.
    -3 an epithet of Kārtikeya. (-n.) quick-silver.
    -त्याग, -त्यागिन् a. very generous. (-m.) N. of Śiva.
    -दंष्ट्रः a species of big tiger.
    -दन्तः 1 an elephant with large tusks.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -दण्डः 1 a long arm.
    -2 a severe punishment.
    -दम्भः an epithet of Śiva.
    -दशा the influence exercised (over a man's destiny) by a predominant planet.
    -दानम् the gift of gold equal to one's own weight; अथातः संप्रवक्ष्यामि महादानस्य लक्षणम्.
    -दारु n. the devadāru tree.
    -दुर्गम् a great calamity; Pt.
    -दूषकः a kind of grain.
    -देवः N. of Śiva.
    (-वी) 1 N. of Pārvatī.
    -2 the chief queen.
    -द्रुमः the sacred fig-tree.
    -द्वारम् a large gate, the chief or outer gate of a temple.
    -धन a.
    1 rich.
    -2 expensive, costly; हेमदण्डैर्महाधनैः Rām.7. 77.13.
    (-नम्) 1 gold.
    -2 incense.
    -3 a costly or rich dress.
    -4 agriculture, husbandry.
    -5 anything costly or precious.
    -6 great booty.
    -7 a great battle (Ved.).
    -धनुस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -धातुः 1 gold.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -3 lymph.
    -4 N. of Meru.
    -धी a. having a great understanding.
    -धुर्यः a full-grown draught ox.
    -ध्वजः a camel.
    -ध्वनिक a. dead.
    -नग्नः an athlete; Buddh.
    -नटः an epithet of Śiva; महानटः किं नु...... तनोति...... साम्प्रतमङ्गहारम् N.22.7; महानटबाहुनेव बद्धभुजाङ्केन Vās.
    -नदः a great river.
    -नदी 1 a great river, such as Gaṅgā, Kṛiṣṇā; मन्दरः पर्वतश्चाक्षो जङ्घा तस्य महानदी Mb.8.34.2; संभूयाम्भोधिमभ्येति महानद्या नगापगा Śi.2.1.
    -2 N. of a river falling into the bay of Bengal.
    -नन्दा 1 spirituous liquor.
    -2 N. of a river.
    -3 ninth day of the bright half of the month of Māgha; माघमासस्य या शुक्ला नवमी लोकपूजिचा । महानन्देति सा प्रोक्ता....
    -नरकः N. of one of the 21 hells.
    -नलः a kind of reed.
    -नवमी the ninth day in the bright half of Āśvina, sacred to the worship of Durgā ततो$नु नवमी यस्मात् सा महानवमी स्मृता.
    -नाटकम् 'the great drama', N. of a drama, also called Hanumannāṭaka, (being popularly ascribed to Hanumat); thus defined by S. D.:-- एतदेव यदा सर्वैः पताकास्थानकैर्युतम् । अङ्कैश्च दशभिर्धीरा महानाटकमूचिरे ॥
    -नाडी sinew, tendon.
    -नादः 1 a loud sound, uproar.
    -2 a great drum.
    -3 a thunder-cloud.
    -4 a shell.
    -5 an elephant.
    -6 a lion.
    -7 the ear.
    -8 a camel.
    -9 an epithet of Śiva. (
    -दम्) a musical instrument.
    -नाम्नी 1 N. of a परिशिष्ट of Sāmaveda.
    -2 (pl.) N. of 9 verses of Sāmaveda beginning with विदा मघवन् विदा.
    -नायकः 1 a great gem in the centre of a string of pearls.
    -2 a great head or chief.
    -नासः an epithet of Śiva.
    -निद्र a. fast asleep. (
    -द्रा) 'the great sleep', death.
    -निम्नम् intestines, abdomen.
    -नियमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -निर्वाणम् total extinction of individuality (according to the Buddhists).
    -निशा 1 the dead of night, the second and third watches of the night; महानिशा तु विज्ञेया मध्यमं प्रहरद्वयम्
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -नीचः a washerman.
    -नील a. dark-blue. (
    -लः) a kind of sapphire or emerald; इन्द्रनीलमहानीलमणिप्रवरवेदिकम् Rām.5.9.16; महा- महानीलशिलारुचः Śi.1.16;4.44; R.18.42; Kau. A.2.11. 29. ˚उपलः a sapphire.
    -नृत्यः, -नेत्रः an epithet of Śiva.
    -नेमिः a crow.
    -न्यायः the chief rule.
    -पक्ष a.
    1 having many adherents.
    -2 having a large family or retinue; महापक्षे धनिन्यार्थे निक्षेपं निक्षिपेद् बुधः Ms.8.179.
    (-क्षः) 1 an epithet of Garuḍa.
    -2 a kind of duck. (
    -क्षी) an owl.
    -पङ्क्तिः, -पदपङ्क्तिः a kind of metre.
    -पञ्चमूलम् the five great roots:-- बिल्वो$ग्निमन्थः श्योनाकः काश्मरी पाटला तथा । सर्वैस्तु मिलितैरेतैः स्यान्महापञ्चमूलकम् ॥
    -पञ्चविषम् the five great or deadly poisons:-- शृङ्गी च कालकूटश्च मुस्तको वत्सनाभकः । शङ्खकर्णीति योगो$यं महापञ्चविषाभिधः ॥
    -पटः the skin.
    -पथः 1 chief road, principal street, high or main road; संतानकाकीर्णमहापथं तत् Ku.7.3.
    -2 the passage into the next world, i. e. death.
    -3 N. of certain mountain-tops from which devout persons used to throw themselves down to secure entrance into heaven.
    -4 an epithet of Śiva.
    -5 the long pilgrimage to mount Ke- dāra.
    -6 the way to heaven.
    -7 the knowledge of the essence of Śiva acquired in the pilgrimage to Kedāra.
    -पथिक a.
    1 undertaking great journeys.
    -2 one receiving Śulka (toll) on the high way; cf. Mb.12.76.6 (com. महापथिकः समुद्रे नौयानेन गच्छन् यद्वा महापथि शुल्कग्राहकः)
    -पद्मः 1 a particular high number.
    -2 N. of Nārada.
    -3 N. of one of the nine treasures of Kubera.
    -4 N. of the southernmost elephant supporting the world.
    -5 an epithet of Nanda.
    -6 a Kinnara attendant on Kubera.
    (-द्मम्) 1 a white lotus.
    -2 N. of a city. ˚पतिः N. of Nanda.
    -पराकः a. a particular penance; Hch.
    -पराङ्णः a late hour in the afternoon.
    -पवित्रः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -पशुः large cattle; महापशूनां हरणे... दण्डं प्रकल्पयेत् Ms.8.324.
    -पातः a long flight; Pt.2.58.
    -पातकम् 1 a great sin, a heinous crime; ब्रह्महत्या सुरापानं स्तेयं गुर्वङ्गनागमः । महान्ति पातकान्याहुस्तत्संसर्गश्च पञ्चमम् ॥ Ms.1154.
    -2 any great sin or transgression.
    -पात्रः a prime minister.
    -पादः an epithet of Śiva.
    -पाप्मन् a. very sinful or wicked.
    -पुराणम् N. of a Purāṇa; महापुराणं विज्ञेयमेकादशकलक्षणम् Brav. P.
    -पुंसः a great man.
    -पुरुषः 1 a great man, an eminent or distinguished personage; शब्दं महापुरुषसंविहितं निशम्य U. 6.7.
    -2 the Supreme Spirit.
    -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -पौरुषिकः a worshipper of Viṣṇu; तदहं ते$भिधास्यामि महापौरुषिको भवान् Bhāg.2.1.1.
    -पुष्पः a kind of worm.
    -पूजा great worship; any solemn worship performed on extraordinary occasions.
    -पृष्ठः a camel.
    -पोटगलः a kind of large reed.
    -प्रजापतिः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -प्रतीहारः a chief door-keeper.
    -प्रपञ्चः the great universe.
    -प्रभ a. of great lustre. (
    -भः) the light of a lamp.
    -प्रभुः 1 a great lord.
    -2 a king, sovereign.
    -3 a chief.
    -4 an epithet of Indra.
    -5 of Śiva
    -6 of Viṣṇu.
    -7 a great saint or holy man.
    -प्रलयः 'the great dissolution', the total annihilation of the universe at the end of the life of Brahman, when all the lokas with their inha- bitants, the gods, saints &c. including Brahman himself are annihilated; महाप्रलयमारुत...... Ve.3.4.
    -प्रश्नः a knotty question.
    -प्रसादः 1 a great favour.
    -2 a great present (of food offered to an idol); पादोदकं च निर्माल्यं नैवेद्यं च विशेषतः । महाप्रसाद इत्युक्त्वा ग्राह्यं विष्णोः प्रयत्नतः
    -प्रस्थानम् 1 departing this life, death.
    -2 setting out on a great journey for ending life; इहैव निधनं याम महाप्रस्थानमेव वा Rām.2.47.7 (com. महाप्रस्थानं मरणदीक्षा- पूर्वकमुत्तराभिमुखगमनम्); Mb.1.2.365.
    -प्राणः 1 the hard breathing or aspirate sound made in the pronunciation of the aspirates.
    -2 the aspirated letters themselves (pl.); they are:-- ख्, घ्, छ्, झ्, ठ्, ढ्, थ्, ध्, फ्, भ्, श्, ष्, स्, ह्.
    -3 a raven.
    -प्राणता possession of great strength or essence; अन्यांश्च जीवत एव महाप्राणतया स्फुरतो जग्राह K.
    -प्रेतः a noble departed spirit.
    -प्लवः a great flood, deluge;... क्षिप्तसागरमहाप्लवामयम् Śi.14.71.
    -फल a.
    1 bearing much fruit.
    -2 bringing much reward.
    (-ला) 1 a bitter gourd.
    -2 a kind of spear.
    (-लम्) 1 a great fruit or reward.
    -2 a testicle.
    -फेना the cuttle-fish bone.
    -बन्धः a peculiar position of hands or feet.
    -बभ्रुः a kind of animal living in holes.
    -बल a. very strong; नियुज्यमानो राज्याय नैच्छद्राज्यं महाबलः Rām
    (-लः) 1 wind, storm.
    -2 a Buddha.
    -3 a solid bamboo.
    -4 a palm.
    -5 a crocodile.
    -बला N. of a plant; महाबला च पीतपुष्पा सहदेवी च सा स्मृता Bhāva. P. (
    -लम्) lead. ˚ईश्वरः N. of a Liṅga of Śiva near the modern Mahābaleśwara.
    -बाध a. causing great pain or damage.
    -बाहु a. long-armed, powerful. (
    -हुः) an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -बि(वि)लम् 1 the atmosphere.
    -2 the heart.
    -3 a water-jar, pitcher.
    -4 a hole, cave.
    -बिसी a variety of skin (चर्म), a product of द्वादशग्राम in the Himālayas.
    -बी(वी)जः an epithet of Śiva.
    -बी (वी)ज्यम् the perinæum.
    -बुध्न a. having a great bottom or base (as a mountain).
    -बुशः barley.
    -बृहती a kind of metre.
    -बोधिः 1 the great intelligence of a Buddha.
    -2 a Buddha.
    -ब्रह्मम्, -ब्रह्मन् n. the Supreme Spirit.
    -ब्राह्मणः 1 a great or learned Brāhmaṇa.
    -2 a low or contemptible Brāhmaṇa.
    -भटः a great warrior; तदोजसा दैत्यमहाभटार्पितम् Bhāg.
    -भद्रा N. of the river Gaṅgā.
    -भाग a.
    1 very fortunate or blessed, very lucky or prosperous.
    -2 illustrious, distinguished, glo- rious; उभौ धर्मौ महाभागौ Mb.12.268.3; महाभागः कामं नरपतिरभिन्नस्थितिरसौ Ś.5.1; Ms.3.192.
    -3 very pure or holy, highly virtuous; पतिव्रता महाभागा कथं नु विचरिष्यति Mb.4.3.16.
    -भागता, -त्वम्, -भाग्यम् 1 extreme good fortune, great good luck, prosperity.
    -2 great excel- lence or merit.
    -भागवतम् the great Bhāgavata, one of the 18 Purāṇas. (
    -तः) a great worshipper of Viṣṇu.
    -भागिन् a. very fortunate or prosperous.
    -भाण्डम् a chief treasury.
    -भारतम् N. of the celebrated epic which describes the rivalries and contests of the sons of Dhṛitarāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu. (It consists of 18 Parvans or books, and is said to be the composition of Vyāsa; cf. the word भारत also); महत्त्वाद्भारतत्वाच्च महाभारतमुच्यते
    -भाष्यम् 1 a great commentary.
    -2 particularly, the great commentary of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini.
    -भासुरः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -भिक्षुः N. of Śākyamuni.
    -भीता a kind of sensitive plant (लाजाळू).
    -भीमः an epithet of king Śantanu.
    -भीरुः a sort of beetle or fly.
    -भुज a. long-armed, powerful.
    -भूतम् a great or primary element; see भूत; तस्यैतस्य महाभूतस्य निःश्वसितमेतद्यदृग्वेदः Up.; तं वेधा विदधे नूनं महाभूतसमाधिना R.1. 29; Ms.1.6.
    (-तः) 1 the Supreme Being.
    -2 a great creature.
    -भोगः 1 a great enjoyment.
    -2 a great coil or hood; great winding.
    -3 a serpent. (
    -गा) an epi- thet of Durgā.
    -मणिः 1 a costly or precious jewel; संस्कारोल्लिखितो महामणिरिव क्षीणो$पि नालक्ष्यते Ś.6.5.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -मति a.
    1 high-minded.
    -2 clever. (
    -तिः) N. of Bṛihaspati or Jupiter.
    -मत्स्यः a large fish, sea-monster.
    -मद a. greatly intoxicated. (
    -दः) an elephant in rut.
    -मनस्, -मनस्क a.
    1 high-minded, noble- minded, magnanimous; ततो युधिष्ठिरो राजा धर्मपुत्रो महामनाः Mb.4.1.7.
    -2 liberal.
    -3 proud, haughty. (-m) a fabulous animal called शरभ q. v.
    -मन्त्रः 1 any sacred text of the Vedas.
    -2 a great or efficacious charm, a powerful spell.
    -मन्त्रिन् m. the prime-minister, premier.
    -मयूरी N. of Buddhist goddess.
    -मलहारी a kind of Rāgiṇi.
    -महः a great festive procession; Sinhās.
    -महस् n. a great light (seen in the sky).
    -महोपाध्यायः 1 a very great preceptor.
    -2 a title given to learned men and reputed scholars; e. g. महामहो- पाध्यायमल्लिनाथसूरि &c.
    -मांसम् 'costly flesh', especially human flesh; न खलु महामांसविक्रयादन्यमुपायं पश्यामि Māl.4; अशस्त्रपूतं निर्व्याजं पुरुषाङ्गोपकल्पितम् । विक्रीयते महामांसं गृह्यतां गृह्यतामिदम् 5.12 (see Jagaddhara ad loc.).
    -माघी the full-moon day in the month of Māgha.
    -मात्र a.
    1 great in measure, very great or large.
    -2 most excellent, best; वृष्ण्यन्धकमहामात्रैः सह Mb.1.221.27; 5.22.37.
    (-त्रः) 1 a great officer of state, high state- official, a chief minister; (मन्त्रे कर्मणि भूषायां वित्ते माने परिच्छदे । मात्रा च महती येषां महामात्रास्तु ते स्मृताः); Ms. 9.259; गूढपुरुषप्रणिधिः कृतमहामात्रापसर्पः (v. l. महामात्यापसर्पः) पौरजानपदानपसर्पयेत् Kau. A.1.13.9; Rām.2.37.1.
    -2 an elephant-driver or keeper; मदोन्मत्तस्य भूपस्य कुञ्जरस्य च गच्छतः । उन्मार्गं वाच्यतां यान्ति महामात्राः समीपगाः ॥ Pt.1.161.
    -3 a superintendent of elephants.
    (-त्री) 1 the wife of a chief minister.
    -2 the wife of a spiritual teacher.
    -मानसी N. of a Jain goddess.
    -मान्य a. being in great honour with; मकरन्दतुन्दिलानामरविन्दानामयं महामान्यः Bv.1.6.
    -मायः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Viṣṇu.
    -माया 1 worldly illusion, which makes the material world appear really existent.
    -2 N. of Durgā; महामाया हरेश्चैषा यया संमोह्यते जगत् Devīmāhātmya.
    -मायूरम् a particular drug. (
    -री) N. of an amulet and a goddess; Buddh.
    -मारी 1 cholera, an epidemic.
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -मार्गः high road, main street. ˚पतिः a superintendent of roads.
    -मालः N. of Śiva.
    -माहेश्वरः a great worshipper of Maheśvara or Śiva.
    -मुखः a crocodile.
    -मुद्रा a parti- cular position of hands or feet (in practice of yoga).
    -मुनिः 1 a great sage.
    -2 N. of Vyāsa.
    -3 an epithet of Buddha.
    -4 of Agastya.
    -5 the coriander plant. (
    -नि n.)
    1 coriander seed.
    -2 any medicinal herb or drug.
    -मूर्तिः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -मूर्धन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -मूलम् a large radish. (
    -लः) a kind of onion.
    -मूल्य a. very costly. (
    -ल्यः) a ruby.
    -मृगः 1 any large animal.
    -2 an elephant,
    -3 the fabulous animal called शरभ.
    -मृत्युः, -मेधः N. of Śiva.
    -मृत्युंजयः a kind of drug.
    -मृधम् a great battle.
    -मेदः the coral tree; महामेदाभिधो ज्ञेयः Bhāva. P.
    -मेधा an epithet of Durgā.
    -मोहः great infatuation or confusion of mind. (ससर्ज) महामोहं च मोहं च तमश्चाज्ञानवृत्तयः Bhāg.3.12.2. (
    -हा) an epithet of Durgā.
    -यज्ञः 'a great sacrifice', a term applied to the five daily sacrifices or acts of piety to be performed by a house-holder; अध्यापनं ब्रह्मयज्ञः पितृयज्ञस्तु तर्पणम् । होमो दैवो (or देवयज्ञः) बलिर्भौतो (or भूतयज्ञः) नृयज्ञो$तिथिपूजनम् ॥ Ms.3.7,71, (for explanation, see the words s. v.).
    -2 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -यमकम् 'a great Yamaka', i. e. a stanza all the four lines of which have exactly the same words, though different in sense; e. g. see Ki.15.52, where विकाशमीयुर्जगतीशमार्गणाः has four different senses; cf. also बभौ मरुत्वान् विकृतः समुद्रः Bk.1.19.
    -यशस् a. very famous, renowned, celebrated.
    -यात्रा 'the great pilgrimage', the pilgrimage to Benares.
    -यानम् N. of the later system of Buddhist teaching, firstly promul- gated by Nāgārjuna (opp. हीनयान).
    -याम्यः an epi- thet of Viṣṇu.
    -युगम् 'a great Yuga', consisting of the four Yugas of mortals, or comprising 4,32, years of men.
    -योगिन् m.
    1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Viṣṇu.
    -3 a cock.
    -योनिः f. excessive dilation of the female organ.
    -रक्तम् coral.
    -रङ्गः a large stage.
    -रजतम् 1 gold; उच्चैर्महारजतराजिविराजितासौ Śi.4.28.
    -2 the thorn-apple.
    -रजनम् 1 safflower.
    -2 gold.
    -3 turmeric; तस्य हैतस्य पुरुषस्य रूपं यथा महारजनं वासः Bṛi. Up.2.3.6.
    -रत्नम् 1 a precious jewel; वज्रं मुक्ता प्रवालं च गोमेदश्चेन्द्रनीलकः ॥ वैडूर्यः पुष्करागश्च पाचिर्माणिक्यमेव च । महारत्नानि चैतानि नव प्रोक्तानि सूरिभिः ॥ Śukra.4.155-56.
    -रथः 1 a great chariot.
    -2 a great warrior or hero; द्रुपदश्च महारथः Bg.1.4; कुतः प्रभावो धनंजयस्य महारथजयद्रथस्य विपत्तिमुत्पादयितुम् Ve.2; दशरथः प्रशशास महारथः R.9.1; Śi.3.22; (a महारथ is thus defined:-- एको दशसहस्राणि योधयेद्यस्तु धन्विनाम् ॥ शस्त्रशास्त्र- प्रवीणश्च विज्ञेयः स महारथः ॥).
    -3 desire, longing; cf. मनोरथ.
    -रवः a frog.
    -रस a. very savoury.
    (-सः) 1 a sugar- cane.
    -2 quicksilver.
    -3 a precious mineral.
    -4 the fruit of the date tree.
    -5 any one of the eight substan- ces given below:-- दरदः पारदं शस्ये वैक्रान्तं कान्तमभ्रकम् । माक्षिकं विमलश्चेति स्युरेते$ष्टौ महारसाः ॥ (
    -सम्) sour ricewater.
    -राजः 1 a great king, sovereign or supreme ruler; पञ्चाशल्लक्षपर्यन्तो महाराजः प्रकीर्तितः Śukra.1.184.
    -2 a respect- ful mode of addressing kings or other great personages (my lord, your majesty, your highness); इति सत्यं महाराज बद्धो$स्म्यर्थेन कौरवैः Mb.
    -3 a deified Jaina teacher.
    -4 a fingernail. ˚अधिराजः a universal emperor, para- mount sovereign. ˚चूतः a kind of mango tree.
    -राजिकः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -राजिकाः (m. pl.) an epithet of a class of gods (said to be 22 or 236 in number.).
    -राज्यम् the rank or title of a reigning sovereign.
    -राज्ञी 1 the reigning or chief queen, principal wife of a king.
    -2 N. of Durgā.
    -रात्रम् midnight, dead of night.
    -रात्रिः, -त्री f.
    1 see महाप्रलय; ब्रह्मणश्च निपाते च महाकल्पो भवेन्नृप । प्रकीर्तिता महारात्रिः.
    -2 midnight.
    -3 the eighth night in the bright half of Āśvina.
    -राष्ट्रः 'the great kingdom', N. of a country in the west of India, the country of the Marāṭhās.
    -2 the people of Mahārāṣṭra; the Marāṭhās (pl.). (
    -ष्ट्री) N. of the principal Prākṛita; dialect, the language of the people of the Mahārāṣṭra; cf. Daṇḍin:-- महाराष्ट्राश्रयां भाषां प्रकृष्टं प्राकृतं विदुः Kāv.1.34.
    -रिष्टः a kind of Nimba tree growing on mountains.
    -रुज्, -ज a. very painful.
    -रुद्रः a form of Śiva.
    -रुरुः a species of antelope.
    -रूप a. mighty in form.
    (-पः) 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 resin.
    -रूपकम् a kind of drama.
    -रेतस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -रोगः a dangerous illness, grievous malady; (these are eight:-- उन्मादो राजयक्ष्मा च श्वासस्त्वग्दोष एव च । मधुमेहश्चाश्मरी च तथो- दरभगन्दरौ ॥).
    -रौद्र a. very dreadful. (
    -द्री) an epithet of Durgā.
    -रौरवः N. of one of the 21 hells; Ms.4.88-9.
    -लक्ष्मी 1 the great Lakṣmī, or Śakti of Nārāyaṇa; सेवे सैरिभमर्दिनीमिह महालक्ष्मीं सरोजस्थिताम्.
    -2 a young girl who represents the goddess Durgā at the Durgā festival.
    -लयः 1 a great world destruction.
    -2 the Supreme Being (महदादीनां लयो यस्मिन्).
    -लिङ्गम् the great Liṅga or Phallus. (
    -ङ्गः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -लोलः a crow.
    -लोहम् a magnet.
    -वंशः N. of a wellknown work in Pali (of the 5th century).
    -वक्षस् m. epithet of Śiva.
    -वनम् a large forest in Vṛindāvana.
    -वरा Dūrvā grass.
    -वराहः 'the great boar', an epithet of Viṣṇu in his third or boar incarnation.
    -वर्तनम् high wages;
    -वल्ली 1 the Mādhavī creeper.
    -2 a large creeping plant.
    -वसः the porpoise.
    -वसुः silver; Gīrvāṇa.
    -वाक्यम् 1 a long sentence.
    -2 any continuous composition or literary work.
    -3 a great proposition, principal sentence; such as तत्त्वमसि, ब्रह्मैवेदं सर्वम् &c.
    -4 a complete sentence (opp. अवान्तरवाक्य q. v.); न च महावाक्ये सति अवान्तरवाक्यं प्रमाणं भवति ŚB. on MS.6.4.25.
    -वातः a stormy wind, violent wind; महावाता<?>तैर्महिषकुलनीलैर्जलधरैः Mk.5.22.
    -वादिन् m. a great or powerful disputant.
    -वायुः 1 air (as an element).
    -2 stormy wind, hur- ricane, tempest.
    -वार्तिकम् N. of the Vārtikas of Kātyāyana on Pāṇini's Sūtras.
    -विडम् a kind of factitious salt.
    -विदेहा N. of a certain वृत्ति or condition of the mind in the Yoga system of philosophy.
    -विद्या the great lores; काली तारा महाविद्या षोडशी भुवनेश्वरी । भैरवी छिन्नमस्ता च विद्या धूमवती तथा । बगला सिद्धविद्या च मातङ्गी कमला- त्मिका । एता दश महाविद्याः... ॥
    -विपुला a kind of metre.
    -विभाषा a rule giving a general option or alternative; इति महाविभाषया साधुः.
    -विभूतिः an epithet of Śiva.
    -विषः a serpent having two mouths.
    -विषुवम् the vernal equinox. ˚संक्रान्तिः f. the vernal equinox (the sun's entering the sign Aries).
    -विस्तर a. very extensive or copious.
    -वीचिः N. of a hell.
    -वीरः 1 a great hero or warrior.
    -2 a lion.
    -3 the thunderbolt of Indra.
    -4 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -5 of Garuḍa.
    -6 of Hanumat.
    -7 a cuckoo.
    -8 a white horse.
    -9 a sacrificial fire.
    -1 a sacrificial vessel.
    -11 a kind of hawk. ˚चरितम् N. of a celebrated drama by Bhavabhūti.
    -वीर्य a. of great valour, very powerful.
    (-र्यः) 1 N. of Brah- man.
    -2 the Supreme Being. (
    -र्या) the wild cotton shrub.
    -2 an epithet of संज्ञा, the wife of the sun.
    -वृषः a great bull.
    -वेग a.
    1 very swift or fleet.
    (-गः) 1 great speed, excessive velocity.
    -2 an ape.
    -3 the bird Garuḍa.
    -वेघः a particular position of hands or feet (in the practice of Yoga).
    -वेल a. billowy.
    -व्याधिः f.
    1 a great disease.
    -2 a very bad kind of leprosy (black leprosy).
    -व्याहृतिः f. a great mystical word, i. e. भूर्, भुवस् and स्वर्.
    -व्रत a. very devotional, rigidly observing vows.
    (-तम्) 1 a great vow, a great reli- gious observance; a vow for not taking even water for a month; महाव्रतं चरेद्यस्तु Mb.12.35.22 (com. महाव्रतं मासमात्रं जलस्यापि त्यागः).
    -2 any great or funda- mental duty; प्राणैरपि हिता वृत्तिरद्रोहो व्याजवर्जनम् । आत्मनीव प्रियाधानमेतन्मैत्रीमहाव्रतम् Mv.5.59; क्रतौ महाव्रते पश्यन् ब्रह्मचारी- त्वरीरतम् N.17.23.
    -व्रतिन् m.
    1 a devotee, an ascetic.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -शक्तिः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Kārtikeya.
    -शङ्कुः the sine of the sun's eleva- tion.
    -शङ्खः 1 a great conch-shell; पौण्ड्रं दध्मौ महाशङ्खं Bg.1.15; महाशङ्खमयी माला ताराविद्याजपे प्रिया Tantra.
    -2 the temporal bone, forehead.
    -3 a human bone.
    -4 a particular high number.
    -5 one of Kubera's treasures.
    -शठः a kind of thorn-apple.
    -शब्द a. making a loud sound, very noisy, boisterous.
    -शल्कः a kind of sea- crab or prawn; Ms.3.272.
    -शालः a great householder.
    -शालिः a kind of large and sweetsmelling rice.
    -शाल्वणम् ('great fomentation') N. of a remedy; Suśr.
    -शासन a.
    1 exercising great power.
    -2 whose commands are great; त्रैलोक्यघिपतित्वमेव विरसं यस्मिन् महा- शासने Bh.3.8.
    (-नम्) 1 the knowledge of Brahma as expounded in the Upaniṣadas.
    -2 great order of government.
    -शिरस् m. a kind of serpent.
    -शिवरात्रिः N. of a festival on the 14th day of the dark half of Māgha,
    -शुक्तिः f. a pearl-shell.
    -शुक्ला an epithet of Sarasvatī.
    -शुभ्रम् silver.
    -शूद्रः (-द्री f.)
    1 a Sūdra in a high position.
    -2 a cowherd.
    -3 an upper servant. (
    -द्री) a female cow-keeper. (
    -द्रा) a Śudra woman in a high position.
    -शून्यम् a particular mental condi- tion of a Yogin.
    -शृङ्गः 1 a species of stag.
    -2 the शरभ animal.
    -श्मशानम् an epithet of Benares.
    -श्यामा the Sissoo tree. (Mar. शिसवी).
    -श्रमणः 1 an epithet of Buddha.
    -2 a Jain monk.
    -श्लक्ष्णा sand.
    -श्वासः a kind of asthma.
    -श्वेता 1 an epithet of Sarasvatī.
    -2 of Durgā.
    -3 white sugar.
    -संहिता great combi- nation.
    -संक्रान्तिः f. the winter solstice.
    -सती a very chaste woman.
    -सत्ता absolute existence.
    -सत्यः an epithet of Yama.
    -सत्त्व a.
    1 noble.
    -2 very strong or powerful.
    -3 just, righteous.
    (-त्त्वः) 1 a large animal.
    -2 N. of Sākyamuni.
    -3 an epithet of Kubera.
    -संधिविग्रहः the office of the minister of peace and war.
    -सन्नः an epithet of Kubera.
    -सन्निः m. (in music) a kind of measure.
    -समुद्रः the great ocean.
    -सर्गः a great or completely new creation (after a complete destruction of the world).
    -सर्जः the bread- fruit or jack-tree.
    -साधनभागः a great executive officer.
    -सांतपनः a kind of very rigid penance; see Ms.11. 218.
    -सांधिविग्रहिकः a minister of peace and war.
    -सामन्तः a great vassal.
    -सामान्यम् the widest genera- lity.
    -सारः a kind of Khadira tree.
    -सारथिः an epithet of Aruṇa.
    -साहसम् great violence or outrage, great audacity.
    -साहसिकः a dacoit, highwayman, a daring robber.
    -सिंहः the fabulous animal called Śarabha.
    -सिद्धिः f. a kind of magical power.
    -सुखम् 1 great pleasure.
    -2 copulation. (
    -खः) a Buddha.
    -सुगन्धम् a fragrant unguent.
    -सुगन्धिः a kind of antidote.
    -सुधा silver; Gīrvāṇa.
    -सुभिक्षम् good times.
    -सूक्तः the composer of the great Sūktas or hymns of the 1th Maṇḍala of the Ṛigveda.
    -सूक्ष्मा sand.
    -सूतः a mili- tary drum.
    -सेनः 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya; महासेन- प्रसूतिं तद्ययौ शरवणं महत् Rām.7.16.1.
    -2 the commander of a large army. (
    -ना) a great army.
    -स्कन्धः a camel.
    -स्थली the earth.
    -स्थानम् a great position.
    -स्नेहः a combination of the 4 kinds of fat.
    -स्मृतिः the Ṣaḍaṅgas and Smṛitis; महास्मृतिं पठेद्यस्तु तथैवानुस्मृतिं शुभाम् Mb.12.2.3.
    -स्रोतस् n. the bowels.
    -स्रग्विन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -स्वनः a kind of drum.
    -हंसः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -हविस् n. clarified butter.
    -हस्तः an epithet of Śiva.
    -हासः a loud or boisterous laughter, cachinnation.
    -हिमवत् m. N. of a mountain.
    -ह्रस्वा N. of a plant (Mar. कुहिली).

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > महा _mahā

  • 11 AF

    of
    * * *
    prep. w. dat.
    I. Of place:
    1) off, from;
    G. hljóp af hesti sínum, G. jumped off his horse;
    ganga af mótinu, to go away from the meeting;
    Flosi kastaði af sér skikkjunni, threw off his cloak;
    Gizzur gekk af útsuðri at gerðinu, from the south-west;
    hann hafði leyst af sér skúa sína, he had taken off his shoes;
    Steinarr vildi slíta hann af sér, throw him off;
    tók Gísli þá af sér vápnin, took off his arms;
    bréf af Magnúsi konungi, a letter from king Magnus;
    hverr af öðrum, one after another, in succession;
    vil ek þú vinnir af þér skuldina, work off the debt;
    muntu enga sætt af mér fá, no peace at my hand;
    rísa af dauða, to rise from the dead;
    vakna af draumi, to awaken from a dream;
    lúka upp af hrossi, to open a gate from off a horse;
    vindr stóð af landi, the wind blew from the land;
    2) out of;
    verða tekinn af heimi, to be taken out of the world;
    gruflar hón af læknum, she scrambles out of the brook;
    Otradalr var mjök af vegi, far out of the way.
    Connected with út; föstudaginn fór út herrinn af borginni, marched out of the town.
    II. Of time; past, beyond:
    af ómagaaldri, able to support oneself, of age;
    ek em nú af léttasta skeiði, no longer in the prime of life;
    þá er sjau vikur eru af sumri, when seven weeks of summer are past;
    var mikit af nótt, much of the night was past.
    III. In various other relations:
    1) þiggja lið af e-m, to receive help from one;
    hafa umboð af e-m, to be another’s deputy;
    vera góðs (ills) maklegr af e-m, to deserve good (bad) of one;
    féll þar lið mart af Eyvindi, many of Eyvind’s men fell there;
    þá eru þeir útlagir ok af goðorði sínu, have forfeited their goðorð;
    þá skalt þú af allri fjárheimtunni, forfeit all the claim;
    ek skal stefna þér af konunni, summon thee to give up;
    2) off, of;
    höggva fót, hönd, af e-m, to cut off one’s foot, hand;
    vil ek, at þú takir slíkt sem þér líkar af varningi, whatever you like of the stores;
    þar lá forkr einn ok brotit af endanum, with the point broken off;
    absol., beit hann höndina af, bit the hand off;
    fauk af höfuðit, the head flew off;
    3) of, among;
    hinn efniligasti maðr af ungum mönnum, the most promising of the young men;
    4) with;
    hláða, (ferma) skip af e-u, to load (freight) a ship with;
    fylla heiminn af sínu kyni, to fill the world with his offspring;
    5) of (= ór which is more frequent);
    húsit var gert af timbr stokkum, was built of trunks of trees;
    6) fig., eigi vita menn hvat af honum er orðit, what has become of him;
    hvat hefir þú gert af Gunnari, what hast thou done with Gunnar?;
    7) denoting parentage, descent, origin;
    ok eru af þeim komnir Gilsbekkingar, are descended from them;
    kominn af Trójumönnum, descended from the Trojans;
    8) by, of (after passive);
    ek em sendr hingat af Starkaði, sent hither by;
    ástsæll af landsmónnum, beloved of;
    9) on account of, by reason of, by;
    úbygðr at frosti ok kulda, because of frost and cold;
    ómáli af áverkum, speechless from wounds;
    af ástæld hans, by his popularity;
    af því, therefore;
    af hví, wherefor why;
    af því at, because;
    10) by means of, by;
    framfœra e-n af verkum sínum, by means of his own labour;
    af sínu fé, by one’s own means;
    absol., hann fekk af hina mestu sœmd, derived great honour from it;
    11) with adjectives, in regard to;
    mildr af fé, liberal of money;
    góðr af griðum, merciful;
    12) used absol. with a verb, off away;
    hann bað hann þá róa af fjörðinn, to row the firth off;
    ok er þeir höfðu af fjörðung, when they had covered one forth of the way;
    sofa af nóttina, to sleep the night away.
    * * *
    prep. often used elliptically by dropping the case, or even merely adverbially, [Ulf. af; A. S. and Engl. of, off; Hel. ab; Germ. ab; Gr. άπό; Lat. a, ab.] With dat. denoting a motion a loco; one of the three prepp. af, ór, frá, corresponding to those in loco—á, í, við, and ad locum—á, í, at. It in general corresponds to the prepp. in loco—á, or in locum— til, whilst ór answers more to í; but it also frequently corresponds to yfir, um or í. It ranges between ór and frá, generally denoting the idea from the surface of, while ór means from the inner part, and frá from the outer part or border. The motion from a hill, plain, open place is thus denoted by af; by ór that from an enclosed space, depth, cavity, thus af fjalli, but ór of a valley, dale; af Englandi, but ór Danmörk, as mörk implies the notion of a deep wood, forest. The wind blows af landi, but a ship sets sail frá landi; frá landi also means a distance from: af hendi, of a glove, ring; ór hendi, of whatever has been kept in the hand (correl. to á hendi and í hendi). On the other hand af is more general, whilst frá and ór are of a more special character; frá denoting a departure, ór an impulse or force; a member goes home af þingi, whereas ór may denote an inmate of a district, or convey the notion of secession or exclusion from, Eb. 105 new Ed.; the traveller goes af landi, the exile ór landi: taka e-t af e-m is to take a thing out of one’s hand, that of taka frá e-m to remove out of one’s sight, etc. In general af answers to Engl. of, off, ór to out of, and frá to from: the Lat. prepp. ab, de, and ex do not exactly correspond to the Icelandic, yet as a rule ór may answer to ex, af sometimes to ab, sometimes to de. Of, off, from among; with, by; on account of by means of, because of concerning, in respect of.
    A. Loc.
    I. With motion, off, from:
    1. prop. corresp. to á,
    α. konungr dró gullhring af hendi sér (but á hendi), Ld. 32; Höskuldr lætr bera farm af skipi, unload the ship (but bera farm á skip), id.; var tekit af hestum þeirra, they were unsaddled, Nj. 4; Gunnarr hafði farit heiman af bæ sínum, he was away from home, 82; Gunnarr hljóp af hesti sínum, jumped off his horse (but hl. á hest), 83; hlaupa, stökkva af baki, id., 112, 264 ; Gunnarr skýtr til hans af boganum, from the bow, where af has a slight notion of instrumentality, 96; flýja af fundinum, to fly from off the battle-field, 102; ríða af Þríhyrningshálsum, 206; út af Langaholti, Eg. 744 ; sunnan ór Danmörk ok af Saxlandi, 560; ganga af mótinu, to go from the meeting, Fms. vii. 130; af þeirra fundi reis María upp ok fór, 625. 85 ; Flosi kastaði af ser skikkjunni, threw his cloak off him (but kasta á sik),Nj. 176; taka Hrungnis fót af honum, of a load, burden, Edda 58; land þat er hann fiskði af, from which he set off to fish, Grág. i. 151, is irregular, frá would suit better; slíta af baki e-s, from off one’s back, ii. 9 ; bera af borði, to clear the table, Nj. 75.
    β. where it more nearly answers to í; þeir koma af hafi, of sailors coming in (but leggja í haf), Nj. 128 ; fara til Noregs af Orkneyjum (but í or til O.), 131; þeim Agli fórst vel ok komu af hafi i Borgarfjörð, Eg. 392 ; hann var útlagi ( outlawed) af Noregi, where ór would be more regular, 344; af Islandi, of a traveller, Fms. x. 3; búa her af báðum ríkjunum, to take a levy from, 51; hinir beztu bændr ór Norðlendingafjórðungi ok af Sunnlendingafjórðungi, the most eminent Southerners and Northerners, 113; Gizzurr gékk af útsuðri at gerðinu, from south-west, Sturl. ii. 219; prestar af hvárutveggja biskupsdæmi, from either diocess, Dipl. ii. 11; verða tekinn af heimi, to be taken out of the world, 623. 21; gruflar hon af læknum, scrambles out of the brook, Ísl. ii. 340; Egill kneyfði af horninu í einum drykk, drained off the horn at one draught, literally squeezed every drop out of it, Eg. 557; brottuaf herbúðunurn, Fms. x. 343.
    γ. of things more or less surrounding the subject, corresp. to yfir or um; láta þeir þegar af sér tjöldin, break off, take down the tents in preparing for battle, Eg. 261; kyrtillinn rifnaði af honum, his coat burst, caused by the swollen body, 602; hann hafði leyst af sér skúa sína, he untied his shoes (but binda á sik), 716; Steinarr vildi slíta hann af sér, throw him off, of one clinging to one’s body, 747; tók Gísli þá af sér vápnin, took off his arms, Fms. vii. 39. Of putting off clothes; fara af kápu, Nj. 143; far þú eigi af brynjunni, Bs. i. 541; þá ætlaði Sigurðr at fara af brynjunni, id.; þá var Skarphéðinn flettr af klæðunum, Nj. 209: now more usually fara or klæðum, fötum, exuere, to undress.
    δ. connected with út; föstudaginn for út herrinn af borginni, marched out of the town, Nj. 274; ganga út af kirkjunni, to go out of the church, now út úr, Fms. vii. 107: drekki hann af þeirri jörðunni, of something impregnated with the earth, Laekn. 402.
    ε. more closely corresponding to frá, being in such cases a Latinism (now frá); bréf af páfa, a pope’s bull, Fms. x. 6; rit af hánum, letter from him, 623. 52; bréf af Magnúsi konungi, a letter from king Magnus, Bs. i. 712; farið þér á brautu af mér í eilífan eld, Hom. 143; brott af drottins augliti, Stj. 43.
    ζ. denoting an uninterrupted continuity, in such phrases as land aflandi, from land to land, Eg. 343, Fas. ii. 539; skip af skipl. from ship to ship, Fms. v. 10; brann hvat af öðru, one after another, of an increasing fire, destroying everything, i. 128; brandr af brandi brenn, funi kveykist af funa, one from another, Hm. 56; hverr af öðrum, one after another, in succession, also hverr at öðrum, Eb. 272, 280 (where at in both passages).
    2. metaph., at ganga af e-m dauðum, to go from, leave one dead on the spot, of two combatants; en hann segiz bani hins ef hann gekk af dauðum manni, Grág. ii. 88, Hkr. 1. 327; undr þykir mér er bróðir þinn vildi eigi taka af þér starf þetta, would not take this toil from thee, Nj. 77; þegnar hans glöddust af honum, were fain of him, Fms. x. 380; at koma þeim manni af sér er settr var á fé hans, to get rid of, Ld. 52; vil ek þú vinriir af þér skuldina, work off the debt, Njarð. 366; reka af sér, to repel, Sturl. ii. 219; hann á þá sonu er aldri munu af oss ganga, who will never leave us, whom we shall never get rid of, Fas. i. 280; leysa e-n af e-u, to relieve, 64; taka e-n af lífi, to kill, Eg. 48, 416, Nj. 126; af lífdögum, Fms. vii. 204; ek mun ná lögum af því máli, get the benefit of the law in this case, Eg. 468; muntu enga sætt af mér fá, no peace at my hand, 414; rísa af dauða, to rise from death, Fms. ii. 142; guð bætti honum þó af þessi sótt, healed him of this sickness, ix. 390; vakna af sýn, draumi, svefni, to awaken from a vision, dream, sleep, 655 xxxii. I, Gísl. 24, Eb. 192, Fas. i. 41. Rather with the notion out of, in the phrase af sér etc., e. g. sýna e-t af scr, to shew, exhibit a disposition for or against, Ld. 18; gera mikit af sér, to shew great prowess, Ísl. ii. 368; éf þú gerir eigi meira af þér um aðra leika, unless you make more of thyself, Edda 32; Svipdagr hafði mikit af sér gert, fought bravely, Fas. i. 41; góðr (illr) af sér, good ( bad) of oneself, by nature; mikill af sjálfum sér, proud, bold, stout, Nj. 15; ágætastr maðr af sjálfum sér, the greatest hero, Bret.: góðr af ser, excellent, Hrafn. 7; but, on the contrary, af sér kominn, ruinous, in decay; this phrase is used of old houses or buildings, as in Bs. i. 488 = Sturl. l. c.; af sér kominn af mæði can also be said of a man fallen off from what he used to be; kominn af fotum fram, off his legs from age, Sturl. i. 223, Korm. 154 (in a verse).
    II. WITHOUT MOTION:
    1. denoting direction from, but at the same time continuous connection with an object from which an act or thing proceeds, from; tengja skip hvárt fram af stafni annars, to tie the ships in a line, stem to stern, Fms. i. 157, xi. 111; svá at þeir tóku út af borðum, jutted out of the boards, of rafters or poles, iv. 49; stjarna ok af sem skaft, of a comet, ix. 482; lúka upp af hrossi, to open a gate from off a horse, Grág. ii. 264; hon svarar af sínu sæti sem álpt af baru, Fás. i. 186; þar er sjá mátti utau af firði, af þjóðleið, that might be seen from the fareway on the sea when sailing in the firth, Hkr. ii. 64; þá mun hringt af (better at) Burakirkju, of bells rung at the church, Fms. xi. 160; gengr þar af Meðalfellsströnd, projects from, juts out, of a promontory, Ld. 10.
    2. denoting direction alone; upp af víkinni stóð borg mikil, a burg inland from the inlet, Eg. 161; lokrekkja innar af seti, a shut bed inward from the benches in the hall, Ísl. ii. 262; kapella upp af konungs herbergjum, upwards from, Fms. x. 153; vindr stóð af landi, the wind stood off the land, Bárð. 166.
    β. metaph., stauda af e-u, vide VI. 4.
    γ. ellipt., hallaði af norðr, of the channel, north of a spot, Boll. 348; also, austr af, suðr af, vestr af, etc.
    3. denoting absence; þingheyendr skulu eigi vera um nótt af þingi ( away from the meeting), eðr lengr, þá eru þeir af þingi ( away from (be meeting) ef þeir eru or ( out of) þingmarki, Grág. i. 25; vera um nótt af várþingi, 115; meðan hann er af landi héðan, abroad, 150.
    β. metaph., gud hvíldi af öllum verkum sínum á sjaunda degi, rested from his labours, Ver. 3.
    4. denoting distance; þat er komit af þjóðleið, out of the high road, remote, Eg. 369; af þjóðbraut, Grág. ii. 264, i. 15; Otradalr (a farm) var mjök af vegi, far out of the way, Háv. 53.
    B. TEMP, past, from, out of, beyond:
    1. of a person’s age, in the sense of having past a period of life; af ómaga aldri, of age, able to support oneself, Grág. i. 243; af aeskualdri, stricken in years, having past the prime of life, Eg. 202; lítið af barnsaldri, still a child, Ld. 74; ek em nú af léttasia skeiði, no longer in the prime of life, Háv. 40.
    2. of a part or period of time, past; eigi síðar en nótt er af þingi, a night of the session past, Grág. i. 101; þá er sjau vikur eru af sumri, seven weeks past of the summer, 182; tíu vikur af sumri, Íb. 10; var mikit af nótt, much of the night was past, Háv. 41; mikið af vetri, much of the winter was past, Fas. ii. 186; þriðjungr af nótt, a third of the night past, Fms. x. 160; stund af degi, etc.; tveir mánoðr af sumri, Gþl. 103.
    3. in adverbial phrases such as, af stundu, soon; af bragði, at once; af tómi, at leisure, at ease; af nýju, again; af skyndingu, speedily; af bráðungu, in a hurry, etc.
    C. In various other relations:
    I. denoting the passage or transition of an object, concrete or abstract, of, from.
    1. where a thing is received, derived from, conferred by a person or object; þiggja lið af e-m, to derive help from, Edda 26; taka traust af e-m, to receive support, comfort from, Fms. xi. 243; taka mála af e-m, to be in one’s pay, of a soldier, Eg. 266; halda land af e-m, to hold land of any one, 282; verða viss af e-m, to get information from, 57, Nj. 130; taka við sök af manni (a law term), to undertake a case, suit, Grág. i. 142; hafa umboð af e-m, to be another’s deputy, ii. 374; vera góðs (ills) maklegr af e-m, to deserve good (bad) of, Vd. 88 (old Ed., the new reads frá), Fs. 45; afla matar af eyjum, to derive supplies from, Eb. 12.
    2. where an object is taken by force:
    α. prop. out of a person’s hand; þú skalt hnykkja smíðit af honum, wrest it out of his hand, Nj. 32; cp. taka, þrífa, svipta e-u (e-t) af e-m, to wrest from.
    β. metaph. of a person’s deprival of anything in general; hann tók af þér konuna, carried thy wife off, Nj. 33; tók Gunnarr af þér sáðland þitt, robbed thee of seedland, 103; taka af honum tignina, to depose, degrade him, Eg. 271; vinna e-t af e-m, to carry off by force of arms, conquer, Fms. iii. 29; drepa menn af e-m, for one, slay one’s man, Eg. 417; fell þar lið mart af Eyvindi, many of Eyvind’s people fell there, 261.
    γ. in such phrases as, hyggja af e-u (v. afhuga), hugsa af e-u, to forget; hyggja af harmi; sjá af e-u, to lose, miss; var svá ástúðigt með þeim, at livargi þóttist mega af öðrum sjá, neither of them could take his eyes off the other, Sturl. i. 194; svá er mörg við ver sinn vær, at varla um sér hon af hoiuun nær, Skálda 163.
    3. denoting forfeiture; þá eru þeir útlagir, ok af goðorði sínu, have forfeited their priesthood, Grág. i. 24; telja hann af ráðunum fjár síns alls, to oust one, on account of idiocy or madness, 176; verða af kaupi, to be off the bargain, Edda 26; þá skalt þú af allri fjárheimtunni, forfeit all the claim, Nj. 15; ek skal stefna þér af konunni, summon thee to forfeit, a case of divorce, id.; ella er hann af rettarfari um hana, has forfeited the suit, Grág. i. 381.
    β. ellipt., af ferr eindagi ef, is forfeited, Grág. i. 140.
    II. denoting relation of a part to a whole, off, of, Lat. de; höggva hönd, höfuð, fót af e-um, to cut one’s hand, head, foot off, Nj. 97, 92, Bs. i. 674; höggva spjót af skapti, to sever the blade from the shaft, 264; hann lét þá ekki hafa af föðurarfi sínum, nothing of their patrimony, Eg. 25; vil ek at þú takir slíkt sem þér líkar af varningi, take what you like of the stores, Nj. 4; at þú eignist slíkt af fé okkru sem þú vili, 94.
    β. ellipt., en nú höfum vér kjörit, en þat er af krossinum, a slice of, Fms. vii. 89; Þórðr gaf Skólm frænda sínum af landnámi sínu, a part of, Landn. 211; hafði hann þat af hans eigu er hann vildi, Sturl. ii. 169; þar lá forkr einn ok brotið af endanum, the point broken off, Háv. 24, Sturl. i. 169.
    γ. absol. off; beit hann höndina af, þar sem nú heitir úlfliðr, bit the hand off, Edda 17; fauk af höfuðit, the head flew off, Nj. 97; jafnt er sem þér synist, af er fótrinn, the foot is off, id.; af bæði eyru, both ears off, Vm. 29.
    2. with the notion of—among; mestr skörungr af konum á Norðrlöndum, the greatest heroine in the North, Fms. i. 116; hinn efniligasti maðr af ungum mönnum í Austfjörðum, the most hopeful of youths in the Eastfirths, Njarð. 364; af ( among) öllurn hirðmönnuni virði konungr mest skáld sín, Eg. 27; ef hann vildi nokkura kaupa af þessum konum, Ld. 30; ör liggr þar útiá vegginum, ok er sú af þeirra örum, one of their own arrows, Nj. 115.
    β. from, among, belonging to; guð kaus hana af ollum konum sér til móður, of the Virgin Mary, Mar. A. i. 27.
    γ. metaph., kunna mikit (lítið) af e-u, to know much, little of, Bragi kann mest af skáldskap, is more cunning of poetry than any one else, Edda 17.
    δ. absol. out of, before, in preference to all others; Gunnarr bauð þér góð boð, en þú vildir eingi af taka, you would choose none of them, Nj. 77; ráða e-t af, to decide; þó mun faðir minn mestu af ráða, all depends upon him, Ld. 22; konungr kveðst því mundu heldr af trúa, preferred believing that of the two, Eg. 55; var honum ekki vildara af ván, he could expect nothing better, 364.
    3. with the additional sense of instrumentality, with; ferma skip af e-u, to freight a ship with, Eg. 364; hlaða mörg skip af korni, load many ships with corn, Fms. xi. 8; klyfja tvá hesta af mat, Nj. 74; var vágrinn skipaðr af herskipum, the bay was covered with war ships, 124; fylla ker af glóðum, fill it with embers, Stj. 319; fylla heiminn af sínu kyni, to fill the world with his offspring, Ver. 3.
    III. denoting the substance of which a thing is made, of; used indifferently with ór, though ór be more frequent; þeir gerðu af honum jörðina, af blóði hans sæinn ok vötnin, of the creation of the world from the corpse of the giant Ymir; the poem Gm. 40, 41, constantly uses ór in this sense, just as in modern Icelandic, Edda 5; svá skildu þeir, at allir hlutir væri smíðaðir af nokkru efni, 147 (pref.); húsit var gert af timbrstokkum, built of trunks of timber, Eg. 233; hjöhin vóru af gulli, of gold, golden, Fms. i. 17; af osti, of cheese, but in the verse 1. c. ór osti, Fms. vi. 253; línklæði af lérepti, linen, Sks. 287.
    2. metaph. in the phrases, göra e-t af e-n ( to dispose of), verða af ( become of), hvat hefir þú gört af Gunnari, what hast thou done with Gunnar? Njarð. 376; hvat af motrinuni er orðit, what has become of it? of a lost thing, Ld. 208; hverfr Óspakr á burt, svá eigi vita menn hvat af honum er orðit, what has become of him? Band. 5.
    IV. denoting parentage, descent, origin, domicile, abode:
    1. parentage, of, from, used indifferently with frá; ok eru af þeim komnir Gilsbekkingar, descend from them, but a little below—frá honum eru konmir Sturlungar, Eb. 338, cp. afkvæmi; af ætt Hörðakára, Fms. i. 287; kominn af Trojumönnum, xi. 416; af Ása-ætt (Kb. wrongly at), Edda I.
    β. metaph., vera af Guði (theol.), of God, = righteous, 686 B. 9; illr ávöxtr af íllri rót, Fms. ii. 48; Asia er kölluð af nafni nokkurar konu, derives her name from, Stj. 67; af honum er bragr kallaðr skáldskapr, called after his name, Edda 17.
    2. of domicile; af danskri tungu, of Danish or Scandinavian origin, speaking the Danish tongue, Grág. ii. 73; hvaðan af löndum, whence, native of what country? Ísl.
    β. especially denoting a man’s abode, and answering to á and í, the name of the farm (or country) being added to proper names, (as in Scotland,) to distinguish persons of the same name; Hallr af Síðu, Nj. 189; Erlingr af Straumey, 273; Ástríðr af Djúpárbakka, 39; Gunnarr af Hlíðarenda (more usual frá); þorir haklangr konungr af Ögðum, king of Agdir, Eg. 35, etc.; cp. ór and frá.
    V. denoting a person with whom an act, feeling, etc. originates, for the most part with a periphrastic passive:
    1. by, the Old Engl. of; as, ek em sendr hingað af Starkaði ok sonum hans, sent hither by, Nj. 94; inna e-t af hendi, to perform, 257; þó at alþýða væri skírð af kennimönnum, baptized of, Fms. ii. 158; meira virðr af mönnum, higher esteemed, Ld. 158; ástsæll af landsmönnum, beloved, íb. 16; vinsæll af mönnum, Nj. 102; í allgóðu yfirlæti af þeim feðgum, hospitably treated by them, Eg. 170; var þá nokkut drukkið af alþjóð, there was somewhat hard drinking of the people, Sturl. iii. 229; mun þat ekki upp tekið af þeim sükudólgum mínum, they will not clutch at that, Nj. 257; ef svá væri í hendr þér búit af mér, if í had so made everything ready to thy hands, Ld. 130; þá varð fárætt um af föður hans, his father said little about it, Fms. ii. 154.
    2. it is now also sometimes used as a periphrase of a nom., e. g. ritað, þýtt af e-m, written, translated, edited by, but such phrases scarcely occur in old writers.
    VI. denoting cause, ground, reason:
    1. originating from, on account of, by reason of; af frændsemis sökum, for kinship’s sake, Grág. ii. 72; ómáli af áverkum, speechless from wounds, 27; af manna völdum, by violence, not by natural accident, of a crime, Nj. 76; af fortölum Halls, through his pleading, 255; af ástsæld hans ok af tölum þeirra Sæmundar, by his popularity and the eloquence of S., Íb. 16; af ráðum Haralds konungs, by his contriving, Landn. 157; úbygðr af frosti ok kulda, because of frost and cold, Hkr. i. 5.
    β. adverbially, af því, therefore, Nj. 78; af hví, why? 686 B. 9; þá verðr bóndi heiðinn af barni sínu, viz. if he does not cause his child to be christened, K. Þ. K. 20.
    2. denoting instrumentality, by means of; af sinu fé, by one’s own means, Grág. i. 293; framfæra e-n af verkum sinum, by means of one’s own labour, K. Þ. K. 142; draga saman auð af sökum, ok vælum ok kaupum, make money by, 623. I; af sínum kostnaði, at hi s own expense, Hkr. i. 217.
    β. absol., hún fellir á mik dropa svá heita at ek brenn af öll, Ld. 328; hann fékk af hina mestu sæmd, derived great honotur from it, Nj. 88; elli sótti á hendr honum svá at hann lagðist í rekkju af, he grew bedridden from age, Ld. 54; komast undan af hlaupi, escape by running, Fms. viii. 58; spinna garn af rokki, spin off a wheel (now, spinna á rokk), from a notion of instrumentality, or because of the thread being spun out (?), Eb. 92.
    3. denoting proceeding, originating from; lýsti af höndum hennar, her hands spread beams of light, Edda 22; allir heimar lýstust ( were illuminated) af henni, id.; en er lýsti af degi, when the day broke forth, Fms. ii. 16; lítt var lýst af degi, the day was just beginning to break, Ld. 46; þá tók at myrkja af nótt, the ‘mirk-time’ of night began to set in, Eg. 230; tók þá brátt at myrkva af nótt, the night grew dark, Hkr. ii. 230.
    4. metaph., standa, leiða, hljótast af, to be caused by, result from; opt hlýtst íllt af kvenna hjali, great mischief is wrought by women’s gossip (a proverb), Gísl. 15, 98; at af þeim mundi mikit mein ok úhapp standa, be caused by, Edda 18; kenna kulda af ráðum e-s, to feel sore from, Eb. 42; þó mun her hljótast af margs manns bani, Nj, 90.
    5. in adverbial phrases, denoting state of mind; af mikilli æði, in fury, Nj. 116; af móð, in great emotion, Fms. xi. 221; af áhyggju, with concern, i. 186; af létta, frankly, iii. 91; af viti, collectedly, Grág. ii. 27; af heilu, sincerely, Eg. 46; áf fári, in rage; af æðru, timidly, Nj. (in a verse); af setning, composedly, in tune, Fms. iii. 187; af mikilli frægð, gallantly, Fas. i. 261; af öllu afli, with all might, Grág. ii. 41; af riki, violently, Fbr. (in a verse); af trúnaði, confidently, Grág. i. 400.
    VII. denoting regard to, of, concerning, in respect of, as regards:
    1. with verbs, denoting to tell of, be informed, inquire about, Lat. de; Dioscorides segir af grasi því, speaks of, 655 xxx. 5; er menn spurðu af landinu, inquired about it, Landn. 30; halda njósn af e-u, Nj. 104; er þat skjótast þar af at segja, Eg. 546, Band. 8.
    β. absol., hann mun spyrja, hvárt þér sé nokkut af kunnigt hversu for með okkr, whether you know anything about, how, Nj. 33; halda skóla af, to hold a school in a science, 656 A. i. 19 (sounds like a Latinism); en ek gerða þik sera mestan mann af öllu, in respect of all, that you should get all the honour of it, Nj. 78.
    2. with adjectives such as mildr, illr, góðrafe-u, denoting disposition or character in respect to; alira manna mildastr af fo, very liberal, often-banded, Fms. vii. 197; mildr af gulli, i. 33; góðr af griðum, merciful, Al. 33; íllr af mat en mildr af gulli, Fms. i. 53; fastr af drykk, close, stingy in regard to, Sturl. ii. 125; gat þess Hildigunnr at þú mundir góðr af hestinum, that you would be good about the horse, Nj. 90, cp. auðigr at, v. at, which corresponds to the above phrases; cp. also the phrase af sér above, p. 4, col. I, ll. 50 sqq.
    VIII. periphrasis of a genitive (rare); provincialis af öllum Predikaraklaustrum, Fms. x. 76; vera af hinum mesta fjandskap, to breathe deep hatred to, be on bad terms with, ix. 220; af hendi, af hálfu e-s, on one’s behalf, v. those words.
    IX. in adverbial phrases; as, af launungu, secretly; af hljóði, silently; v. those words.
    β. also used absolutely with a verb, almost adverbially, nearly in the signification off, away; hann bað þá róa af fjörðinn, pass the firth swiftly by rowing, row the firth off, Fms. ix. 502; var pá af farit þat seni skerjóttast var, was past, sailed past, Ld. 142; ok er þeir höfðu af fjórðung, past one fourth of the way, Dropl. 10: skína af, to clear up, of the skv, Eb. 152; hence in common language, skína af sér, when the sun breaks forth: sofa af nóttina, to sleep it away, Fms. ii. 98; leið af nóttin, the night past away, Nj. 53; dvelja af stundir, to kill the time, Band. 8; drepa af, to kill; láta af, to slaughter, kill off;
    γ. in exclamations; af tjöldin, off with the awnings, Bs. i. 420, Fins, ix. 49.
    δ. in the phrases, þar af, thence; hér af, hence, Fms. ii. 102; af fram, straight on, Nj. 144; now, á fram, on, advance.
    X. it often refers to a whole sentence or to an adverb, not only like other prepp. to hér, hvar, þar, but also redundantly to hvaðan, héðan, þaðan, whence, hence, thence.
    2. the preposition may sometimes be repeated, once elliptically or adverbially, and once properly, e. g. en er af var borit at borðinu, the cloth was taken off from the table, Nj. 176; Guð þerrir af (off, away) hvert tár af ( from) augum heilagra manna, God wipes off every tear from the eyes of his saints, 655 xx. vii. 17; skal þó fyrst bætr af lúka af fé vegaiula, pay off, from, Gþl. 160, the last af may be omitted—var þá af borið borðinu—and the prep. thus be separated from its case, or it may refer to some of the indecl. relatives er or sem, the prep. hvar, hér, þar being placed behind them without a case, and referring to the preceding relative, e. g. oss er þar mikit af sagt auð þeim, we have been told much about these riches, Band. 24; er þat skjótast þar af at segja, in short, shortly. Eg. 546; þaðan af veit ek, thence í infer, know, Fms. i. 97.
    XI. it is moreover connected with a great many verbs besides those mentioned above, e. g. bera af, to excel, whence afbragð, afbrigði; draga af, to detract, deduct, hence afdráttr; veita ekki af, to be hard with; ganga at, to be left, hence afgangr; standast af um e-t, to stand, how matters stand; sem af tekr, at a furious rate; vita af, to be conscious, know about (vide VII).
    D. As a prefix to compounds distinction is to be made between:
    I. af privativum, denoting diminution, want, deduction, loss, separation, negation of, etc., answering indifferently to Lat. ab-, de-, ex-, dis-, and rarely to re- and se-, v. the following COMPDS, such as segja, dicere, but afsegja, negare; rækja, colere, but afrækja, negligere; aflaga, contra legem; skapligr, normalis, afskapligr, deformis; afvik, recessus; afhús, afhellir, afdalr, etc.
    II. af intensivum, etymologically different, and akin to of, afr-, e. g. afdrykkja = ofdrykkja, inebrietas; afbrýði, jealously; afbendi, tenesmus; afglapi, vir fatuus, etc. etc. Both the privative and the intensive af may be contracted into á, esp. before a labial f, m, v, e. g. á fram = af fram; ábrýði = afbrýði; ávöxtr = afvöxtr; áburðr = afburðr; ávíta = afvíta (?). In some cases dubious. With extenuated and changed vowel; auvirðiligr or övirðiligr, depreciated, = afv- etc., v. those words.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AF

  • 12 BERA

    * * *
    I)
    (ber; bar, bárum; borinn), v.
    I.
    1) to bear, carry, convey (bar B. biskup í börum suðr í Hvamm);
    bera (farm) af skipi, to unload a ship;
    bera (mat) af borði, to take (the meat) off the table;
    bera e-t á hesti, to carry on horseback;
    2) to wear (bera klæði, vápn, kórónu);
    bera œgishjálm, to inspire fear and awe;
    3) to bear, produce, yield (jörðin berr gras; tré bera aldin, epli);
    4) to bear, give birth to, esp. of sheep and cows;
    kýr hafði borit kálf, had calved;
    absol., ván at hón mundi bera, that the cow would calve;
    the pp. is used of men; hann hafði verit blindr borinn, born blind;
    verða borinn í þenna heim, to be born into this world;
    þann sóma, sem ek em til borinn, born to;
    borinn e-m, frá e-m (rare), born of;
    Nótt var Nörvi borin, was the daughter of N.;
    borinn Sigmundi, son of S.;
    5) bera e-n afli, ofrafli, ofrliði, ofrmagni, ofríki, to bear one down, overcome, oppress, one by odds or superior force;
    bera e-n ráðum, to overrule one;
    bera e-n bjóri, to make drunk with beer;
    verða bráðum borinn, to be taken by surprise;
    borinn verkjum, overcome by pains;
    þess er borin ván, there is no hope, all hope is gone;
    borinn baugum, bribed; cf. bera fé á e-n, to bribe one;
    6) to lear, be capable of bearing (of a ship, horse, vehicle);
    þeir hlóðu bæði skipin sem borð báru, with as much as they could carry;
    fig., to sustain, support (svá mikill mannfjöldi, at landit fekk eigi borit);
    of persons, to bear up against, endure, support (grief, sorrow, etc.);
    absol., bar hann drengiliga, he bore it manfully;
    similarly, bera (harm) af sér, berast vel (illa, lítt) af;
    bar hon sköruliga af sér, she bore up bravely;
    hversu berst Auðr af um bróðurdauðann, how does she bear it?
    hon berst af lítt, she is much cast down;
    bera sik vel upp, to bear well up against;
    7) bera e-t á, e-n á hendr e-m, to charge or tax one with (eigi erum vér þess valdir, er þú berr á oss);
    bera (kvið) á e-n, to give a verdict against, declare guilty (í annat sinn báru þeir á Flosa kviðinn);
    bera af e-m (kviðinn), to give a verdict for;
    bera e-t af sér, to deny having done a thing;
    bera or bera vitni, vætti, to bear witness, testify;
    bera or bera um e-t, to give a verdict in a case;
    bera e-n sannan at sök, to prove guilty by evidence;
    bera e-n undan sök, to acquit;
    bera í sundr frændsemi þeirra, to prove (by evidence) that they are not relations;
    refl. (pass.), berast, to be proved by evidence (þótt þér berist þat faðerni, er þú segir);
    8) to set forth, report, tell;
    bera e-m kveðju (orð, orðsending), to bring one a greeting, compliments (word, message);
    bera or bera fram erindi sín fyrir e-n, to state (tell) one’s errand or to plead one’s case before one;
    bera e-m njósn, to apprise one;
    bera e-t upp, to produce, mention, tell;
    bera upp erindi sín, to state one’s errand;
    bera saman ráð sín, to consult together;
    eyddist það ráð, er þeir báru saman, which they had designed;
    9) to keep, hold, bear, of a title (bera jarlnafn, konnungsnafn);
    bera (eigi) giptu, gæfu, hammingju, auðnu til e-s, (not) to have the good fortune to do a thing (bar hann enga gæfu til at þjóna þér);
    bera vit, skyn, kunnáttu á e-t, to have knowledge of, uniderstanding about;
    bera hug, áræði, þor, traust til e-s, to have courage, confidence to do a thing;
    bera áhyggju fyrir e-u, to be concerned about;
    bera ást, elsku, hatr til e-s, to bear affection, love, hatred to;
    10) to bear off or away, carry off (some gain);
    bera sigr af e-m, af e-u, to carry off the victory from or in;
    hann hafði borit sigr af tveim orustum, he had been victorious in two battles;
    bera hærra (lægra) hlut to get the best (the worst) of it;
    bera efra (hærra) skjöld, to gain the victory;
    bera hátt (lágt) höfuðit, to bear the head high (low), to be in high (low) spirits;
    bera halann bratt, lágt, to cock up or let fall the tail, to be in high or low spirits;
    11) with preps.:
    bera af e-m, to surpass;
    en þó bar Bolli af, surpassed all the rest;
    bera af sér högg, lag to ward off, parry a blow or thrust;
    bera eld at, to set fire to;
    bera fjötur (bönd) at e-m, to put fetters (bonds) on one;
    bera á or í, to smear, anoint (bera vatn í augu sér, bera tjöru í höfuð sér);
    bera e-t til, to apply to, to try if it fits (bera til hvern lykil af öðrum at portinu);
    bera e-t um, to wind round;
    þá bar hann þá festi um sik, made it fast round his body;
    bera um með e-n, to bear with, have patience with;
    bera út barn, to expose a child;
    12) refl., berast mikit (lítit) á, to bear oneself proudly (humbly);
    láta af berast, to die;
    láta fyrir berast e-s staðar, to stay, remain in a place (for shelter);
    berast e-t fyrir, to design a thing (barst hann þat fyrir at sjá aldregi konur);
    at njósna um, hvat hann bærist fyrir, to inquire into what he was about;
    berast vápn á, to attack one another;
    berast at or til, to happen;
    þat barst at (happened) á einhverju sumri;
    ef svá harðliga kann til at berast, if that misfortune does happen;
    berast í móti, to happen, occur;
    hefir þetta vel í móti borizt, it is a happy coincidence;
    berast við, to be prevented;
    ok nú lét almáttugr guð við berast kirkjubrunann, prevented, stopped the burning of the church;
    II. impers., denoting a sort of passive or involuntary motion;
    alla berr at sama brunni, all come to the same well (end);
    bar hann (acc.) þá ofan gegnt Ösuri, he happened to come down just opposite to Ö.;
    esp. of ships and sailors; berr oss (acc.) til Íslands eða annarra landa, we drift to Iceland or other countries;
    þá (acc.) bar suðr í haf, they were carried out southwards;
    Skarpheðin (acc.) bar nú at þeim, S. came suddenly upon them;
    ef hann (acc.) skyldi bera þar at, if he should happen to come there;
    e-n berr yfir, one is borne onwards, of a bird flying, a man riding;
    hann (acc.) bar skjótt yfir, it passed quickly (of a flying meteor);
    2) followed by preps.:
    Gunnar sér, at rauðan kyrtil bar við glugginn, that a red kirtle passed before the window;
    hvergi bar skugga (acc.) á, there was nowhere a shadow;
    e-t berr fram (hátt), is prominent;
    Ólafr konungr stóð í lyptingu ok bar hann (acc.) hátt mjök, stood out conspicuously;
    e-t berr á milli, comes between;
    leiti (acc.) bar á milli, a hill hid the prospect;
    fig. e-m berr e-t á milli, they are at variance about a thing;
    mart (acc.) berr nú fyrir augu mér, many things come now before my eyes;
    veiði (acc.) berr í hendr e-m, game falls to one’s lot;
    e-t berr undan, goes amiss, fails;
    bera saman, to coincide;
    bar nöfn þeirra saman, they had the same name;
    fig., with dat.; bar öllum sögum vel saman, all the stories agreed well together;
    fund várn bar saman, we met;
    3) bera at, til, við, at hendi, til handa, to befall, happen, with dat. of the person;
    svá bar at einn vetr, it happened one winter;
    þó at þetta vandræði (acc.) hafi nú borit oss (dat.) at hendi, has befallen us;
    bar honum svá til, it so befell him;
    þat bar við (it so happened), at Högni kom;
    raun (acc.) berr á, it is proved by fact;
    4) of time, to fall upon;
    ef þing (acc.) berr á hina helgu viku, if the parliament falls in the holy week;
    bera í móti, to coincide, happen exactly at the same time;
    5) denoting cause;
    e-t berr til, causes a thing;
    konungr spurði, hvat til bæri úgleði hans, what was the cause of his grief;
    ætluðu þat þá allir, at þat mundi til bera, that that was the reason;
    berr e-m nauðsyn til e-s, one is obliged to do a thing;
    6) e-t berr undir e-n, falls to a person’s lot;
    hon á arf at taka, þegar er undir hana berr, in her turn;
    e-t berr frá, is surpassing;
    er sagt, at þat (acc.) bæri frá, hvé vel þeir mæltu, it was extraordinary how well they spoke;
    7) e-t berr bráðum, happens of a sudden;
    e-t berr stóru, stórum (stœrrum), it amounts to much (more), it matters a great deal (more), it is of great (greater) importance;
    8) absol. or with an adv., vel, illa, with infin.;
    e-m berr (vel, illa) at gera e-t, it becomes, beseems one (well, ill) to do a thing (berr yðr vel, herra, at sjá sannindi á þessu máli);
    used absol., berr vel, illa, it is beseeming, proper, fit, or unbeseeming, improper, unfit (þat þykkir eigi illa bera, at).
    (að), v. to make bare (hon beraði likam sinn).
    * * *
    1.
    u, f.
    I. [björn], a she-bear, Lat. ursa; the primitive root ‘ber’ remains only in this word (cp. berserkr and berfjall), björn (q. v.) being the masc. in use, Landn. 176, Fas. i. 367, Vkv. 9: in many Icel. local names, Beru-fjörðr, -vík, from Polar bears; fem. names, Bera, Hallbera, etc., Landn.
    II. a shield, poët., the proverb, baugr er á beru sæmstr, to a shield fits best a baugr (q. v.), Lex. Poët., Edda (Gl.); hence names of poems Beru-drápa, Eg.
    2.
    bar, báru, borit, pres. berr,—poët. forms with the suffixed negative; 3rd pers. sing. pres. Indic. berrat, Hm. 10; 3rd pers. sing. pret. barat, Vellekla; 1st pers. sing. barkak, Eb. 62 (in a verse); barkat ek, Hs. 8; 2nd pers. sing. bartattu; 3rd pers. pl. bárut, etc., v. Lex. Poët. [Gr. φέρειν; Lat. ferre; Ulf. bairan; A. S. beran; Germ. gebären; Engl. bear; Swed. bära; Dan. bære].
    A. Lat. ferre, portare:
    I. prop. with a sense of motion, to bear, carry, by means of the body, of animals, of vehicles, etc., with acc., Egil tók mjöðdrekku eina mikla, ok bar undir hendi sér, Eg. 237; bar hann heim hrís, Rm. 9; konungr lét bera inn kistur tvær, báru tveir menn hverja, Eg. 310; bera farm af skipi, to unload a ship, Ld. 32; bera (farm) á skip, to load a ship, Nj. 182; tóku alla ösku ok báru á á ( amnem) út, 623, 36; ok bar þat ( carried it) í kerald, 43, K. Þ. K. 92; b. mat á borð, í stofu, to put the meat on table, in the oven; b. mat af borði, to take it off table, Eb. 36, 266, Nj. 75, Fms. ix. 219, etc.
    2. Lat. gestare, ferre, denoting to wear clothes, to carry weapons; skikkja dýr er konungr hafði borit, Eg. 318; b. kórónu, to wear the crown, Fms. x. 16; atgeir, Nj. 119; vápn, 209: metaph., b. ægishjálm, to inspire fear and awe; b. merki, to carry the flag in a battle, Nj. 274, Orkn. 28, 30, 38, Fms. v. 64, vi. 413; bera fram merki, to advance, move in a battle, vi. 406.
    3. b. e-t á hesti (áburðr), to carry on horseback; Auðunn bar mat á hesti, Grett. 107; ok bar hrís á hesti, 76 new Ed.; þeir báru á sjau hestum, 98 new Ed.
    II. without a sense of motion:
    1. to give birth to; [the root of barn, bairn; byrja, incipere; burðr, partus; and burr, filius: cp. Lat. parĕre; also Gr. φέρειν, Lat. ferre, of child-bearing.] In Icel. prose, old as well as mod., ‘ala’ and ‘fæða’ are used of women; but ‘bera,’ of cows and sheep; hence sauðburðr, casting of lambs, kýrburðr; a cow is snembær, siðbær, Jólabær, calves early, late, at Yule time, etc.; var ekki ván at hon ( the cow) mundi b. fyr en um várit, Bs. i. 193, 194; kýr hafði borit kálf, Bjarn. 32; bar hvárrtveggi sauðrinn sinn burð, Stj. 178: the participle borinn is used of men in a great many compds in a general sense, aptrborinn, árborinn, endrborinn, frjálsborinn, goðborinn, höldborinn, hersborinn, konungborinn, óðalborinn, samborinn, sundrborinn, velborinn, úborinn, þrælborinn, etc.; also out of compds, mun ek eigi upp gefa þann sóma, sem ek em til borinn, … entitled to by inheritance, Ld. 102; hann hafði blindr verit borinn, born blind, Nj. 152, Hdl. 34, 42, Vsp. 2: esp. borinn e-m, born of one, Rm. 39, Hdl. 12, 23, 27, Hðm. 2, Gs. 9, Vþm. 25, Stor. 16, Vkv. 15; borinn frá e-m, Hdl. 24: the other tenses are in theol. Prose used of Christ, hans blezaða son er virðist at láta berast hingað í heim af sinni blezaðri móður, Fms. i. 281; otherwise only in poetry, eina dóttur (acc.) berr álfröðull (viz. the sun, regarded as the mother), Vþm. 47; hann Gjálp um bar, hann Greip um bar …, Hdl. 36: borit (sup.), Hkv. 1. 1.
    β. of trees, flowers; b. ávöxt, blóm …, to bear fruit, flower … (freq.); bar aldinviðrinn tvennan blóma, Fms. ix. 265; cp. the phrase, bera sitt barr, v. barr.
    2. denoting to load, with acc. of the person and dat. of the thing:
    α. in prop. sense; hann hafði borit sik mjök vápnum, he had loaded himself with arms, i. e. wore heavy armour, Sturl. iii. 250.
    β. but mostly in a metaph. sense; b. e-n ofrafli, ofrmagni, ofrliði, ofríki, magni, to bear one down, to overcome, oppress one, by odds or superior force, Grág. i. 101, ii. 195, Nj. 80, Hkr. ii. 371, Gþl. 474, Stj. 512, Fms. iii. 175 (in the last passage a dat. pers. badly); b. e-n ráðum, to overrule one, Nj. 198, Ld. 296; b. e-n málum, to bearhim down (wrongfully) in a lawsuit, Nj. 151; b. e-n bjóri, to make drunk, Vkv. 26: medic., borinn verkjum, sótt, Bjarn. 68, Og. 5; bölvi, Gg. 2: borne down, feeling heavy pains; þess er borin ván, no hope, all hope is gone, Ld. 250; borinn sök, charged with a cause, Fms. v. 324, H. E. i. 561; bráðum borinn, to be taken by surprise, Fms. iv. 111; b. fé, gull á e-n, to bring one a fee, gold, i. e. to bribe one, Nj. 62; borinn baugum, bribed, Alvm. 5; always in a bad sense, cp. the law phrase, b. fé í dóm, to bribe a court, Grág., Nj. 240.
    3. to bear, support, sustain, Lat. sustinere, lolerare, ferre:
    α. properly, of a ship, horse, vehicle, to bear, be capable of bearing; þeir hlóðu bæði skipin sem borð báru, all that they could carry, Eb. 302;—a ship ‘berr’ ( carries) such and such a weight; but ‘tekr’ ( takes) denotes a measure of fluids.
    β. metaph. to sustain, support; dreif þannig svá mikill mannfjöldi at landit fékk eigi borit, Hkr. i. 56; but metaph. to bear up against, endure, support grief, sorrow, etc., sýndist öllum at Guð hefði nær ætlað hvat hann mundi b. mega, Bs. i. 139; biðr hann friðar ok þykist ekki mega b. reiði hans, Fms. iii. 80: the phrase, b. harm sinn í hljóði, to suffer silently; b. svívirðing, x. 333: absol., þótti honum mikit víg Kjartans, en þó bar hann drengilega, he bore it manfully, Ld. 226; er þat úvizka, at b. eigi slíkt, not to bear or put up with, Glúm. 327; b. harm, to grieve, Fms. xi. 425: in the phrases, b. sik, b. af sér, berask, berask vel (illa, lítt), to bear oneself, to bear up against misfortune; Guðrúnu þótti mikit fráfall Þorkels, en þó bar hon sköruliga af sér, she bore her bravely up, Ld. 326–328; lézt hafa spurt at ekkjan bæri vel af sér harmana, Eb. 88; berask af; hversu bersk Auðr af um bróðurdauðann? (how does she bear it?); hón bersk af lítt ( she is much borne down) ok þykir mikit, Gísl. 24; niun oss vandara gört en öðrum at vér berim oss vel (Lat. fortiter ferre), Nj. 197; engi maðr hefði þar jamvel borit sik, none bad borne himself so boldly, Sturl. iii. 132; b. sik vel upp, to bear well up against, bear a stout heart, Hrafn. 17; b. sik beiskliga ( sorely), Stj. 143; b. sik lítt, to be downcast, Fms. ii. 61; b. sik at göra e-t, to do one’s best, try a thing.
    III. in law terms or modes of procedure:
    1. bera járn, the ordeal of bearing hot iron in the hand, cp. járnburðr, skírsla. This custom was introduced into Scandinavia together with Christianity from Germany and England, and superseded the old heathen ordeals ‘hólmganga,’ and ‘ganga undir jarðarmen,’ v. this word. In Norway, during the civil wars, it was esp. used in proof of paternity of the various pretenders to the crown, Fms. vii. 164, 200, ix. Hák. S. ch. 14, 41–45, viii. (Sverr. S.) ch. 150, xi. (Jómsv. S.) ch. 11, Grett. ch. 41, cp. N. G. L. i. 145, 389. Trial by ordeal was abolished in Norway A. D. 1247. In Icel. It was very rarely mentioned, vide however Lv. ch. 23 (paternity), twice or thrice in the Sturl. i. 56, 65, 147, and Grág. i. 341, 361; it seems to have been very seldom used there, (the passage in Grett. S. l. c. refers to Norway.)
    2. bera út (hence útburðr, q. v.), to expose children; on this heathen custom, vide Grimm R. A. In heathen Icel., as in other parts of heathen Scandinavia, it was a lawful act, but seldom exercised; the chief passages on record are, Gunnl. S. ch. 3 (ok þat var þá siðvandi nokkurr, er land var allt alheiðit, at þeir menn er félitlir vórn, en stóð ómegð mjök til handa létu út bera börn sín, ok þótti þó illa gört ávalt), Fs. Vd. ch. 37, Harð. S. ch. 8, Rd. ch. 7, Landn. v. ch. 6, Finnb. ch. 2, Þorst. Uxaf. ch. 4, Hervar. S. ch. 4, Fas. i. 547 (a romance); cp. Jómsv. S. ch. 1. On the introduction of Christianity into Icel. A. D. 1000, it was resolved that, in regard to eating of horse-flesh and exposure of children, the old laws should remain in force, Íb. ch. 9; as Grimm remarks, the exposure must take place immediately after birth, before the child had tasted food of any kind whatever, and before it was besprinkled with water (ausa vatni) or shown to the father, who had to fix its name; exposure, after any of these acts, was murder, cp. the story of Liafburga told by Grimm R. A.); v. Also a Latin essay at the end of the Gunnl. S. (Ed. 1775). The Christian Jus Eccl. put an end to this heathen barbarism by stating at its very beginning, ala skal barn hvert er borit verðr, i. e. all children, if not of monstrous shape, shall be brought up, N. G. L. i. 339, 363.
    β. b. út (now more usual, hefja út, Am. 100), to carry out for burial; vera erfðr ok tit borinn, Odd. 20; var hann heygðr, ok út borinn at fornum sið, Fb. i. 123; b. á bál, to place (the body and treasures) upon the pile, the mode of burying in the old heathen time, Fas. i. 487 (in a verse); var hon borin á bálit ok slegit í eldi, Edda 38.
    B. Various and metaph. cases.
    I. denoting motion:
    1. ‘bera’ is in the Grág. the standing law term for delivery of a verdict by a jury (búar), either ‘bera’ absol. or adding kvið ( verdict); bera á e-n, or b. kvið á e-n, to give a verdict against, declare guilty; bera af e-m, or b. af e-m kviðinn, to give a verdict for; or generally, bera, or b. um e-t, to give a verdict in a case; bera, or b. vitni, vætti, also simply means to testify, to witness, Nj. 111, cp. kviðburðr ( delivering of verdict), vitnisburðr ( bearing witness), Grág. ii. 28; eigi eigu búar ( jurors) enn at b. um þat hvat lög eru á landi hér, the jurors have not to give verdict in (to decide) what is law in the country, cp. the Engl. maxim, that jurors have only to decide the question of evidence, not of law, Grág. (Kb.) ch. 85; eigi eru búar skildir at b. um hvatvetna; um engi mál eigu þeir at skilja, þau er erlendis ( abroad) hafa görzt, id.; the form in delivering the verdict—höfum vér ( the jurors), orðit á eitt sáttir, berum á kviðburðinn, berum hann sannan at sökinni, Nj. 238, Grág. i. 49, 22, 138, etc.; í annat sinn báru þeir á Flosa kviðinn, id.; b. annattveggja af eðr á; b. undan, to discharge, Nj. 135; b. kvið í hag ( for), Grág. i. 55; b. lýsingar vætti, Nj. 87; b. vitni ok vætti, 28, 43, 44; b. ljúgvitni, to bear false witness, Grág. i. 28; b. orð, to bear witness to a speech, 43; bera frændsemi sundr, to prove that they are not relations, N. G. L. i. 147: reflex., berask ór vætti, to prove that oneself is wrongly summoned to bear witness or to give a verdict, 44: berask in a pass. sense, to be proved by evidence, ef vanefni b. þess manns er á hönd var lýst, Grág. i. 257; nema jafnmæli berisk, 229; þótt þér berisk þat faðerni er þú segir, Fms. vii. 164; hann kvaðst ætla, at honum mundi berask, that he would be able to get evidence for, Fs. 46.
    β. gener. and not as a law term; b. á, b. á hendr, to charge; b. e-n undan, to discharge, Fs. 95; eigi erum vér þessa valdir er þú berr á oss, Nj. 238, Ld. 206, Fms. iv. 380, xi. 251, Th. 78; b. e-m á brýnn, to throw in one’s face, to accuse, Greg. 51; b. af sér, to deny; eigi mun ek af mér b., at… ( non diffitebor), Nj. 271; b. e-m gott vitni, to give one a good…, 11; b. e-m vel (illa) söguna, to bear favourable (unfavourable) witness of one, 271.
    2. to bear by word of mouth, report, tell, Lat. referre; either absol. or adding kveðju, orð, orðsending, eyrindi, boð, sögu, njósn, frétt…, or by adding a prep., b. fram, frá, upp, fyrir; b. kveðju, to bring a greeting, compliment, Eg. 127; b. erindi (sín) fyrir e-n, to plead one’s case before one, or to tell one’s errand, 472, 473; b. njósn, to apprise, Nj. 131; b. fram, to deliver (a speech), talaði jungherra Magnús hit fyrsta erindi (M. made his first speech in public), ok fanst mönnum mikit um hversu úbernsliga fram var borit, Fms. x. 53; (in mod. usage, b. fram denotes gramm. to pronounce, hence ‘framburðr,’ pronunciation); mun ek þat nú fram b., I shall now tell, produce it, Ld. 256, Eg. 37; b. frá, to attest, relate with emphasis; má þat frá b., Dropl. 21; b. upp, to produce, mention, tell, þótt slík lygi sé upp borin fyrir hann, though such a lie be told him, Eg. 59; þær (viz. charges) urðu engar upp bornar ( produced) við Rút, Nj. 11; berr Sigtryggr þegar upp erindi sín (cp. Germ. ojfenbaren), 271, Ld. 256; b. upp gátu, to give (propound) a riddle, Stj. 411, Fas. i. 464; b. fyrir, to plead as an excuse; b. saman ráð sín, or the like, to consult, Nj. 91; eyddist þat ráð, er þeir báru saman, which they had designed, Post. 656 A. ii; b. til skripta, to confess (eccl.), of auricular confession, Hom. 124, 655 xx.
    II. in a metaphorical or circumlocutory sense, and without any sense of motion, to keep, hold, bear, of a title; b. nafn, to bear a name, esp. as honour or distinction; tignar nafn, haulds nafn, jarls nafn, lends manns nafn, konungs nafn, bónda nafn, Fms. i. 17, vi. 278, xi. 44, Gþl. 106: in a more metaph. sense, denoting endowments, luck, disposition, or the like, b. (ekki) gæfu, hamingju, auðnu til e-s, to enjoy (enjoy not) good or bad luck, etc.; at Þórólfr mundi eigi allsendis gæfu til b. um vináttu við Harald, Eg. 75, 112, 473, Fms. iv. 164, i. 218; úhamingju, 219; b. vit, skyn, kunnáttu á (yfir) e-t, to bring wit, knowledge, etc., to bear upon a thing, xi. 438, Band. 7; hence vel (illa) viti borinn, well (ill) endowed with wit, Eg. 51; vel hyggjandi borinn, well endowed with reason, Grág. ii; b. hug, traust, áræði, þor, til e-s, to have courage, confidence … to do a thing, Gullþ. 47, Fms. ix. 220, Band. 7; b. áhyggju, önn fyrir, to care, be concerned about, Fms. x. 318; b. ást, elsku til e-s, to bear affection, love to one; b. hatr, to hate: b. svört augu, to have dark eyes, poët., Korm. (in a verse); b. snart hjarta, Hom. 5; vant er þat af sjá hvar hvergi berr hjarta sitt, where he keeps his heart, Orkn. 474; b. gott hjarta, to bear a proud heart, Lex. Poët., etc. etc.; b. skyndi at um e-t, to make speed with a thing, Lat. festinare, Fms. viii. 57.
    2. with some sense of motion, to bear off or away, carry off, gain, in such phrases as, b. sigr af e-m, af e-u, to carry off the victory from or in …; hann hafði borit sigr af tveim orrustum, er frægstar hafa verit, he had borne off the victory in two battles, Fms. xi. 186; bera banaorð af e-m, to slay one in a fight, to be the victor; Þorr berr banaorð af Miðgarðsormi, Edda 42, Fms. x. 400: it seems properly to mean, to bear off the fame of having killed a man; verðat svá rík sköp, at Regin skyli mitt banorð bera, Fm. 39; b. hærra, lægra hlut, ‘to bear off the higher or the lower lot,’ i. e. to get the best or the worst of it, or the metaphor is taken from a sortilege, Fms. ii. 268, i. 59, vi. 412; b. efra, hærra skjöld, to carry the highest shield, to get the victory, x. 394, Lex. Poët.; b. hátt (lágt) höfuðit, to bear the head high (low), i. e. to be in high or low spirits, Nj. 91; but also, b. halann bratt (lágt), to cock up or let fall the tail (metaph. from cattle), to be in an exultant or low mood: sundry phrases, as, b. bein, to rest the bones, be buried; far þú til Íslands, þar mun þér auðið verða beinin at b., Grett. 91 A; en þó hygg ek at þú munir hér b. beinin í Norðrálfunni, Orkn. 142; b. fyrir borð, to throw overboard, metaph. to oppress; verðr Þórhalli nú fyrir borð borinn, Th. was defied, set at naught, Fær. 234; b. brjóst fyrir e-m, to be the breast-shield, protection of one, Fms. vii. 263: also, b. hönd fyrir höfuð sér, metaph. to put one’s hand before one’s head, i. e. to defend oneself; b. ægishjálm yfir e-m, to keep one in awe and submission, Fm. 16, vide A. I. 2.
    III. connected with prepp., b. af, and (rarely) yfir (cp. afburðr, yfirburðr), to excel, surpass; eigi sá hvárttveggja féit er af öðrum berr, who gets the best of it, Nj. 15; en þó bar Bolli af, B. surpassed all the rest, Ld. 330; þat mannval bar eigi minnr af öðrum mönnum um fríðleik, afi ok fræknleik, en Ormrinn Langi af öðrum skipum, Fms. ii. 252; at hinn útlendi skal yfir b. ( outdo) þann sem Enskir kalla meistara, xi. 431: b. til, to apply, try if it fits; en er þeir báru til (viz. shoes to the hoof of a horse), þá var sem hæfði hestinum, ix. 55; bera til hvern lykil at öðrum at portinu, Thom. 141; b. e-t við, to try it on (hence viðburðr, experiment, effort): b. um, to wind round, as a cable round a pole or the like, Nj. 115; þá bar hann þá festi um sik, made it fast round his body, Fms. ix. 219; ‘b. e-t undir e-n’ is to consult one, ellipt., b. undir dóm e-s; ‘b. e-t fyrir’ is to feign, use as excuse: b. á, í, to smear, anoint; b. vatn í augu sér, Rb. 354; b. tjöru í höfuð sér, Nj. 181, Hom. 70, 73, cp. áburðr; b. gull, silfr, á, to ornament with gold or silver, Ld. 114, Finnb. 258: is now also used = to dung, b. á völl; b. vápn á e-n, to attack one with sharp weapons, Eg. 583, Fms. xi. 334: b. eld at, to set fire to, Nj. 122; b. fjötur (bönd) at e-m, to put fetters (bonds) on one, Fms. x. 172, Hm. 150: metaph. reflex., bönd berask at e-m, a law term, the evidence bears against one; b. af sér, to parry off; Gyrðr berr af sér lagit, G. parries the thrust off, Fms. x. 421; cp. A. II. 3. β.
    IV. reflex., berask mikit á (cp. áburðr), to bear oneself proudly, or b. lítið á, to bear oneself humbly; hann var hinn kátasti ok barst á mikit, Fms. ii. 68, viii. 219, Eb. 258; b. lítið á, Clem. 35; láta af berask, to die; Óttarr vill skipa til um fjárfar sitt áðr hann láti af b., Fms. ii. 12: berask fyrir, to abide in a place as an asylum, seek shelter; hér munu vit láta fyrir b., Fas. iii. 471; berask e-t fyrir, to design a thing, be busy about, barsk hann þat fyrir at sjá aldregi konur, Greg. 53; at njósna um hvat hann bærist fyrir, to inquire into what he was about, Fms. iv. 184, Vígl. 19.
    β. recipr. in the phrase, berask banaspjót eptir, to seek for one another’s life, Glúm. 354: b. vápn á, of a mutual attack with sharp weapons, Fms. viii. 53.
    γ. pass., sár berask á e-n, of one in the heat of battle beginning to get wounds and give way, Nj.:—berask við, to be prevented, not to do; ok nú lét Almáttugr Guð við berast kirkjubrunnann, stopped, prevented the burning of the church, Fms. v. 144; en mér þætti gott ef við bærist, svá at hón kæmi eigi til þín, vi. 210, vii. 219; ok var þá búit at hann mundi þegar láta hamarinn skjanna honum, en hann lét þat við berask, he bethought himself and did not, Edda 35; því at mönnum þótti sem þannig mundi helzt úhæfa við berask, that mischief would thus be best prevented, Sturl. ii. 6, iii. 80.
    C. IMPERS.:—with a sort of passive sense, both in a loc. and temp. sense, and gener. denotes an involuntary, passive motion, happening suddenly or by chance:
    I. with acc. it bears or carries one to a place, i. e. one happens to come; the proverb, alla (acc.) berr at sama brunni, all come to the same well (end), Lat. omnes una manet nox; bar hann þá ofan gegnt Özuri, he happened to come in his course just opposite to Ö., Lat. delatus est, Dropl. 25: esp. of ships or sailors; nú berr svá til ( happens) herra, at vér komum eigi fram ferðinni, berr oss (acc.) til Íslands eðr annara landa, it bore us to I., i. e. if we drive or drift thither, Fms. iv. 176; þá (acc. pl.) bar suðr í haf, they drifted southwards, Nj. 124.
    β. as a cricketing term, in the phrase, berr (bar) út knöttinn, the ball rolls out, Gísl. 26, cp. p. 110 where it is transit.; berr Gísli ok út knöttinn, vide Vígl. ch. 11, Grett. ch. 17, Vd. ch. 37, Hallfr. S. ch. 2.
    γ. Skarpheðin (acc.) bar nú at þeim, Sk. came suddenly upon them, Nj. 144; bar at Hróaldi þegar allan skjöldinn, the shield was dashed against H.’s body, 198; ok skyldu sæta honum, ef hann (acc.) bæri þar at, if he should per chance come, shew himself there, Orkn. 406; e-n berr yfir, it bears one, i. e. one is borne onwards, as a bird flying, a man riding; þóttist vita, at hann (acc.) mundi fljótara yfir bera ef hann riði en gengi, that he would get on more fleetly riding than walking, Hrafn. 7; hann (acc.) bar skjótt yfir, he passed quickly, of a flying meteor, Nj. 194; e-n berr undan, escapes.
    2. also with acc. followed by prepp. við, saman, jafnframt, hjá, of bodies coinciding or covering one another: loc., er jafnframt ber jaðrana tungls ok sólar, if the orb of the moon and sun cover each other, Rb. 34; þat kann vera stundum, at tunglit (acc.) berr jafht á millum vár ok sólar (i. e. in a moon eclipse), 108; ber nokkut jaðar (acc.) þess hjá sólar jaðri, 34; Gunnarr sér at rauðan kyrtil (acc.) bar við glugginn, G. sees that a red kirtle passed before the window, Nj. 114; bar fyrir utan þat skip vápnaburð (acc.) heiðingja (gen. pl.), the missiles of the heathens passed over the ship without hurting them, flew too high, Fms. vii. 232; hvergi bar skugga (acc.) á, nowhere a shadow, all bright, Nj. 118; þangat sem helzt mátti nokkut yfir þá skugga bera af skóginum, where they were shadowed (hidden) by the trees, Fms. x. 239; e-t berr fram (hátt), a body is prominent, Lat. eminet; Ólafr konungr stóð í lyptingunni, bar hann (acc.) hátt mjök, king O. stood out conspicuously, ii. 308; b. yfir, þótti mjök bera hljóð (acc.) þar yfir er Ólafr sat, the sound was heard over there where O. sat, Sturl. i. 21; b. á milli, something comes between; leiti (acc.) bar á milli, a hill hid the prospect, Nj. 263: metaph., e-m berr e-t á milli, they come to dissent, 13, v. 1.; b. fyrir augu (hence fyrirburðr, vision), of a vision or the like; mart (acc.) berr nú fyrir augu mér, ek sé …, many things come now before my eyes, 104; hann mundi allt þat er fyrir hann hafði borit, i. e. all the dream, 195; eina nótt berr fyrir hann í svefni mikla sýn, Fms. i. 137, Rd. 290; veiði (acc.) berr í hendr e-m (a metaphor from hunting), sport falls to one’s lot; hér bæri veiði í hendr nú, here would be a game, Nj. 252; e-t berr undan (a metaphor from fishing, hunting term), when one misses one’s opportunity; vel væri þá … at þá veiði (acc.) bæri eigi undan, that this game should not go amiss, 69; en ef þetta (acc.) berr undan, if this breaks down, 63; hon bað hann þá drepa einhvern manna hans, heldr en allt (acc.) bæri undan, rather than that all should go amiss, Eg. 258: absol., þyki mér illa, ef undan berr, if I miss it, Nj. 155; viljum vér ekki at undan beri at…, we will by no means miss it…, Fms. viii. 309, v. 1. The passage Bs. i. 416 (en fjárhlutr sá er átt hafði Ari, bar undan Guðmundi) is hardly correct, fjárhlut þann would run better, cp. bera undir, as a law term, below.
    II. adding prepp.; b. við, at, til, at hendi, at móti, til handa …, to befall, happen, Lat. accidere, occurrere, with dat. of the person, (v. atburðr, viðburðr, tilburðr); engi hlut skyldi þann at b., no such thing should happen as…, Fms. xi. 76; svá bar at einn vetr, it befell, x. 201; þat hefir nú víst at hendi borit, er…, Nj. 174; þó þetta vandræði (acc.) hafi nú borit oss (dat.) at hendi, Eg. 7; b. til handa, id., Sks. 327; bar honum svá til, so it befell him, Fms. xi. 425; at honum bæri engan váðaligan hlut til á veginum, that nothing dangerous should befall him on the way, Stj. 212; bæri þat þá svá við, at hann ryfi, it then perchance might happen, that …, 102; þat bar við at Högni kom, 169, 172, 82; raun (acc.) berr á, it is proved by the fact, event, Fms. ix. 474, x. 185.
    2. temp., e-t berr á, it happens to fall on …; ef þing (acc.) ber á hina helgu viku, if the parliament falls on the holy week (Whitsun), Grág. i. 106; ef Crucis messu (acc.) berr á Drottins dag, Rb. 44; berr hana (viz. Petrs messu, June 29) aldrei svá optarr á öldinni, 78; þat er nú berr oss næst, what has occurred of late, Sturl. iii. 182: b. í móti, to happen exactly at a time; þetta (acc.) bar í móti at þenna sama dag andaðist Brandr biskup, Bs. i. 468; b. saman, id.; bar þat saman, at pá var Gunnarr at segja brennusöguna, just when G. was about telling the story, Nj. 269.
    3. metaph. of agreement or separation; en þat (acc.) þykir mjök saman b. ok þessi frásögn, Fms. x. 276: with dat., bar öllum sögum vel saman, all the records agreed well together, Nj. 100, v. l.; berr nú enn í sundr með þeim, Bjarna ok Þorkatli at sinni, B. and Th. missed each other, Vápn. 25.
    4. denoting cause; e-t (acc.) berr til …, causes a thing; ætluðu þat þá allir, at þat mundi til bera, that that was the reason, Nj. 75; at þat beri til skilnaðar okkars, that this will make us to part (divorce), 261; konungr spurði, hvat til bæri úgleði hans, what was the cause of his grief? Fms. vi. 355; þat berr til tunglhlaups, Rb. 32.
    β. meiri ván at brátt beri þat (acc.) til bóta, at herviliga steypi hans ríki, i. e. there will soon come help (revenge), Fms. x. 264; fjórir eru þeir hlutir er menn (acc.) berr í ætt á landi hér, there are four cases under which people may be adopted, Grág. i. 361.
    γ. e-t berr undir e-n, falls to a person’s lot; hon á arf at taka þegar er undir hana berr, in her turn, 179; mikla erfð (acc.) bar undir hana, Mar. (Fr.); berr yfir, of surpassing, Bs. ii. 121, 158; b. frá, id. (fráburðr); herðimikill svá at þat (acc.) bar frá því sem aðrir menn, Eg. 305; er sagt, at þat bæri frá hve vel þeir mæltu, it was extraordinary how well they did speak, Jb. 11; bar þat mest frá hversu illa hann var limaðr, but above all, how…, Ó. H. 74.
    5. with adverbial nouns in a dat. form; e-t berr bráðum, happens of a sudden; berr þetta (acc.) nú allbráðum, Fms. xi. 139; cp. vera bráðum borinn, to be taken by surprise (above); berr stórum, stærrum, it matters a great deal; ætla ek stærrum b. hin lagabrotin (acc.), they are much more important, matter more, vii. 305; var þat góðr kostr, svá at stórum bar, xi. 50; hefir oss orðit svá mikil vanhyggja, at stóru berr, an enormous blunder, Gísl. 51; svá langa leið, at stóru bar, Fas. i. 116; þat berr stórum, hversu mér þóknast vel þeirra athæfi, it amounts to a great deal, my liking their service, i. e. I do greatly like, Fms. ii. 37; eigi berr þat allsmám hversu vel mér líkar, in no small degree do I like, x. 296.
    β. with dat., it is fitting, becoming; svá mikit sem landeiganda (dat.) berr til at hafa eptir lögum, what he is legally entitled to, Dipl. iii. 10; berr til handa, it falls to one’s lot, v. above, Grág. i. 93.
    III. answering to Lat. oportet, absolutely or with an adverb, vel, illa, with infinit.; e-m berr, it beseems, becomes one; berr þat ekki né stendr þvílíkum höfuðfeðr, at falsa, Stj. 132; berr yðr (dat.) vel, herra, at sjá sannindi á þessu máli, Fms. ix. 326; sagði, at þat bar eigi Kristnum mönnum, at særa Guð, x. 22; þá siðu at mér beri vel, Sks. 353 B: used absol., berr vel, illa, it is beseeming, proper, fit, unbeseeming, unfit, improper; athæfi þat er vel beri fyrir konungs augliti, 282; þat þykir ok eigi illa bera, at maðr hafi svart skinn til hosna, i. e. it suits pretty well, 301: in case of a pers. pron. in acc. or dat. being added, the sentence becomes personal in order to avoid doubling the impers. sentence, e. g. e-m berr skylda (not skyldu) til, one is bound by duty; veit ek eigi hver skylda (nom.) yðr (acc.) ber til þess at láta jarl einn ráða, Fms. i. 52: also leaving the dat. out, skylda berr til at vera forsjámaðr með honum, vii. 280; eigi berr hér til úviska mín, it is not that I am not knowing, Nj. 135.
    IV. when the reflex. inflexion is added to the verb, the noun loses its impers. character and is turned from acc. into nom., e. g. þar (þat?) mun hugrinn minn mest hafa fyrir borizt, this is what I suspected, fancied, Lv. 34; cp. hugarburðr, fancy, and e-t berr fyrir e-n (above, C. I. 2); hefir þetta (nom.) vel í móti borizt, a happy coincidence, Nj. 104; ef svá harðliga kann til at berask, if the misfortunes do happen, Gþl. 55; barsk sú úhamingja (nom.) til á Íslandi, that mischief happened (no doubt the passage is thus to be emended), Bs. i. 78, but bar þá úhamingju …; þat (nom.) barsk at, happened, Fms. x. 253; fundir várir (nom.) hafa at borizt nokkurum sinnum, vii. 256; þat barsk at á einhverju sumri, Eg. 154; bærist at um síðir at allr þingheimrinn berðist, 765, cp. berast við, berask fyrir above (B. V.): berast, absol., means to be shaken, knocked about; var þess ván, at fylkingar mundu berast í hergöngunni, that they would be brought into some confusion, Fms. v. 74; Hrólfr gékk at ramliga, ok barst Atli (was shaken, gave away) fyrir orku sakir, þar til er hann féll. Fas. iii. 253; barst Jökull allr fyrir orku sakir (of two wrestling), Ísl. ii. 467, Fms. iii. 189: vide B. IV.
    D. In mod. usage the strong bera—bar is also used in impersonal phrases, denoting to let a thing be seen, shew, but almost always with a negative preceding, e. g. ekki bar (ber) á því, it could ( can) not be seen; að á engu bæri, láta ekki á bera ( to keep tight), etc. All these phrases are no doubt alterations from the weak verb bera, að, nudare, and never occur in old writers; we have not met with any instance previous to the Reformation; the use is certainly of late date, and affords a rare instance of weak verbs turning into strong; the reverse is more freq. the case.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > BERA

  • 13 JAFN

    * * *
    a.
    1) even; jöfn tala, even number;
    2) equal, the same; þínar (viz. ferðir) verða flestar jafnastar, thy doings are mostly the same, all equally bad; hann var ellefu vetra ok sterkr at jöfnum aldri, and strong for his age; jafn e-m, equal to one; jafnt er sem þér sýnist, af er fótrinn, it is just as it appears to thee, the leg is off; komast til jafns við e-n, hafa e-t til jafns við e-n, to equal one, be one’s match in a thing; at jöfnu, equally, in equal shares.
    * * *
    adj., also spelt jamn, f. jöfn, neut. jafnt, often spelt as well as proncd. jamt; compar. jafnari, superl. jafnastr: [Ulf. ibns, Luke vi. 17; A. S. efen; Engl. and Dutch even; old Fr. ivin; O. H. G. eban; mod. Germ. eben; Dan. jevn; Swed. jemn; akin to Lat. aequus by interchange of palatal and labial, see Grimm’s Dict. s. v. eben]:—even, equal, but, like Lat. aequus, mostly in a metaph. sense, for sléttr (q. v.) answers to Lat. planus; often followed by a dat., jafn e-u, equal to a thing, in comparison:
    I. equal, equal to; jöfn eyri (dat.) gulls, K. Þ. K. 72; jafn Guði, equal to God; jafn mér, passim.
    2. equal, the same; enda er jöfn helgi hans meðan hann ferr svá með sér, Grág. i. 93; ella er jöfn sök við hann fram á leið, 322; at ek verða jafn drengr í hvert sinn, Sd. 188; þínar verða flestar jafnastar, thy acts are mostly the same, i. e. all bad, Fms. viii. 409.
    3. fixed, unchanged; með jafnri leigu, jöfnum kaupum, jöfnum skildaga, Rétt. 2. 7, Stat. 264, Fb. ii. 137; hann var ellefu vetra eðr tíu, ok sterkr at jöfnum aldri, and strong for his age, Eg. 188, 592; eiga þeir jöfnum höndum (see hönd) allt þat er þeir taka, Grág. ii. 66.
    4. even, even-tempered; jafn ok úmíslyndr, Mar.: of numbers, jöfn tala, even in tale, equal, opp. to odda-tala, Alg. 356.
    II. neut. jafnt or jamt, almost adverbially, equally, just; jafnt utan sem innan, Grág. i. 392: as, just as, ok hafa eitt atferli báðar jamt, both together, both alike, Fms. xi. 137; jafnt er sem þér sýnisk (‘tis as it appears, indeed), af er fótrinn, Nj. 97; jafnt þrælar sem frjálsir menn, Fms. i. 113: jamt sem, just as, equally as; jafnt sem í fjórðungs-dómi, jamt skal eiga féránsdóm eptir fjörbaugs-mann sem eptir skógar-mann, Grág. i. 87; skal hann láta virða fé þat jamt sem úmaga-eyri, 189; menn skulu svá sakir hluta, jamt sem á alþingi, 122; jafnt hefir komit er þú spáðir, it has happened just as thou didst foretel, Niðrst. 8: ellipt., ok skal hann þá jamt (sem þeir) allri bót upp halda, Grág. ii. 182.
    2. temp. at the same time, just; ek skíri þik, ok nefna barn, í nafni Föður, ok drepa barninu í vatn um sinn jafnt fram fyrir sik, and dip the bairn each time info the water, K. Þ. K. 10: just, precisely, in the very moment, þat var jamt Jóla-aptan sjálfan er þeir börðusk, Fms. xi. 15; jamt í því hann stakaði. 133.
    3. adverb., at jöfnu, equally, in equal shares, Fms. xi. 131.
    4. til jafns, vóru þeir engir at né eina íþrótt hefði til jafns við hann, Nj. 46; halda til jafns við e-n, Ld. 40; komask til jafns við e-n, Fb. i. 261.
    B. COMPDS:
    I. such a, so … a; Karvel jafn-frægum dreng, so fine a fellow as K., Karl. 103; er þat skömm jafn-mörgum mönnum, ‘tis a shame for so many men, Gísl. 51: with the particle sem, jafn-ungr sem hann var, young as he was, i. e. so young as he was for his age, Vápn. 5; vel hafi þér mínu máli komit, jafn-úvænt sem var, Þiðr. 136; kvað þat ekki hæfa á jafn-mikilli hátið sem ( in such a feast as) í hönd ferr, Fb. i. 376; at eigi skyldi Hugon keisari yfir þá stíga jafn-reiðr sem hann varð þeim, Karl. 478; undraðisk hón hversu fríðr ok fagr hann var jafn-gamall maðr ( for his age), Stj. 225; mikill maðr ertú þó Þórir, jafn-gamall, Ó. H. 176; Þórir Oddsson var sterkastr jafn-gamall, Gullþ. 4.
    II. mod. phrases such as, það er jafngott fyrir hann, it serves him right; hann er jafngóðr fyrir því, it won’t hurt him; or honum er það jafn-gott, it will do him good, serve him right; vera jafn-nær, to be equally near, i. e. none the better; hann fór jafnnær, it was all of no use.
    III. in countless COMPDS (esp. adjectives) with almost any participle or adverb, rarely with verbs and nouns, and denoting equal, as, the same, as seen from the context often followed by a dat., e. g. jafn-gamall e-m, of the same age as another person:—of these compds only some can be noticed: jafn-aldri, a, m. one of the same age, Fms. i. 13, vii. 199, Bs. i. 179, Eg. 25, 84. jafn-auðigr, adj. equally wealthy, Band. 2: equally happy, hann setr hund sinn jafnaudigan okkr undir borði, Bjarn. 27. jafn-auðsær, adj. as perspicuous, Eluc. 41. jafn-auðveldr, adj. as easy, Ld. 78. jafn-ágætr, adj. as good, as noble, Nj. 129. jafn-ákafr, adj. as impetuous, Fms. xi. 137. jafn-beinn, adj. as straight, Sturl. i. 196. jafn-berr, adj. equally bare, Fas. i. 67. jafn-bitinn, part. evenly bitten or grazed, of a field, Gþl. 407. jafn-bitr, jafn-beittr, adj. as sharp, keen. jafn-bjartr, adj. as bright, Nj. 208: neut., Sks. 69. jafn-bjóða, bauð; j. e-m, to be a match for one, Finnb. 260: to be equal to, contest on equal terms with one, Fms. ii. 27, vii. 22; gripr betri en þeim peningum jafnbjóði, 655 xxx. 10. jafn-blíðr, adj. equally mild, Fær. 154. jafn-borinn, part. of equal birth, Ld. 332, Fms. x. 79 (v. l.), Gþl. 133; j. til e-s, having equal birthright to, Fms. vii. 8, x. 407. jafn-brattr, adj. as steep. jafn-brátt, n. adj. as soon, at the same moment, Hom. 114. jafn-breiðr, adj. equally broad, Edda 28, Gþl. 355. jafn-búinn, part. equally ‘boun’ or armed, Fms. ii. 165: ready, prepared, Stj. jafn-deildr, part. equally shared, Hom. 148. jafn-digr, adj. as stout, Sturl. iii. 63. jafn-djúpr, adj. as deep. jafn-djúpvitr, adj. as deep-scheming, Orkn. 214, Hkr. iii. 95. jafn-drengilegr, adj. as gallant, Ísl. ii. 446. jafn-drjúgdeildr, part. going as far, of stores, Sturl. i. 166. jafn-drjúgr, adj. keeping as long, Sturl. i. 216, Rb. 18. jafn-dýrligr, adj. equally splendid, Bs. i. 454. jafn-dýrr, adj. as costly, glorious, of the same price, K. Þ. K. 28, Nj. 56, Grett. 104 A, N. G. L. i. 150, 348. jafn-dægri, n. (mod. jafndægr), the equinox, both dægr (q. v.) being equally long, Edda 103, Rb. 454, 456, 472, and passim: equal length, of day and night, Fb. i. 539; see eykt. jafn-dæmi, n. equal judgment, justice, Fms. vi. 431, Pr. 413. jafn-dæmr, adj. just, giving equal judgment, Rb. 364. jafn-einfaldr, adj. as simple, guileless, Hom. 50. jafn-fagr, adj. as fair, Nj. 112. jafn-fallegr, adj. as handsome. jafn-fastr, adj. equally firm, Grág. i. 7, K. Þ. K. 166: as adv., Fms. x. 270, Finnb. 338. jafn-fáir, adj. as few. jafn-feigr, adj. as fey. jafn-feitr, adj. as fat. jafn-fimlega, adv. (-ligr, adj.), as alert, Fms. ii. 273. jafn-fimr, adj. as alert, Fær. 272, Hkr. i. 291, v. l. jafn-fjær, adv. as far. jafn-fjölmennr, adj. with as many men, Nj. 222. jafn-flatt, n. adj.; fara j., to fare so ill, Fms. vi. 379; see flatr. jafn-fljótr, adj. as swift. jafn-fram, adv. equally forward, side by side: with dat., jafnfram skipi Rúts, Nj. 8: locally, of places, over against, (= gegnt and gagn-vart, q. v.); with dat., er hann kom jafnfram Borgund, Hkr. ii. 309; j. Eiðsvelli, Vermá, Fms. ix. 408; j. gagntaki konungs sonar, j. boðanum, vii. 170, ix. 387 (v. l.): as adv., standa jafnfram, to stand evenly, in a straight line; standa allir j. fyrir konungs borðinu, i. 16, Eg. 581, Nj. 140, Rb. 466, Sturl. iii. 244: temp. at the same moment, of two things happening together, Fms. vi. 24; þeir riðu til þings jafnfram Skeggja, Þórð. 18 new Ed.; hann ferr ávalt jafnfram í frásogn æfi Guðs-sonar, follows parallel in the story, 625. 83: in equal share, taka arf j., Gþl. 248; at the same time, also, hugsa þat j., at the same time consider, Stj. 156; jafnfram sem, jafnfram ok, as soon as, Karl. 158, Pr. 413. jafn-framarla, -framar, -liga, adv. as forward, as far, just as well, Ld. 254, Bs. i. 778. jafn-frammi, adv. = jafnframt, Sks. 364, Sturl. i. 32: temp., Fms. iii. 218. jafn-framt, adv. = jafnfram, Háv. 42: temp., Sturl. i. 1: along with, with dat., Pass. viii. 9: equally, in the same degree, Ld. 62. jafn-fríðr, adj. as fair, Fms. i. 8: as valuable, K. Þ. K. 172. jafn-frjáls, adj. equally free, Fas. iii. 8. jafn-frjálsliga, adv. (-ligr, adj.), as freely, as liberally, Hkr. i. 78. jafn-fróðr, adj. as wise, as knowing, Sks. 544. jafn-frægr, adj. as famous, Fas. i. 277. jafn-frækn, adj. equally gallant, Edda. jafn-fullr, adj. as full, Grág. i. 20, 68, Gþl. 477. jafn-fúinn, adj. equally rotten, jafn-fúss, adj. equally willing, Sturl. i. 190. jafn-færr, adj. as able, Nj. 97. jafn-fætis, adv. on equal footing; standa j. e-m, Sturl. ii. 134, Hkr. ii. 153. jafn-gamall, adj. of the same age, Ld. 108, Fms. i. 60, xi. 96. jafn-geði, n. evenness of temper, Sks. 435. jafn-gefinn, part. equally given to, Fas. i. 268. jafn-gegnt, adv. just opposite to, Sks. 63, Fms. ix. 463; see gegnt. jafn-girnd, f. and jafn-girni, f. fairness, equity, Sks. 273, 639, Hom. 17. jafn-gjarn, adj. as eager, Hom. 19: as equitable, Sks. 355, Hom. 135, Karl. 495. jafn-gjarna (- gjarnliga), adv. as willingly, as readily, Fms. iii. 45 (v. l.), ix. 508, Stj. jafn-glaðr, adj. as glad, as cheerful, Eb. 88: neut., mér er ekki jafnglatt sem áðr, Fas. i. 106. jafn-glöggt, n. adj. as clearly, Bs. i. 352. jafn-góðr, adj. equally good, as good, Nj. 18, Eg. 54, Gþl. 233, N. G. L. i. 347, Dipl. v. 16: unhurt, none the worse, see (II) above. jafn-góðviljaðr, adj. with equally good will, Stj. 629. jafn-grannr, adj. equally thin. jafn-grimmliga, adv. (-ligr, adj.), as fiercely, Th. jafn-grimmr, adj. as fierce, Sks. 79. jafn-grunnr, adj. as shallow. jafn-gæfr, adj. as meek, Rb. 397. jafn-göfigr, adj. as good, as famous, Sturl. iii. 11, Bs. i. 133. jafn-görla, adv. as clearly, Grág. i. 299, Fms. ii. 171, Fas. i. 271. jafn-hafðr, part. equally used, N. G. L. i. 249. jafn-hagliga, adv. as skilfully, Krók. 53. jafn-hagr, adj. as skilful in handiwork, Nj. 147. jafn-harðr, adj. as hard, as severe, Nj. 79: neut. jafn-hart, as fast, Fas. iii. 488: jafn-harðan, adv. instantly. jafn-harðsnúinn, part. as hard-twisted, as tight, Nj. 79. jafn-hár, adj. as high, as tall, as loud, Rb. 112, 474, Fas. ii. 79: of metre, see hár (I. 3), Fms. vi. 386, Skálda 182, 190: neut., Stj. 79. jafnhátta-góðr, adj. as well-mannered, Ld. 174. jafn-heilagr, adj. as holy, as inviolable, Sks. 674, Grág. i. 90. jafn-heill, adj. as hale, as whole, Eg. 425, v. l. jafn-heimoll, adj. equally open to use, Eg. 47, Ld. 70, Gþl. 214, 353: equally bound, 57. jafn-heimskr, adj. equally stupid, Fms. ii. 156, Sd. 178. jafn-heitr, adj. as hot, Sks. 540. jafn-hentr, adj. as well fitted, Sturl. i. 196. jafn-hlær, adj. equally snug, Rb. 440. jafn-hollr, adj. equally sincere, Orkn. 166. jafn-hógværliga, adv. (-ligr, adj.), as meekly, Krók. 36. jafn-hógværr, adj. as gentle. jafn-hraustr, adj. as valiant, Fms. ii. 356, Krók. 51. jafn-hryggr, adj. as distressed, Hkr. iii. 269. jafn-hugaðr, adj. even-tempered, Sks. 24: of one mind, 300: as daring. jafn-hvass, adj. as sharp, Ld. 306: blowing as hard. jafn-hvatr, adj. as bold, as quick, Sturl. i. 112, v. l. jafn-hvítr, adj. equally white. jafn-hæðiligr, adj. (-liga, adv.), as ridiculous, Fas. iii. 91. jafn-hægr, adj. equally easy, ready, meek, Fms. ii. 106, Fær. 69, Grág. i. 264, ii. 257. jafn-hættr, adj. as dangerous, Sks. 540. jafn-höfigr, adj. as heavy, Rb. 102, Edda 38. jafn-ílla, adv. as badly, Fms. viii. 140 (v. l.), Ísl. ii. 181. jafn-ílliligr, adj. (-liga, adv.) as ill-looking, Fas. ii. 207. jafn-íllr, adj. equally bad, Grág. ii. 145, Fas. ii. 513. jafn-kaldr, adj. as cold, Sks. 215. jafn-keypi, n. an equal bargain, Fs. 25. jafn-kominn, part. on even terms, Sks. 455: neut. an even match, jafnkomit er á með ykkr, ye are well-matched, Nj. 59; hann kvað jafnkomit með þeim fyrir aldrs sakir, Fms. iii. 76; jafnkomnir til erfðar, with equal title to, Grág. i. 304; jafnkomnir til fyrir ættar sakir, Fms. i. 220; jafnkomnir at frændsemi, Ísl. ii. 315. jafn-kosta, adj. well-matched, good enough, of wedlock, Stj. 204. jafn-kostgæfinn, adj. equally painstaking, Bs. i. 681. jafn-krappr, adj. as straight, narrow; í jafnkrappan stað, in such a strait, Ld. 168. jafn-kringr, adj. equally dexterous, Sks. 381. jafn-kristinn, adj. a fellow Christian, Jb. 92, Barl. 44. jafn-kunnigr, adj. as well known, Grett. 162 A: knowing as well. jafn-kunnr, adj. as well known, Hom. 90. jafn-kurteis, adj. as courteous, Sturl. i. 165. jafn-kyrr, adj. as quiet. jafn-kýta, t, with dat. = jafnyrða. jafn-kænn, adj. as ‘cunning,’ as well versed, Stj. 561. jafn-kærr, adj. as dear, as beloved, Fms. i. 215, xi. 319. jafn-langr, adj. as long, equally long, Fms. xi. 376, Gþl. 350, 355, Ísl. ii. 219, Grág. i. 406, Edda 138 ( of the same length): neut., en ef þær segja jafnlangt, if they say both the same, Grág. i. 7. jafn-lágr, adj. equally low. jafn-leiðr, adj. equally loathed, Fms. viii. 240. jafn-leiki, n. = jafnleikit. jafn-leikit, n. part. an equal game, Fms. xi. 131. jafn-lendi, n. a level, even piece of ground, Eg. 584. jafn-lengd, f. ‘even-length,’ the return to the same time in the next day, week, month, year, etc.: of a day, til jafnlengdar annars dags, Grág. ii. 16, Stj. 49; þann sama dag tók Gormr konungr sótt, ok andaðisk annan dag at jafnlengdinni, Fms. i. 119, Fas. ii. 30, 37: of a year, anniversary, skal eigi brullaup vera fyrr en at jafnlengd, Grág. i. 311; tíu aurar sé leigðir eyri til jafnlengdar (a year’s rent), 390; at jafnlengd it síðasta, 487; eigi síðarr en fyrir jafnlengd, Fms. xi. 397; halda hátíð at jafnlengdum, Greg. 13, Hom. 98; jafnlengdar-dagr, 129, Fms. v. 214, Dipl. v. 8; jafnlengdar hátíð, an anniversary, Greg. 13. jafn-lengi, adv. as long, Grág. i. 423, Fms. iii. 9, MS. 732. 7. jafn-léttmæltr, adj. equally easy, just as pleasant in one’s speech, Fms. vii. 227. jafn-léttr, adj. as light, as easy, Sturl. iii. 90: neut. (adverb.), Kjartani var ekki annat jafn-létthjalat, K. liked not to speak of anything so much, Ld. 214. jafn-léttvígr, adj. as ready in wielding arms, Sturl. iii. 90. jafn-liða, adj. with an equal number of men, Eb. 144. jafn-liga, adv. equally, fairly; sýnisk mér eigi j. á komit, Bs. i. 531, Vm. 169; skipta j., Fb. ii. 300: perpetually, all along, always, usually, Fms. i. 191, x. 88, 89, Dipl. v. 8, Rb. 348, 472, Stj. 77. jafn-ligr, adj. equal, fair, Hkr. ii. 149, Háv. 57, Eg. 488; er þat miklu jafnligra, a more equal match, Fms. vii. 115. jafn-líkligr, adj. as likely, Sturl. iii. 7, Lv. 77. jafn-líkr, adj. as like, Lv. 58, Fas. ii. 478: equal, alike, j. sem hornspónar efni, Bs. i. 59. jafn-lítill, adj. as little, Fas. iii. 487. jafn-ljóss, adj. as bright, Bret. 62. jafn-ljótr, adj. as ugly, Fms. iv. 175. jafn-ljúfr, adj. as willing. jafn-lygn, adj. as ‘loun,’ as calm, of the wind. jafn-lyndi, n., fem. in Mar. 848; evenness of temper, Stj., Fagrsk. 132, Bs. i. 141, Mar. passim. jafn-lyndr, adj. even-tempered, Fms. vi. 287, viii. 447 (v. l.) jafn-lýðskyldr, adj. equally bound, as liegemen, Sks. 270. jafn-lærðr, adj. as learned. jafn-magr, adj. equally meagre. jafn-maki, a, m. an equal, a match, Sks. 22, 255. jafn-mannvænn, adj. equally promising, Þorf. Karl. 382. jafn-margr, adj. as many, Nj. 104, Grág. ii. 210, 403, Fms. i. 152, ii. 34. jafn-máttugr, adj. as mighty, Fms. ii. 157, Eluc. 6. jafn-máttuligr, adj. equally possible, 655 xxii. B. jafn-menni, n. an equal, a match, Ld. 132, Ísl. ii. 358, Fms. vi. 345, vii. 103. jafn-menntr, adj. of equal rank, Hrafn. 10. jafn-merkiligr, adj. equally dignified, Bs. i. 148. jafn-mikill, adj. as great, Grág. ii. 264, 403, Fms. i. 1, Gþl. 363: equally big, tall, Fms. x. 202, Nj. 11: neut. as much, Fms. vii. 240, Skálda 168. jafn-mildr, adj. as mild, as gracious, Rb. 366. jafn-minnigr, adj. having as good a memory, Bs. i. 681. jafn-mjúkliga, adv. as meekly, as gently, Lv. 50. jafn-mjúkr, adj. equally soft. jafn-mjök, adv. as much, as strongly, Grág. ii. 140, Skálda 168. jafn-myrkr, adj. equally dark, Skálda 209. jafn-mæli, n. fair play, equality, Fb. i. 407, Fms. vi. 206, Grág. i. 88, 200, Ld. 258, H. E. i. 247, Karl. 99. jafn-naumr, adj. as close. jafn-náinn, adj.; j. at frændsemi, equally near akin, Grág. i. 171, ii. 67, Eb. 124, Ísl. ii. 315, (jafnan, Ed.) jafn-nær, mod. jafn-nærri, adv. equally near: loc., er Ólafs mark j. báðum, Fms. vii. 64, 268, Sks. 63, 216: as near, at honum væri úvarligt at láta jafnmarga heiðna menn vera j. sér, Fms. ii. 34: equally near (by birth), i. 123: metaph., eigi hefir honum jafnnærri gengit újafnaðr þeirra sem mér, Sturl. iii. 238: also jafn-nær, adj. equally nigh, not a whit the better, see (II) above. jafn-nætti, n. the equinox, 673. 54, Stj. 15. jafn-oki, a, m. = jafnmaki, an equal, a match for one, Sks. 22: a play-fellow, Stj. 497, Þiðr. 213. jafn-opt, adv. as often, Nj. 211, Rb. 566, Grág. i. 186. jafn-ótt, adj., neut. as adv., at the same, time, immediately. Pass. 20. 2: one after another, taka e-ð jafnótt og það kemr. jafn-rakkr, adj. as strong, as straight, Ld. 168. jafn-ramr, adj. as mighty, as great a wizard, Vþm. 2. jafn-rangr; adj. as wrong. jafn-ráðinn, part. equally determined, Grett. 149. jafn-reiðr, adj. equally angry, Háv. 52. jafn-rétti, n. an equal right. jafnréttis-maðr, m. a man with equal right, N. G. L. i. 31. jafn-réttr, adj. as right, as lawful, Edda 93, Grág. i. 18: of equal authority, Hkr. iii. 79. jafn-réttvíss, adj. equally just, Sks. 670. jafn-rífligr, adj. (-liga, adv.), as large, Lv. 75. jafn-ríkr, adj. as rich, equally mighty. jafn-rjóðr, adj. as ruddy, Hkr. i. 102. jafn-rúmr, adj. equally large, Bjarn. jafn-ræði, n. an equal match, Fms. ii. 22, Glúm. 350, Nj. 49, Gþl. 215. jafn-röskr, adj. as brisk, as quick, Fms. iii. 225, vi. 96. jafn-saman, adv.; fyrir þessa hugsan alla jafnsaman, all at once, all together, Fms. i. 185, Ld. 326, Ó. H. 46, Stj. 86, 121, Barl. 191. jafn-sannr, adj. equally true, 671. 1, Edda 19, Stj. 471. jafn-sárr, adj. as sore, as smarting, Mar. jafn-seinn, adj. as slow. jafn-sekr, adj. just as guilty, Grág. ii. 64, 89. jafn-síðis, adv. along with. jafn-síðr, adj. as long, of a garment (síðr), Stj. 563. jafn-sjúkr, adj. as sick, Fms. v. 324. jafn-skammr, adj. as short, Al. 129. jafn-skarpliga, adv. (-ligr, adj.), as briskly, Nj. 199, v. l. jafn-skarpr, adj. as sharp, as keen. jafn-skipti, n. equal, fair dealing. jafn-skiptiliga, adv. (-ligr, adj.), equally, mutually, Stj. 159. jafn-skiptr, part. equally shared. jafn-skjótr, adj. as swift, Fms. vii. 169, Rb. 454:—jafn-skjótt, neut. as adv. immediately, at once, Eg. 87, 291, 492, Fms. ii. 10; jafnskjótt sem, as soon as, Nj. 5, Barl. 176, Karl. 409, 441. jafn-skygn, adj. as clear-sighted, 655 xiii. A, Bjarn. 59. jafn-skyldliga, adv. (-ligr, adj.), as dutifully, Ver. 3. jafn-skyldr, adj. equally bound or obliged, Grág. ii. 362, 403, Gþl. 70, 477, Fms. vii. 274. jafn-sköruliga, adv. (-ligr, adj.), equally bold, Nj. 199. jafn-slétta, u, f. even, level ground. jafn-sléttr, adj. equally level, Stj. 79: as easily, Fas. ii. 48. jafn-slægr, adj. as cunning, Fær. 99. jafn-snarpr, adj. (-snarpligr, adj., -liga, adv.), as sharp, Fms. vi. 156. jafn-snarr, adj. as alert. jafn-snart, adj., neut. as adv., as soon, instantly, Fas. iii. 434, Matth. xxvii. 48. jafn-snauðr, adj. as poor. jafn-snemma, adv. at the very same moment, of a coincidence, Eg. 425, Nj. 253, Fms. vi. 221; allir j., all at once, ix. 506, xi. 368 ( both together); vóru þessir atburðir margir jafnsnemma, en sumir litlu fyrr eðr síðar, Hkr. ii. 368. jafn-snjallr, adj. equal, Glúm., Bjarn. (in a verse). jafn-spakr, adj. equally wise, Hm. 53. jafn-sparr, adj. as saving, as close, Grág. i. 197, 222. jafn-sterkr, adj. as strong, Fms. i. 43. jafn-stirðr, adj. as stiff. jafn-stórlátr, adj. as proud, Ld. 116. jafn-stórliga, adv. (-ligr, adj.), as proudly, Ölk. 34. jafn-stórr, adj. as big, as great. jafn-stórættaðr, adj. of equally high birth, Fms. iv. 26. jafn-stríðr, adj. as hard, severe, Sks. 639. jafn-stuttr, adj. equally short, brief. jafn-syndligr, adj. as sinful, Sks. 674. jafn-sætr, adj. as sweet, Fb. i. 539. jafn-sætti, n. an agreement on equal terms, Nj. 21, Sturl. iii 253, Fb. i. 126. jafn-tamr, adj. equally alert. jafn-tefli, n. an equal, drawn game, Vígl. 32. jafn-tengdr, part. in equal degrees of affinity, Grág. ii. 183. jafn-tíðhjalat, n. part. as much talked about, Nj. 100. jafn-tíðrætt, n. adj. = jafntíðhjalat, Nj. 100. jafn-tíguliga, adv. (-ligr, adj.), equally lordly, Fms. x. 109. jafn-títt, n. adj. as often, as frequent, Niðrst. 10. jafn-torogætr, adj. as rarely to be got, choice, Bs. i. 143. jafn-torsótligr, adj. as hard to get at, Fms. x. 358. jafn-trauðr, adj. as unwilling. jafn-traustr, adj. as much to be trusted, Fms. vi. 244. jafn-trúr, jafn-tryggr, adj. as faithful. jafn-undarligr, adj. (-liga, adv.), as strange, Sks. 80. jafn-ungr, adj. as young, Fms. iii. 60, iv. 383. jafn-úbeint, n. adj. as far from the mark, of a bad shot, Fms. viii. 140. jafn-úfærr, adj. as unpassable, Sturl. iii. 163. jafn-úhefnisamr, adj. as tame, Rb. 366. jafn-úráðinn, part. as irresolute, Grett. 153. jafn-úspakr, adj. as unruly, Sturl. ii. 63. jafn-útlagr, adj. having to lay out the same fine, N. G. L. i. 158. jafn-vandhæfr, adj. as dangerous to keep, treat, Grág. i. 89. jafn-vandliga, adv. as carefully, Grág. ii. 249. jafn-varliga, adv. (-ligr, adj.), as warily, Fms. vii. 127. jafn-varmr, adj. as warm, Sks. 217. jafn-varr, adj. as well aware, as much on one’s guard, Dropl. 28. jafn-vaskliga, adv. as gallantly, Fms. vii. 127, Ld. 272. jafn-vaskligr, adj. as gallant. jafn-vaskr, adj. as bold, Str. 3. jafn-vátr, adj. equally wet. jafn-veginn, part. of full weight, Stj. 216. jafn-vegit, n. a law phrase, used when an equal number has been slain on both sides, in which case there were no further proceedings, Glúm. 383, Fas. ii. 208. jafn-vel, adv. as well, equally well, Nj. 48, Eg. 111, Gþl. 354: likewise, hafa fyrirgört fé ok friði ok jafnvel óðals-jörðum sínum, 142; en þenna eið skulu jafnvel biskupar ábyrgjask við Guð …, jafnvel sem ( as well as) hinir úlærðu, 57; jafnvel af sænum sem af landinu, Al. 2; ok jamvel sendir jarl þeim mönnum orð, sem …, Fms. xi. 120: even, dögföll um nætr jafnvel at heiðskírum veðrum, Stj. 17; jafnvel eptir þat er þau misgörðu, 40; jafnvel sýniliga, j. oss önduðum, 9, Bs. i. 549, Barl. 170, 176, Gísl. 83; this last sense is very freq. in mod. usage. jafn-velviljaðr, part. as well wishing, Sks. 312. jafn-vesall, adj. as wretched, Krók. 54. jafn-virði, n. equal wirth, Bs. i. 9, Al. 48. jafn-vægi, n. equal weight, equilibrium, Hkr. ii. 250, Fas. i. 121; bóandi ok húsfreyja j. sitt, i. e. both of them equally, N. G. L. i. 6. jafn-vægja, ð, to weigh the same as another, Fms. iii. 120. jafn-vægr, adj. of equal weight, Sks. 644. jafn-vænn, adj. equally fine, handsome, promising, Fms. x. 429, Sturl. iii. 67. jafn-vætta, t, to weigh against, counterbalance, Stj. 13, Þorst. Síðu H. 14. jafn-yrða, ð, with dat. to altercate, bandy words, Sturl. iii. 213. jafn-þarfr, adj. as useful, Arnor. jafn-þéttr, adj. pressed as closely together. jafn-þjófgefinn, adj. as thievish. jafn-þolinmóðr, adj. as patient, Rb. 366. jafn-þolinn, adj. as enduring. jafn-þreyttr, part. as weary. jafn-þrifinn, adj. as cleanly. jafn-þröngr, adj. as tight. jafn-þungr, adj. as heavy, pressing, Fms. v. 264, Stj. 278. jafn-þurr, adj. equally dry. jafn-þykkr, adj. as thick, Hkr. iii. 159. jafn-þyrstr, part. as thirsty. jafn-æfr, adj. as impetuous. jafn-æstr, part. equally excited, Band. 34 new Ed. jafn-örr, adj. as eager, as liberal. jafn-öruggr, adj. as firm, steadfast.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > JAFN

  • 14 πολύς

    πολύς, [dialect] Att. πολλή, πολύ; gen. πολλοῦ, ῆς, ou=; dat. πολλῷ, ῇ, ῷ; acc. πολύν, πολλήν, πολύ:—[dialect] Ion. [full] πολλός Anacr.43.3,
    A

    πολλή, πολλόν Xenoph.9

    , Democr.219, Hp.VM1, Herod.3.19; also in Trag., S.Ant.86, Tr. 1196; acc. πολλόν, πολλήν, πολλόν: Hdt. uses the [dialect] Ion. forms, but codd. have

    πολύν 2.121

    .δ, 3.57, v.l. in 6.125,

    πολύ 2.106

    ,3.38,6.72,7.46, 160 ( πολύ also in Heraclit.114, Democr. 244):—both sets of forms are found in [dialect] Ep., also gen. sg.

    πολέος Il.4.244

    , etc.: nom. pl.

    πολέες 2.417

    , al., once [var] contr.

    πολεῖς 11.708

    ; gen. πολέων (trisyll.) 5.691, (disyll.) 16.655; dat.

    πολέσι 10.262

    ,al.;

    πολέσσι 13.452

    , al.;

    πολέεσσι 9.73

    , Od.5.54, Hes.Op. 119, etc.; acc. πολέας (trisyll.) Il.3.126, etc., (disyll.) 1.559,2.4, Hes.Op. 580 (freq. with v.l. πολεῖς Il.15.66, etc.); in later [dialect] Ep. πολέες is used as fem., Call.Del.28, also

    πολέας Id.Dian.42

    , A.R.3.21; neut.

    πολέα Q.S.1.74

     (v. infr.):—[dialect] Ep. also have [full] πουλύς (once in Hes., Th. 190, also Thgn. 509, sts. fem. in Hom.,

    πουλὺν ἐφ' ὑγρήν Il.10.27

    ,

    ἠέρα πουλύν 5.776

    ), neut.

    πουλύ Od.19.387

    ; these forms are found in codd. of Hp. and Aret. (who uses πολύ, πουλύ and πολλόν in neut.), but not in Hdt.:— Lyr. and Trag. (lyr.) sts. use [dialect] Ep. forms, dat. sg.

    πολεῖ A.Supp. 745

    ; nom. pl.

    πολέες B.10.17

    ; neut.

    πολέα A.Ag. 723

    ;

    πολέων E.Hel. 1332

     (fem., B.5.100); dat. pl.

    πολέσι E.IT 1263

    . [ῠalways.]
    I of Number, many, Il.2.417, etc.; ἐκ πολλῶν, opp. ἐξὀλίγων, Hes.Th. 447; τριηκόντων ἐτέων πόλλ' ἀπολείπων wanting many of thirty years, Id.Op. 696;

    παρῆσάν τινες, καὶ πολλοί γε Pl.Phd. 58d

    ;

    οὐ πολλοί τινες A.Pers. 510

    : with Nouns of multitude,

    πουλὺς ὅμιλος Od.8.109

    ;

    πλῆθος πολλόν Hdt.1.141

    ;

    ἔθνος πολλόν Id.4.22

    ; later πουλὺ.. ἐπ' ἔτος many a year, AP6.235 (Thall.);

    π. ἦν ὁ καταπλέων Plb.15.26.10

    ; of anything often repeated,

    περὶ σέο λόγος ἀπῖκται π. Hdt.1.30

    ;

    πολλὸν ἦν τοῦτο τὸ ἔπος Id.2.2

    , cf. 3.137, etc.;

    πολὺ.. τὸ σὸν ὄνομα διήκει πάντας S.OC 305

    ;

    τούτῳ πολλῷ χρήσεται τῷ λόγῳ

     often,

    D.21.29

    ; τοῦτο ἐπιεικῶς πολὺ νῦν ἐστι is fairly frequent, Luc.Hist.Conscr.15.
    2 of Size, Degree, Intensity, much, mighty, ὄμβρος, νιφετός, Il.10.6;

    π. ὕπνος Od.15.394

    ;

    πῦρ.. π. 10.359

    ; π. ὑμέναιος a loud song, Il.18.493; π. ὀρυμαγδός, ῥοῖζος, etc., 2.810, Od.9.315, etc.; π. ἀνάγκη strong necessity, E.Ph. 1674; π. γέλως, βοή, much or great, S.Aj. 303, 1149; μωρία ib. 745; ὄλβος, αἰδώς, A.Pers. 251, Ag. 948;

    ἀσφάλεια Th.2.11

    ; ἀλογία, εὐήθεια, Pl.Phd. 67e, Phdr. 275c, etc.
    b rarely of a single person, great, mighty,

    μέγας καὶ πολλὸς ἐγένεο Hdt.7.14

    , cf. E.Hipp.1; ὁ π. σοφιστής, στρατηγός, Chor.p.23 B., Id.in Rev.Phil.1.68;

    ὁ πάντα π. Id.p.27

     B.; ὁ πολύς alone, of Hippocrates, Gal.19.530; of Trajan, Lyd.Mag.2.28;

    ῥώμην σώματος πολύς D.H.2.42

    .
    c joined with a Verb, Κύπρις γὰρ οὐ φορητός, ἢν πολλὴ ῥυῇ if she flow with full stream, metaph. from a river, E.Hipp. 443;

    θρασυνομένῳ καὶ πολλῷ ῥέοντι D. 18.136

    ; from the wind, ὡς π. ἔπνει καὶ λαμπρός was blowing strong and fresh, Id.25.57, cf. Ar.Eq. 760, AP11.49 (Even.): generally, with might or force,

    ὅταν ὁ θεὸς.. ἔλθῃ πολύς E.Ba. 300

    ;

    ἢν π. παρῇ Id.Or. 1200

    ;

    π. καὶ τολμηρὸς ἅνθρωπος D.40.53

    : with part. and εἰμί, πολλὸς ἦν λισσόμενος was all entreaties, Hdt.9.91;

    ἦν πολλὸς ὑπὸ παντὸς ἀνδρὸς αἰνεόμενος Id.1.98

    ;

    Ἐτεοκλέης ἂν εἷς π... ὑμνοῖθ' A.Th.6

    ;

    π. ἐνέκειτο λέγων Hdt.7.158

    ;

    π. τοῖς συμβεβηκόσιν ἔγκειται D.18.199

    ; also

    π. ἦν ἐν τοῖσι λόγοισι Hdt.8.59

    ;

    πρὸς ταῖς παρασκευαῖς Plb.5.49.7

    ;

    ἐπὶ τῇ τιμωρίᾳ D.S.14.107

    : without a Prep.,

    π. ἦν τοῖς ἐπαίνοις καὶ ἐπαχθής Aeschin.2.41

    ; π. μὲν γὰρ ὁ Φίλιππος ἔσται will be often mentioned, Id.1.166.
    3 of Value or Worth,

    πολέος δέ οἱ ἄξιος ἔσται Il.23.562

    , cf. Od.8.405;

    πολλοῦ ἄξιος X.An.4.1.28

    , etc.;

    πολλῶν ἄξιος Ar. Pax 918

    ; περὶ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσθαί τι, Lat. magni facere, cf.

    περί A.

     IV; ἐπὶ πολλῷ at a high price, D.8.53;

    ἐπὶ π. ἐρραθυμηκότες Id.1.15

    ; πολύ ἐστί τι it is worth much, of great conscquence, X.Oec.18.7.
    4 of Space, large, wide, π. χώρη, πεδίον, Il.23.520,4.244, etc.; πόντος, πέλαγος, Hes.Op. 635, S.Ph. 635;

    χῶρος πλατὺς καὶ π. Hdt.4.39

    ; λίμνη μεγάλη τε καὶ π. ib. 109;

    π. ἡ Σικελία Th. 7.13

    ;

    π. ἡ Ἑλλάς Pl.Phd. 78a

    , etc.; πολλὸς ἔκειτο he lay outstretched wide, Il.7.156, cf. 11.307; π. κέλευθος a far way, A.Pers. 748 (troch.): without

    ὁδός, πολλὴ μὲν εἰς Ἡράκλειαν.., πολλὴ δὲ εἰς Χρυσόπολιν.. X.An.6.3.16

    : διὰ πολλοῦ, ἐκ πολλοῦ, v. infr. IV.
    5 of Time, long,

    χρόνος S.Aj. 1402

     (anap.), etc.;

    πολὺν χρόνον Il.2.343

    , etc.;

    οὐ π. χρ. S.Ph. 348

    , etc.; so

    πολλοῦ χρόνου Ar.Pl.98

    ;

    χρόνῳ πολλῷ S.Tr. 228

    ; διὰ πολλοῦ (sc. χρόνου) Luc.Nec.15;

    ἐκ πολλοῦ Th.1.58

    , D. 21.41; πρὸ πολλοῦ long before, D.S.14.43;

    οὐ μετὰ πολύ Luc.Tox.54

    ; ἔτι πολλῆς νυκτός while still quite night, Th.8.101; πολλῆς ὥρας late in the day, Plb.5.8.3;

    ἤδη ὥρα πολλή Ev.Marc.6.35

    ;

    ἔτι ἔστιν ἡμέρα πολλή LXX Ge.29.7

    .
    II Special usages:
    1 c. partit.gen., e.g. πολλοὶ Τρώων, for πολλοὶ Τρῶες, Il.18.271, etc.; neut., πολλὸν σαρκός, for πολλὴ σάρξ, Od.19.450: in Prose, the Adj. generally takes the gender of the gen.,

    τὸν πολλὸν τοῦ χρόνου Hdt.1.24

    ; τῆς γῆς οὐ πολλήν Th.6.7;

    τῆς ἀθάρης πολλήν Ar.Pl. 694

    ;

    πολλὴν τῆς χώρας X.Cyr. 3.2.2

    ;

    ὁ π. τοῦ λόγου D.44.6

    ; v. infr. 3.
    2 joined with another Adj.,

    πολλὰ δυστερπῆ κακά A.Ch. 277

    , cf. 585 (lyr.), etc.: more freq. joined to another Adj. by καί, πολέες τε καὶ ἐσθλοί many men and good, Il.6.452, etc.;

    πολέες τε καὶ ἄλκιμοι 21.586

    ;

    πολλὰ καὶ ἐσθλά Od.2.312

    ; παλαιά τε πολλά τε ib. 188;

    ἄκοσμά τε π. τε Il.2.213

    ;

    πολλαί γε.. καὶ ἄλλαι Hes.Th. 363

    ;

    π. τε καὶ κακά Hdt.4.167

    , etc.;

    π. κἀγαθά Ar.Th. 351

     (but

    π. ἀγαθά IG12.76.45

    );

    π. καὶ ἀνόσια Pl.R. 416e

    ;

    π. καὶ μακάρια Id.Plt. 269d

    ;

    π. καὶ πονηρά X.Mem.2.9.6

    ;

    πολλά τε καὶ δεινά Id.An.5.5.8

    ;

    μεγάλα καὶ π. D.36.22

    ; π. καὶ καλοὺς (s.v.l.) κινδύνους, π. καὶ καλὰ παραδείγματα, Din.1.109.
    3 with the Art. (in Hom. without the Art., Il.2.483, 5.334, 22.28), of persons or things well known, Ἑλένα μία τὰς πολλάς, τὰς πάνυ π. ψυχὰς ὀλέσασ' those many lives, A.Ag. 1456 (lyr.), cf. S.OT 845, Th.3.87, Pl.Phd. 88a, Ti. 54a, Act.Ap.26.24: with abstract Nouns,

    τᾶς πολλᾶς ὑγιείας A. Ag. 1001

     (lyr., dub.);

    τὸ πολλόν

     numbers,

    Hdt.1.136

    .
    b οἱ π. the many, i.e. the greater number,

    Ἀθηναῖοι.. ἀπῆλθον οἱ πολλοί Th. 1.126

    , cf. 3.32, etc. (so in sg., ὁ πολλὸς λόγος the prevailing report, Hdt.1.75);

    τοῖς π. κριταῖς S.Aj. 1243

    : with gen., τοῖς π. βροτῶν ib. 682;

    οἱ π. τῶν ἀνθρώπων X.Cyr.8.2.24

    ;

    οἱ πολλοὶ ἅπαντες

     far the most,

    Hp.

    Aër.20 (v.l. μάλιστα for ἅπαντες); for τὰ πολλὰ πάντα, v. infr. 111.1a: hence οἱ πολλοί the people, the commonalty, opp. οἱ μείζω κεκτημένοι, Th.1.6; opp. οἱ κομψότεροι, Pl.R. 505b; οἱ π., = Lat. plebs, D.S.20.36; τῶν πολλῶν εἷς one of the multitude, D.21.96; also

    ὁ π. λεώς Luc.JTr.53

    , cf. Rh.Pr.17;

    ὁ π. ὅμιλος Id.Luct.2

    . Hdn.1.1.1, etc.;

    ὁ π. δῆμος Luc.Apol.15

    ;

    ὁ π. ὄχλος Ph. 2.4

    ; ὁ π. alone, = vulgus, v.l. in D.S.2.29; the ordinary man, Epicur.Fr. 478, Phld.Rh.2.154S.;

    νίμμα ὁ π. λέγει, ἡμεῖς ἀπόνιπτρον λέγομεν Phryn.170

    , cf.369; ὁ ἐμπαθὴς καὶ π. ἄνθρωπος 'l'homme moyen sensuel', Herm.in Phdr.p.146A.; ὁ π. ἄνθρωπος (with pl. Verb) the average man, opp. τὸ ἐξαίρετον, Eun.Hist.p.216 D.
    c τὸ πολύ, c. gen.,

    τῆς στρατιῆς τὸ πολλόν Hdt.8.100

    ;

    τὸ π. τοῦ χρόνου Hp.

    Aër. 20;

    τῶν λογάδων τὸ π. Th.5.73

    ;

    τῶν ὅπλων τὸ π. Pl.Plt. 288b

    ; also

    ὁ στρατὸς ὁ πολλός Hdt.1.102

    ;

    ἡ δύναμις ἡ π. Th.1.24

    ; ὁ π. βίοτος the best part of life, S.El. 185 (lyr.).
    d

    τὰ πολλά

     the most,

    Od.22.273

    , and perh. 2.58, 17.537 (elsewh. in Hom. πολλά, as Subst., means much riches, great possessions, Il.11.684, Od.19.195);

    τὰ π. τοῦ πολέμου Th.2.13

    ; πρὸς τὸ τῶν π. μέγεθος in regard to the size of the average, Arist.Rh. 1363b11.
    4 pl. πολλά very much, too much, πολλὰ πράσσειν, = πολυπραγμονεῖν, E.Supp. 576, Ar.Ra. 228;

    π. ἔπαθεν Pi.O.13.63

    , etc.; π. ἔρξαι τινά to do one much harm, A. Th. 923 (lyr.).
    6 πολύς repeated,

    ἦ πολλὰ πολλοῖς εἰμι διάφορος βροτῶν E.Med. 579

    , cf. A.Supp. 451;

    τὰ μὲν οὖν πολλὰ πολλοῦ χρόνου διηγήσασθαι Pl.R. 615a

    , etc.; πολλοῦ πολύς, v. infr. 111.1b: with Advbs. πολλάκις, πολλαχῇ, etc. (qq. v., cf. 111.1 e).
    III Adverbial usages:
    a neut. πολύ ([dialect] Ion. πολλόν) , πολλά, much,

    πόλλ' ἀεκαζομένη Il.6.458

    , etc.; strengthd.,

    μάλα πολλά 8.22

    , al.;

    πάνυ πολύ Pl.Alc.1.119c

    ;

    πολύ τι Id.R. 484d

    ; esp. of repetition, often, Il.2.798, Od.13.29, Hes.Op. 322; so of earnest commands and entreaties, πολλὰ κελεύων, πόλλ' ἐπέτελλον, πολλὰ λισσομένη, πολλὰ μάλ' εὐχομένω, Il.5.528, 11.782, 5.358, 9.183: with the Art.,

    τὸ πολύ

     for the most part,

    Pl.Prt. 315a

    , etc. (but with numerals, at most, Vett. Val.9.5);

    ὡς τὸ π. X.Mem.1.1.10

    , etc.;

    τὰ πολλά Th.1.13

    , 2.11,87, etc.;

    ὡς τὰ π. Id.5.65

    , etc.;

    τὰ π. πάντα Hdt.1.203

    , 2.35, 5.67.
    b of Degree, far, very much,

    ἀπέφυγε πολλὸν τοὺς διώκοντας Id.6.82

    : also abs. gen. πολλοῦ very,

    θρασὺς εἶ πολλοῦ Ar.Nu. 915

    , cf. Eup.74;

    πολλοῦ δύνασθαι Alciphr.1.9

     (s.v.l.); πολλοῦ πολύς, πολλὴ πολλοῦ, much too much, Ar.Eq. 822,Ra. 1046.
    c of Space, a great way, far,

    οὐ πολλόν Hdt.1.104

    ;

    πολὺ οὐκ ἐξῄεσαν Th.1.15

    , etc.
    d of Time, long,

    ὡς πολλὸν τοῦτο ἐγίνετο Hdt.4.126

    , cf. 6.129.
    e of Probability, ἐὰν πολλὰ πολλῶν τέκῃς, perh. = ἐὰν πολλάκις τέκῃς,POxy. 744.9 (i B.C./i A.D.);

    ἐάν τι πολλὰ πολλάκις πάθω Ar.Ec. 1105

    .
    2 πολύ is freq. joined with Adjs. and Advbs.,
    a with a [comp] Comp. to increase its comp. force, πολὺ μεῖζον, πολλὸν παυρότεροι, Il.1.167, Od.14.17; πολὺ μᾶλλον much more, Il.9.700; πολύ τι μᾶλλον f.l. in D.H. Comp.4 (p.22 U.-R.): with words, esp. Preps., between πολύ and its Adj., π. ἐν πλέονι, π. ἐπὶ δεινοτέρῳ, Th.1.35, Pl.R. 589e;

    πολὺ ἔτι ἐκ λαμπροτέρων Id.Phd. 110c

    ;

    π. σὺν φρονήματι μείζονι X.An.3.1.22

    , cf.3.2.30, Smp.1.4 (but the Prep. freq. comes first,

    ἐκ π. ἐλάττονος And.1.109

    , etc.); so πολλῷ is freq. used with the [comp] Comp., by far, A.Pr. 337, Hdt. 1.134, etc.;

    π. μᾶλλον S.OT 1159

    , Pl.Phd. 80e; οὐ πολλῷ τεῳ ἀσθενέστερον not a great deal weaker, Hdt.1.181, cf. 2.48,67, etc.: πολύ with all words implying comparison, πολὺ πρίν much sooner, Il.9.250;

    π. πρό 4.373

    : with the comp. Verb

    φθάνω, ἦ κε πολὺ φθαίη 13.815

    ; so πολὺ προβέβηκας ἁπάντων, πολὺ προμάχεσθαι ἁπάντων, 6.125, 11.217;

    προὔλαβε πολλῷ Th.7.80

    : with βούλομαι, = prefer,

    ἡμῖν πολὺ βούλεται ἢ Δαναοῖσι νίκην Il.17.331

    , cf. Od.17.404; πολύ γε in answers, after a [comp] Comp. or [comp] Sup., ἀργὸς.. γενήσεται μᾶλλον; Answ.

    πολύ γε Pl.R. 421d

    , cf. 387e, etc.
    b with a [comp] Sup., πολὺ πρώτιστος, πολλὸν ἄριστος, far the first, etc., Il.2.702, 1.91, etc.;

    προθυμία π. τολμηροτάτη Th.1.74

    , etc.;

    πολλόν τι μάλιστα Hdt.1.56

    ;

    π. δή, π. δὴ γυναῖκ' ἀρίσταν E.Alc. 442

     (lyr.), cf. Ar.Av. 539, Archestr.Fr.34.9; also

    πολλῷ πλεῖστοι Hdt.5.92

    .έ, 8.42;

    π. μεγίστους Id.4.82

    .
    c with a Positive, to add force to the Adj.,

    ὦ πολλὰ μὲν τάλαινα, πολλὰ δ' αὖ σοφή A.Ag. 1295

    ; also

    ἐς πόλλ' ἀθλία πέφυκ' ἐγώ E.Ph. 619

     (troch.);

    πολὺ ἀφόρητος Luc.DMeretr. 9.3

    ; cf. πλεῖστος.
    IV with Preps.,
    1 διὰ πολλοῦ at a great interval of Space or Time, v. διά A.1.5, 11.2.
    2 εἰς πολύ for a long time, Plot.2.1.3.
    3 ἐκ πολλοῦ from a great distance, Th.4.32, etc.; for a long time, v. ἐκ 11.1.
    4 ἐπὶ πολύ,
    a over a great space, far,

    οὐκ ἐπὶ πολλόν Hdt.2.32

    ; ἐπὶ π. τῆς θαλάσσης, τῆς χώρας, Th.1.50,4.3, etc.; to a great extent, Id.1.6,18,3.83; cf.

    ποιέω B.11.2

    .
    b for a long time, long, Id.5.16;

    τῆς ἡμέρας ἐπὶ π. Id.7.38

    , cf. 39.
    c

    ὡς ἐπὶ π.

     very generally,

    Id.1.12

     (v.l.), Archyt. ap. Stob.3.1.195;

    ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ π.

     for the most part,

    Th.2.13

    , Pl.Plt. 294e, etc.;

    μὴ καθ' ἓν ἕκαστον, ἀλλ' ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ π. Isoc.4.154

    ;

    τό γ' ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ π. Id.8.35

    .
    5 παρὰ πολύ by far, v. παρά C.111.5.
    6 περὶ πολλοῦ, v. supr. 1.3.
    7 πρὸ πολλοῦ far before,

    τῆς πόλεως D.H.9.35

    ; also of Time, οὐ πρὸ π. not long before, Id.5.62.
    8 σὺν πολλῷ in no small degree, only too much or too well, Hld.2.8,9.20, 10.9 (cf. CR41.53).
    V for [comp] Comp. πλείων, πλέων, [comp] Sup. πλεῖστος, v. sub vocc. (Cf. Skt. purú-, Goth. filu 'much'.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > πολύς

  • 15 tot

        tot adj. num indecl.    [3 TA-], so many, such a number of: ab dis tot et tantas res optare, quot et quantas, etc.: quot homines, tot causae: si tot consulibus meruisset, quotiens ipse consul fuisset. — So many, so very many, such a great number of: reliquae tot et tantae et tam graves civitates: tot viri ac tales: ad haec tot tam necopinata incerti stupentesque, L.: Tot me inpediunt curae, T.: tot civitatum coniuratio, Cs.: tot caede procorum Admonitus non est, O.: quae cum viderem tot vestigiis inpressa, ut in his errari non posset.—As subst m., so many men: an timebant, ne tot unum... superare non possent?: Ex tot in Atridis pars quota laudis erat? O.
    * * *
    I
    as/so often, so many times, such a great number of times; that number of times
    II
    so many, such a number of; as many, so many; such a great number of

    Latin-English dictionary > tot

  • 16 mange

    a lot, many, many a, much
    * * *
    adj a good (el. great) many,
    T a lot of, lots of,
    (især i negative el. spørgende udtryk, samt efter too, so, as) many (
    fx how many? not very many; one too many; as many as you like);
    F many ( fx many brave men died);
    (foran ikke-tælleligt sb) a great deal of,
    T a lot of, lots of ( fx furniture, money, information, advice),
    (især negativt el. spørgende etc, cf many ovf) much;
    F much ( fx much advice goes unheeded);
    (= mange mennesker) a lot of people,
    F many (people) ( fx there are many who think that it is wrong);
    [ de mange mennesker han kender] all the many people he knows;
    (se også klokke, II. tak).

    Danish-English dictionary > mange

  • 17 multus

        multus adj.    (for comp. and sup. in use see plūs, plūrimus).    I. Plur., with subst., or with adjec. used as subst, many, a great number: multi alii, T.: multae sunt artes eximiae: tam multis verbis scribere, at such length: Quid multa verba? in short, T.: multa acerba habuit ille annus.—With other adjj., many: multae et magnae contentiones: multis magnisque praesidiis perditis, S.: multi et varii timores, L.: vectigalīs multos ac stipendiarios liberavit: multae liberae civitates, republics: multa libera capita, freemen, L.: multa secunda proelia, victories, L.: multa maiores magna et gravia bella gesserunt: multis suppliciis iustis: utebatur hominibus improbis multis: prodigia multa foeda, L.—As subst m., many men, many: multi pecunias coëgerunt: alter multos fefellit: pro multis dicere.—The multitude, mass, common people, vulgar: unus de multis esse: orator unus e multis, commonplace: numerari in multis, in the herd (of orators): e multis una sit tibi, no better than others, O.: sum unus Multorum, H. —As subst n. (only nom. and acc.), many things, much: quam multa te deficiant vides: quid multis moror? many words, T.: ne multa, in short: quid multa? H.—    II. Sing., distributive, many a (poet.): trudit multā cane Apros in plagas, H.: multā victimā, V.: multā prece prosequi, H.—Of quantity, much, abundant, large, considerable, extensive: exstructa mensa multā carne: multum pro re p. sanguinem effudistis: multa et lauta supellex: lingua Gallica, quā multā utebatur, spoke fluently, Cs.: multus fluens, glibly, H.—In excess, superfluous: supellex modica, non multa, N.: qui in aliquo genere multus est, prolix.—Frequent, frequently, engaged, busy, diligent: ad vigilias multus adesse, S.: cum Timaeo multum fuisse: Multa viri virtus animo recursat, V.—Strong, influential: adeo teneris consuescere multum est, so strong is habit, V.—Of time, full, late: ad multum diem, till late in the day: multa iam dies erat, L.: multā nocte, late at night: multo mane, very early.
    * * *
    multa -um, -, plurimus -a -um ADJ
    much, many, great, many a; large, intense, assiduous; tedious

    Latin-English dictionary > multus

  • 18 renfort

    renfort [ʀɑ̃fɔʀ]
    masculine noun
    • à grand renfort de gestes/d'explications with a great many gestures/explanations
    • à grand renfort de citations/d'arguments with the help of a great many quotations/arguments
    * * *
    ʀɑ̃fɔʀ
    nom masculin
    1) Armée reinforcement
    2) gén support [U]
    4) Technologie support
    * * *
    ʀɑ̃fɔʀ
    1. nm
    1) MILITAIRE reinforcements pl

    Un renfort de 500 hommes est arrivé. — Reinforcements of 500 men arrived.

    2) fig (= contribution, soutien) backing

    Il ne pourra pas être élu sans le renfort de ses alliés. — He can't be elected without the backing of his allies.

    2. renforts nmpl
    * * *
    renfort nm
    1 Mil reinforcement; envoyer/attendre des renforts to send/wait for reinforcements; en renfort as reinforcements;
    2 gén support ¢; avoir besoin de renfort to need support; aller chercher/attendre des renforts to go and get/to wait for support; en renfort in support; à grand renfort de qch with a lot of sth; la campagne a débuté à grand renfort de publicité the campaign started with a lot of publicity; annoncé à grand renfort de publicité much heralded;
    3 Sport substitute;
    4 Tech support; une pièce de renfort a support piece;
    5 Cout ( de coude) elbow patch; ( de genou) knee patch; ( d'ourlet) hemming tape; ( de poche) reinforcement.
    [rɑ̃fɔr] nom masculin
    1. [aide] reinforcement
    2. [pièce de tissu] lining
    collant avec renforts aux talons/à l'entrejambe tights with reinforced heels/gusset
    ————————
    renforts nom masculin pluriel
    [matériel] (fresh) supplies
    à grand renfort de locution prépositionnelle
    ————————
    de renfort locution adjectivale
    reinforcement (modificateur)

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > renfort

  • 19 MEÐAL

    (á m., í m.), prep. with gen., among, between; m. vár or vár á m., among us; sat þar Þórhalla m. brúða, Th. sat between the brides; ellipt., ganga meðal, í m., to intercede as peacemaker (gekk þá Njáll í m., svá at hvárir handsöluðu ödrum grið).
    * * *
    adv. with gen., and á meðal, í meðal:—among, between; á meðal vár, or vár á meðal, among us; á meðal okkar (dual), Bkv. 19; hann settisk niðr á meðal þeirra, Nj. 48; sat þá Þorgerðr meðal brúða, 51; meðal þín ok annarra, 85; meðal Hafrafells ok Króksfjarðar-múla, Gullþ. 3; sumir verða sendir landa meðal, from one land to another, Sks. 54; á meðal anna, Grág. ii. 261; á meðal enna tveggja sömu samhljóða, á meðal enna líkustu greina, Skálda 162: ellipt., mál öll er meðal fóru, Vsp. 30; fannsk þat ekki í tali at þar hefði missætti verit í meðal, Nj. 48; þá gékk Njáll í meðal, N. interceded as peacemaker, 105.
    II. metaph., at hann vili nema litla skynsemd heldr enn önga þá er á meðal verðr ennar meiri (= meðal anna?), i. e. when there is a little leisure from graver matters, Skálda 169 (Thorodd); þat er áðr stendr á meðal ykkar má!s, whatsoever is unsettled between you, Fms. xi. 21.
    B. In a great many compds, denoting what is intermediate, between, in the middle, the average; or ironically, not over-much, middling; or, lastly, with a negative in the reverse sense, see the following:
    I. meðal-auki, a, m. (mod. milligjöf), what is given in the bargain, Ld. 146, Lv. 43. meðal-dagr, m. a day between, Stj. 280: a holy day of second degree, Hom. 142; thus the sixth, the seventh, and from the ninth to the twelfth day of Yule were the middle days, in Easter the second and third day, N. G. L. ii, 358, K. Þ. K. 98: the days between the two spring tides at the first and the last quarter of the moon are called meðaldagar, Rb. 444. Meðal-fell, n. Middle-fell, a local name. Meðal-fells-strönd, f., a local name. Meðalfells-strendingar, m. pl. the men of M., Landn., Sturl. meðal-ferð, f. intercession, Orkn. 270. meðalferðar-maðr, m. an intercessor, Stj. 243. meðal-för, f. = meðalferð, Sturl. ii. 141. meðal-ganga, u, f. intercession, Lv. 71, Sturl. iii. 136: coming between, in a bad sense. Fms. ix. 428, v. l.: intervention between parties fighting, Glúm. 382. meðal-gangi, a, m. an intercessor, Mar. 196, Vídal. meðalgöngu-maðr, m. an intercessor, Th. 24, Finnb. 312. meðal-heimr, m. the middle world, the air, between the sky and the earth, poët., Edda (Gl.) meðal-hóf, n. the right meed and measure; in the saying, vandratað er meðalhófið. meðal-kafli, a, m. the ‘middle-piece,’ the haft of a sword between the two hjalt (q. v.), Eg. 378, 379, Fms. i. 15, iv. 38, Sturl. iii. 283. Meðal-land, n. a land lying between two other lands: a local name, Landn. 267, Nj., in the south-east of Icel. meðal-orpning, f., gramm. an interjection, Skálda 180. meðal-pallr, m. the middle benches in the lögrétta, Nj. 190.
    II. average, of extent, quality, in a great many COMPDS: meðal-hestr, -hross, -kýr, -naut, -sauðr, -ær, etc., an average horse, cow, sheep, etc., Grág. i. 504, Jb. 346. meðal-ár, -sumar, -vetr, an average year, summer, winter, B. K. 20, Grág. ii. 326. meðal-lagi, adv., see below, meðal-maðr, m. an average man, in height, strength, or the like, Fms. vii. 101, 239. meðal-spakr, adj. middling-wise, of average intelligence, Hm. meðal-tal, n. an average number; in the phrase, at meðaltali, in the average.
    III. with a preceding negation, emphasising a word of abuse, as no common scoundrel, i. e. a great scoundrel or the like; ekki meðal-atferðarleysi, no common slovenness, Fs. 32: eigi meðal-farbauti, no middling destroyer, Fms. xi. 146: eigi meðal-fjándi, no middling fiend, ii. 74: ekki meðal-fól, i. e. no slight fool, Gísl. 139: þat ætla ek at þú sér eigi meðal-karl vándr, Band. 26 new Ed.: eigi meðal-klækismenn, Ísl. ii. 71: eigi meðal-mann-níðingr, a great nithing, Fær. 216: eigi meðal-níðingr, id., Eb. 230: eigi meðal-orðaskvak, Fæ 219: eigi meðal-skræfa, a great coward, Fms. vi. 34: eigi meðal-skömm, a great disgrace, Fs. 37: eigi meðal-snápr, Eb. 242: eigi meðal-úspektarmaðr, Rd. 259: eigi meðal-úvinr, Finnb. 242: eigi meðal-vesalingr, Þórð. 52: eigi meðal-þræli, Eg. 714:—rarely in a good sense, þat er ekki meðal-sæmd, ‘tis no common honour, it is a great honour, Fb. ii. 196.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > MEÐAL

  • 20 EN

    * * *
    I)
    conj.
    1) but;
    en heima mun ek sitja, but I will stay at home;
    2) as a copulative, and, = ok;
    ek kann ráðum, Gunnhildar, en kappsemd Egils, I know the devices of G. and (on the other hand) Egil’s eagerness;
    3) = ‘an’, than (óbrigðra vin fær maðr aldregi en mannvit mikit).
    in Norse MSS. = ef, er (rel. pron. and temp. conj.);
    1) if;
    sælar væri sálurnar, en þær vissi, if they knew;
    2) as a rel. pron., = er;
    mína dóttur, en (= er) allra meyja er fegrst, who is the fairest of all maidens;
    * * *
    1.
    disjunctive conj.; in MSS. spelt either en or enn, [a particle peculiar to the Scandin.; in Danish men; in Swedish both men, än, and endast; Norse enn and also men, Ivar Aasen]:—but; en ef hann hefir, þá …, but if he has, then …, Grág. i. 261; en ef menn gefa þeim mat, id.; en heima mun ek sitja, but I will stay at home, Fms. vi. 100; en fjöldi féll, but a great many fell, Fas. ii. 514; eyrum hlýðir en augum skoðar, Hm. 7; en ekki eigu annarra manna orð, Grág. i. 84, 99, 171; en Skíðblaðnir skipa, en jóa Sleipnir, en hunda garmr, Gm. 44; en ór sveita sjár, en ór beinum björg, Vþm. 21; and passim. It is even used with a slight conjunctive sense; þykki mér sem því muni úhægt saman at koma, kappi þínu ok dirfð ‘en’ skaplyndi konungs, methinks it will be hard to make the two things go together, thy vehemence and rashness ‘and’ (on the other hand) the temper of the king, Eg. 521; ek kann ráðum Gunnhildar ‘en’ kappsemd Egils, I know the devices of Gunnhilda ‘and’ (on the other hand) Egil’s eagerness, 257: used in narratives to begin a sentence, merely denoting the progress of the tale, much the same as ‘and,’ cp. the use of auk III, p. 33; thus in Ýt. some verses begin with ‘en,’—En dagskjarr …, 2, 3, 14, 23; En Gunnlaugr grimman tamði, Hlt.; En Hróalds á höfuðbaðmi, Ad. 19, without any disjunctive notion.
    2.
    temporal adv., better spelt enn, [prob. akin to endr and eðr, q. v.]:—yet, still; þú hefir enn eigi ( not yet) heyrða kenning Drottins, Mar. 656 A. ii. 14; vildi hann enn svá, Fms. i. II; at hann mundi enn svá göra, vi. 100; þá ríkir hann enn fyrir mik, Al. 29; til betri tíma en ( than) enn ( still) er kominn, Sks. 596 B.
    2. before a comparative; enn síðarr, still later, N. G. L. i. 94; enn betr, still better; enn fyrr, still later; enn verri, still worse; enn æðri, still worthier; enn hærri, still higher; enn firr, still further off; enn nær, still nearer; enn heldr, still more, Sks. 304: separated from the comparative, enn vóru fleiri dætr Haralds, the daughters of H. were still more, i. e. H. had more daughters yet, Fms. i. 5.
    β. curious is the use of en (usually spelt in or inn) in old poems, viz. before a comparative, where in prose the ‘en’ can be left out without impairing the sense; thus, hélt-a in lengr rúmi, be kept not his place longer, i. e. ran away, Am. 58; ráð en lengr dvelja, to delay no longer, 61; menn in sælli, a happier man, Skv. 3. 18; né in mætri mægð, worthier affinity, id.; mann in harðara = harðara mann, a hardier man, Hbl. 14; nema þú in snotrari sér, unless thou art wiser, Vþm. 7; drekka in meira mjöð, to drink more mead; bíta en breiðara, to bite broader, i. e. eat with better appetite, Þkv. 35; þars þætti skáld in verri, where poets were kept in less honour, Jomsv. S. (in a verse); né in heldr, neither; né hests in heldr, neither for his horse, Hm. 60; né in heldr hugðir sem var Högni, neither are ye minded as H., Gh. 3, Sdm. 36, Hkv. 1. 12, Skv. 1. 21: in prose, eigi in heldr ætla ek, þat …, neither do I think, that …, Nj. 219.
    3. to boot, further, moreover; bolöxar ok enn amboð nokkur, pole-axes and some tools to boot, Dipl. v. 18; ok þat enn, at, and that still more, that, Róm. 302; Ingibjörg hét enn dóttir Haralds, Ingeburg was further Harold’s daughter, Fms. i. 5.
    3.
    or enn, conj., written an in very old MSS., e. g. Hom., Greg., Eluc., but in the great bulk of MSS. en is the standing form, both ancient and modern; [formed by anacope, by dropping the initial þ; Ulf. þanuh; A. S. þanne; Engl. than; Hel. than; O. H. G. danna; Germ. dann, but here almost replaced by ‘als;’ Swed. änn; Dan. end; Norse enn, Ivar Aasen; the anacope is entirely Scandin.]:—than, Lat. quam; heldr faðir an móðir, more father than mother, Eluc. 5; bjartari an sól, brighter than the sun, 45, 52; meira an aðrir, more than others, Greg. 51; víðara an áðr, wider than before, id.; betr an þegja, better than being silent, 96; æðri an þetta, Eluc. 51; annat an annat, one thing rather than another, 50; ljósara an nú, 44; heldr an vér, 17; annat an dauðan, 15; meira an Guð, 13; fyr an, 6; annat an þú ert, 59; framarr an þeir hafa, id.; framar an vesa, 60; heldr an færi eðr fleiri, Hom. 45; heldr an, 63; betra er þagat an mælt, 96; helgari an annarra manna, 126; framar an sín, 135, etc.; cp. Frump. 158–163: ‘en’ however occurs in Hom. 126.
    II. the form ‘en’ (or ‘enn’) occurs passim, Grág. i. 173, ii. 13, Al. 29, Sks. 596 B, N. G. L. i. 32, etc. etc.
    ☞ The particle en differs in sense when placed before or after the comparative; if before, it means still; if after, than; thus, fyrr enn, áðr enn, before, Lat. prinsquam, but enn fyrr, still earlier, sooner; enn heldr, still more, but heldr enn, rather than; enn betr, still better, but betr enn, better than; enn síðar, still later, but síðar enn, later than, etc. Again, there is a difference of sense, when neither en is a comparative; en ef, but if; ef enn, if still, etc.
    4.
    is now and then in MSS., esp. Norse, used = er, ef, q. v., but this is a mere peculiarity or false spelling:
    1. when; mér vórum í hjá en (= er) þeir, when they, D. N. i. 271; til þess en = til þess er, 81.
    2. as a relat. particle, which; sú hin ríka frú en ( which), Str.; mína dóttur en allra meyja er fegrst, my daughter who is the fairest of all women, Þiðr. 249; af því en hann hefir fingit, Al. 145; sá ótti en, 107; en sungin er, which is sung, Hom. 41; but hvárt en er, whether, N. G. L. i. 349.
    3. = ef, if, [cp. Old Engl. an]; sælar yæri sálurnar, en þær vissi, if they knew, Al. 114; en þeir vildi = ef þeir vildi, 118; en vér færim = ef vér færim, 120, esp. freq. in D. N. (vide Fr.) Very rare in Icel. writings or good MSS., e. g. en ek hefi með Guðs miskunn (i. e. er ek heti), as I have, because I have, Bs. i. 59, Hung. ch. 1; vide er.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > EN

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • many — [[t]me̱ni[/t]] ♦ 1) DET: DET pl n, oft with brd neg You use many to indicate that you are talking about a large number of people or things. I don t think many people would argue with that... Not many films are made in Finland... Do you keep many… …   English dictionary

  • many — [men′ē] adj. more, most [ME < OE manig, akin to Ger manch (OHG manag) < IE base * menegh , many, richly > Sans maghā , gift, OIr menicc, abundant] 1. consisting of some large, indefinite number (of persons or things); numerous 2.… …   English World dictionary

  • Great Famine (Ireland) — The Great Famine ( ga. An Gorta Mór [The term has appeared in the titles of numerous books on the event, as demonstrated by [http://www.worldcat.org/search?q=%22Gorta+Mo%CC%81r%22 =Search qt=results page this search on WorldCat] ] or ga. An… …   Wikipedia

  • Great Assembly — The Great Assembly (Hebrew: כְּנֶסֶת הַגְּדוֹלָה‎) or Anshei Knesset HaGedolah (אַנְשֵׁי כְּנֶסֶת הַגְּדוֹלָה, The Men of the Great Assembly ), also known as the Great Synagogue, was, according to Jewish tradition, an assembly of 120 scribes,… …   Wikipedia

  • many — / meni/ quantifier 1 (used especially in formal English, or in ordinary written or spoken English when in questions and negative sentences) a large number of people or things: many people/things/places etc: Many people find this kind of movie… …   Longman dictionary of contemporary English

  • Men in nursing — A male U.S. Navy nurse attends to a child. Nurses are traditionally and predominantly female; of the 2.1 million registered nurses in the …   Wikipedia

  • many — man|y W1S1 [ˈmeni] determiner, pron, adj [: Old English; Origin: manig] 1.) a large number of people or things ≠ ↑few →↑more, most ↑most, much ↑much ▪ Many people have to use a car to travel to work. ▪ I don t have many friends. ▪ …   Dictionary of contemporary English

  • Great Expectations (1946 film) — Infobox Film name = Great Expectations caption = original film poster writer = Original novel: Charles Dickens Screenplay adaptation: Anthony Havelock Allan Cecil McGivern Ronald Neame Kay Walsh starring = John Mills Anthony Wager Jean Simmons… …   Wikipedia

  • Great Depression —    The Great Depression was the worldwide economic crisis that followed the Wall Street Crash and the Depression that began in the United States in 1929. The calling in or cessation of foreign loans and the imposition of high tariffs led to a… …   Historical Dictionary of the Roosevelt–Truman Era

  • many */*/*/ — UK [ˈmenɪ] / US adverb, determiner, predeterminer, pronoun Word forms many : comparative more UK [mɔː(r)] / US [mɔr] superlative most UK [məʊst] / US [moʊst] Summary: Many can be used in the following ways: as a determiner (followed by a plural… …   English dictionary

  • great — /greɪt / (say grayt) adjective 1. unusually or comparatively large in size or dimensions: a great house; a great lake; a great fire. 2. large in number; numerous: a great many. 3. unusual or considerable in degree: great pain. 4. notable or… …  

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»